Tecsys Inc.

Streamline: Frequently Asked Questions

General | Accounts Payable | Accounts Receivable | Allpriser Integration | ECommerce / Web Services | Email sending module | Executive Management | Fax transmission module | Forms | General Ledger | Hand Helds | Inventory | Job Costing | Label Printing | Multi Language | Multi-Branch Processing | Order Processing | Password Module | Pricing | Purchase Order Processing | Query Questions | Release Notes | Returns Authorization | Sales Analysis | Service Inquiry | Service Work Order | Warehouse Management System
[Use CTRL+F keyboard shortcut to Search]


General

 
  1. I have a Sale Flyer that I would like to mail to my customers. Is there a quick way to print labels from Visual Streamline?
  2. Is there an easy way to get the file and field names that I need for my query?
  3. How do I take a screen print?
  4. Rights have been added for a user but they still don't have access to the program / functions in question - Why?
  5. Why can't I log on to Windows?
  6. How can I increase the idle timeout for the E-Commerce module on your web server?
  7. Is there a document that outlines regular processing that needs to be done within Streamline, such as daily, weekly, and month end tasks?
  8. What are the special characters that are reserved and should be avoided throughout the system?
  9. Can you explain the process for intercompany sales and how this is set up in the system?
  10. What is the Inventory Statistics Refresh Program for?
  11. What are the logo specifications?
  12. What does the Right VCISPI (View Cost in Std Prod Info screen) do?
  13. I need the ability to easily link files within the database to create custom reports.
  14. Company Setup > Company Info > User Maintenance. Under the Reporting Filter Options you can enter a Sale Rep Code... what does this control?
  15. I have to look at data at an old register, is there an easy way to have the system automatically go to that register?
  16. How do I add a new user ID in Streamline v10?
  17. How do I update the TEST company?
  18. What is the difference between Streamline Batch Service and Streamline Process Server and can I restart them myself?
  19. What screen resolutions are supported?
  20. I am receiving a DB error " Row handle referred to deleted row or row marked for deletion" when running program or report. What does this mean?
  21. How do I setup access to my Streamline data through Excel Query?
  22. How can I shadow a user's session in Windows Server 2008?
  23. Is it possible to have a 6 digital terminal ID for streamline v10?
  24. How do I export a report when export is not an option?
  25. Users are receiving a DB error: Transaction log for database sisl_data01 is full?
  26. We are experiencing a lot of locking, why?
  27. How do I add a company to a User's profile?
  28. How do a delete a user from the system?
  29. I set up a new user, and they are not able to get onto our test company?
  30. How do I set up either a New User with a Streamline icon on their desktop?
  31. What programs does the user right 'Right to Modify Tables' control?
  32. SQL Database jobs setup but need to be monitored by your technical support.
  33. I have an old TEST company that is no longer used, can it be deleted?
  34. Special Rights button in the User Maintenance is ghosted - why?
  35. User is receiving the following error when they try to open Streamline: Execute Permission denied on object MainMenu_Delete_User_tmp_tables. Database sisl_data01_owner. What does this mean?
  36. How do printer defaults work?
  37. Are modules global or company specific?
  38. I am receiving an error 'COLOR MAP FILE - could not open % settings % clr.slis.eng' when I try to open streamline?
  39. I ran utility under: Installation > Reset Programs > Update Standard cost with Landed, but not all items were updated why?
  40. If I flag a user in User Maintenance as a sales rep, what are the restrictions?
  41. What do the various colour codes throughout the software represent?
  42. User can't log into streamline v10, they are receiving license error – failed to load license parameter?
  43. How does the Inter-company flag in both AR and AP Master Files work?
  44. How do I add company logos to forms?
  45. What User Right controls the MODIFY button within Control File Maintenance?
  46. What does the RED CROSS indicate in my SQL server?
  47. What is the intended behaviour when I double-click a record on a browse screen?
  48. When I try to open up a document linked to an FAQ, 'Error on page' is displayed?
  49. How do I change my screen size in version 10?
  50. When printing, what does this error mean: Printer Not Activated, error code 30?
  51. How do I handle Sales Tax changes, and transition sales in progress at time of change?
  52. What are the Posting Controls for each register that needs to be posted at the end of each day?
  53. When trying to locate records by typing a search string there are significant delays after each character. Is there an alternative?
  54. What DB Errors received in Streamline are caused by Network Issues and therefore technical?
  55. How does the Report Generator work within Streamline 10 version?
  56. Is there a document for Technical maintenance?
  57. Where does the date and time that Streamline uses gets picked up from?
  58. Is there a keyboard template for Streamline Software?
  59. Does Visual Streamline support 3M's Point of Sale requirements?
  60. When purchasing a new computer what are the minimum specifications and requirements required to run Streamline?
  61. How do we change the time out settings on our terminals?
  62. How do I view, add, or delete a user right from a User ID, or User Group in Streamline v10?
  63. What access is required to open and modify the Security File?
  64. How does the Recalculate Taxes program work?
  65. Can I modify the colour palette in Streamline 10?
  66. Why am I receiving an error when I attempt to access the help file?
  67. User-Defined Reports overview.
  68. What needs to be done to give a user the ability to import, export data and to run queries, generally?
  69. When emailing from Streamline what can casue the email attachmenst not to show attached in email dialog window.
  70. Copy/paste function is not working between Streamline and Local Computers anymore?
  71. Why in Streamline 10 when I access the security file there are no Descriptions for the User Rights?
  72. What is the use of the Restocking fee in Contol File Maint?
  73. What causes the error: Arithmetic overflow error?
  74. Our Streamline server backup system has failed, is there another way to temporarily backup the data in case recovery is needed?
  75. How to avoid Streamline from disconnecting from the Terminal Server if the session is idle?
  76. How do I setup taxes for a US based Company?
  77. Company Setup > Company Info > Stock Types > Is this information stored in a table that can be queried?
  78. How to use the recorder software to record steps in Streamline?
  79. What is the process for tax setup for US based companies?
  80. Can I access Streamline from an IPAD or Tablet?
  81. Where is the default location for the adobe reader stored?
  82. Will there be any software changes to handle the penny being discontinued.
  83. Why do I not see my file in an import program when I press F5 on the path?
  84. Are there any conditions that will cause scancode to not pick up the freight terms on some orders?
  85. When support shadows my session I am disconnected when they exit, how do I prevent this?
  86. What areas can I check when I find issues such as: freezing, hanging, not responding, and slow screens?
  87. How do I configure the Signature Pad Units?
  88. Forms sometimes only print half the page, how can this be fixed?
  89. How does multi language capability work?
  90. I can modify Business Rules other than the Custom tab why?
  91. I am receiving a Dead Lock error - what does this mean and what do I need to do?
  92. How to disable a user from seeing costs?
  93. Is there an overview document for the Task Scheduler Framework?
  94. I need the ability to reset / disconnect users from Streamline through Terminal Serves. How do I set this up?
  95. What are the specific rules sorting rules that are used to sort by bin location?
  96. What Streamline files need to be backed up to ensure we are backing up all required information to complete a restore if needed?
  97. Is there an overview document for the Signature Capture (Tethered and Remote) module?
  98. Is there a untility to change a branch code throughout the system?
  99. Integrity check and Index job optimization has failed, what do I do?
  100. When exporting a report to XML I am receiving an error "XML Parse Error" what does this mean?
  101. How do I convert a text file to a CSV file?
  102. Is it okay for me to make changes to the Streamline DB using SQL or other applications?
  103. How to create a Favorites menu option or add an item to it?
  104. After an upgrade, why are some screens now showing scroll bars?
  105. What are the minimum technical requirements to upgrade to .net?
  106. Why when emailing quotes/invoices and the receipent prints the PDF is my company logo corrupted.
  107. Why is our company logo corrupted when a recipient tries to print a emailed quote or invoice.
  108. Why when importing an Excel document into Streamline are the dashes replaced with question marks?
  109. How to add new users in Streamline .net versions?
  110. Top

Accounts Payable

 
  1. How do I record payment of US Supplier Invoices by Visa in Canadian funds?
  2. How do I process A/P Invoices when vendor has sent 2 Invoices but stock receipt was done under one reference only?
  3. Why isn't the 'Take Late Discount' button enabled?
  4. How do I pay an A/P Invoice with a credit card?
  5. I have run the Generate by Formula program in A/P Payments and one of the invoices satisfying the date criteria is not tagged for payment?
  6. If I cancel an A/P Cheque, in what period will it cancel?
  7. Is it possible to put an A/P invoice on hold after it has been updated so it does not get paid?
  8. I just cancelled an Accounts Payable Cheque and I don't see the posting for the cancellation in the G/L?
  9. How can I find out if a P/O has been billed by the vendor?
  10. Is there a way to record when a cheque was mailed to a supplier?
  11. I have several vendors that I pay by a single credit card account using Pay To Code. How can I get all payments to print on a single cheque?
  12. Is there a way to deal with split terms? For example... a P/O requires deposit of 40% with order, 50% upon delivery and 10% within the normal 30 days.
  13. How do I clear unmatched stock receipts from my A/P Clearing Audit?
  14. A P/O has been issued and received for the wrong vendor. How do I now process the invoice from the correct vendor?
  15. How do I pay US vendor invoices via a wire transfer or bank draft?
  16. I have a credit on a supplier's account and they have now sent us a cheque for it. How do I process this?
  17. When I use line by line matching, I see two differences. What do these represent, and which one will be used to post to PPV?
  18. I have done my cheque run, and I am trying to update the Disbursement Journal, but it's telling me that there are unprinted cheques. Why?
  19. What is required to be able to change the 'Match Method' when entering an A/P Invoice?
  20. What lead time does the 'Date Wanted' field use on a Purchase Order?
  21. Is there a way to restrict users that have access to Accounts Payable from viewing certain supplier records?
  22. What is the difference between Purchase Variance G/L account in Currency File, and PPV Over Tolerance G/L account in Control File?
  23. How does the Generate By Formula date ranges work in A/P Payments?
  24. Does Streamline have a cheque format that is CPA compliant?
  25. What is available in Streamline to help keep the system cheque number assigned synchronized to the Form number when using new CPA compliant formats?
  26. When printing cheques using new CPA compliant formats, the cheque portion is printing on the next page. Why?
  27. Why are all buyer codes not showing up in P/O Maintenance when I hit F5 on the buyer code field?
  28. I have access to modify suppliers, but I am not able to modify the G/L Standard Distribution. Why?
  29. How do I match an unmatched A/P invoice?
  30. How do I clear outstanding AlP invoices that have been entered, posted , but will never get paid (for whatever reason)?
  31. What is the font name needed for printing the MICR encoding on laser cheques?
  32. How is tax calculated for A/P invoices entered with 2-way matching method or on account?
  33. Does the system have a process in place to handle Electronic Funds Transfer for Vendors?
  34. My cheque number is incorrect, how can I change it?
  35. What are the items to review if my A/P aging is out from G/L?
  36. How does the Generate By Formula work in general?
  37. Can I see an example of how the Generate By Formula works?
  38. I am trying to match P/O xxxx to invoice yyyy but the P/O does not show up in the matching screen. Why?
  39. How do Supplier Rebates work?
  40. What are AP Clearing and Exchange accounts used for in the currency master?
  41. What are the conditions to be able to modify Currency on a Supplier Master record?
  42. What printer is recommended for printing from Streamline including Cheques?
  43. Is there a way to reverse a cancelled cheque in Streamline?
  44. Why is the AP Clearing Report out from the GL?
  45. How do I create post dated cheques?
  46. I need a report that shows what AP Invoices were posted in a period and what tax and other amounts were posted with the invoice.
  47. I received a cheque for an outstanding credit in my accounts payable. What is the best way to clear this in the system, and what GL accounts should be used?
  48. How do I prepay a Vendor for goods that have not yet been received?
  49. Why is the payment discount posting to a different branch?
  50. In Accounts Payable > A/P Invoicing... > A/P Invoice Register, the Select button is disabled. Why?
  51. In the Supplier Details, there is a field called 'Our Account No.'. Where does this appear?
  52. When entering a Purchase Order, I am getting stuck on the REQ # field, why?
  53. What are the items to review when AP is out from GL?
  54. How do I change the last cheque number?
  55. I have an un-posted 3 way matched invoices but yet Select button is not enabled on the AP invoice register for me to post?
  56. Why am I receiving an error: 'Other Transactions Found' when I attempt to post a PPV adjustment?
  57. How does the PPV adj processing screen work?
  58. Why is the Generate by Formula option in AP Payments not enabled?
  59. Why do I have records on AP clearing with zero balances, and how do I fix this?
  60. I have an invoice and a credit sitting in my payments screen, how do I clear/offset these two together?
  61. What procedure can I follow when a vendor wants payment against the purchase order (various intervals), no invoice for goods sent yet. How do you tie these in later (when invoice does come in) and how to you relate the invoice and payments to the original purchase order?
  62. Attached is a spreadsheet outlining a process for paying a US invoice by Visa.
  63. CPA form example.
  64. What conditions apply to an Inactive Vendor?
  65. What is the process for 2 Way matching?
  66. How do I use AP Payment muli user mode?
  67. Why is there a blank register showing in AP Invoice Registers?
  68. Top

Accounts Receivable

 
  1. I ran the Sales Rep Code Change program, but my history did not update. Why?
  2. How do I process an NSF Cheque?
  3. Why can I not change the Sales Rep in the Customer Master File?
  4. Why is there an invoice number missing from the numerical sequence?
  5. How do I issue a cheque to a customer for a credit balance on their account?
  6. How do I process a cash receipt for a cheque we've received that is not from a customer - such as a rebate cheque?
  7. What does the button called 'AutoCheck' do in the Authorize Release Credit Hold Program?
  8. I have a customer that does not want to receive statements because they always pay by invoice. Can we NOT print a statement for them?
  9. How do I use customer credits to offset against their outstanding invoices in A/R?
  10. I am trying to update the Sales Order Invoice Register but I am getting a message that there is a problem with invalid G/L account?
  11. I have a customer with 30 day terms. They have invoices that have not been paid for over 30 days but they are not going on past due hold. Why?
  12. Is there a way to ensure that a Past Due Hold code is entered against all customers?
  13. Why am I not able to tag orders to be released in the 'Authorize/Release Held Orders program?
  14. I have a customer that has paid some invoices however the Average Payment Days field in the Customer Statistics screen has not been calculated. Why?
  15. In the Customer Master File > Stats, what are Hits and Misses?
  16. Is there a way to update the field 'Accept Backorders' for all customer automatically?
  17. Can a deposit slip be reprinted?
  18. Can I add an interest charge to A/R statements for past due invoices?
  19. I am seeing a 'C' next to my margins on the 'Product Code Summary' report when I review my Sales Order Invoicing Register. What does the 'C' represent?
  20. I have changed a sales rep code in the master file, but when I run the sales analysis reports, it still pulling data for my customer under the old rep. Why?
  21. I have changed a Terms Code on my customer, but the invoices are still printing with the old Terms Code?
  22. Do Credit Memos done as either 'Return to Stock' or 'Price Adjustments' flow through to the commission payable?
  23. How do I pre-bill a customer for an order that is not yet shipped/invoiced?
  24. I need the ability to have Built-in contact management and customer notes.
  25. In Accounts Receivable > A/R Master Files > Customers (Statistics) - what currency is this in?
  26. How does the Customer Reserved stock button in my customer master file work?
  27. How do I delete a previously entered cash receipt?
  28. What are the different types of holds, and how can they be released?
  29. I am not able to see the G/L Distribution in the A/R Invoices screen. Why?
  30. I have received a cheque from a customer that is also a supplier, and they included the vendor credit on the cheque. How do I process this?
  31. We noticed while doing a query that there is field name 'known_as' in the Customers file. What is this for?
  32. At the time of shipping or invoicing - is there a way to add a comment that will print on the Customers invoice?
  33. I have user right RTMSR - Right to modify sales rep, but I am still not able to modify the sales rep in the sales rep master. Why?
  34. What is 'Unapplied Cash' in the A/R Aging screen?
  35. How do I process a Cash Receipt Deposit?
  36. What does the Accounts Receivable > Change Master File Codes > Transfer ShipTo Location program do?
  37. There is a field in the A/R statements for 'payments'. There is payment history on file, and yet this field is not calculating the payment information. Why?
  38. I have invoices that I need to write off as bad debt - how do I do this?
  39. There is a flag in the customer master called "Summary Invoice by Cust G/L". What does this do?
  40. Sales Order Processing > Processing > Customer Service Inquiry > Statistics button shows Average Pmt Days. Is this kept in a file or built on the fly?
  41. What controls the printing of the Terms Discount Line on the Customer Statements?
  42. Can statements be printed for customers who have no outstanding balance on the acct?
  43. What is the user right needed to be able to modify the ozone Depletion cards?
  44. Can you explain the use of the 'Ship Complete' flag in the AR master file?
  45. What are the Customer Status types that do not allow an order to be entered?
  46. In the Customer Master File there is a field called 'Barcodes on controlling document' If turned on, what barcodes are printed?
  47. How does the button in the A/R master file Auto - Calc credit limits work?
  48. What does the button in the A/R Customer master file ' On Hold' flag do?
  49. When you use Change Customer Codes does it also move the customer parts entered?
  50. Why is my aging on my credit showing XXX days old, when it was just done today?
  51. How does Consolidated Invoicing work?
  52. I need to change the currency on a customer, can I do this?
  53. How does the Task Scheduler work?
  54. What user right controls the 'Invoice' button in the Shipment Confirmation screen?
  55. Is there a way to create A/R Interest Invoices for overdue balances?
  56. Why is my Cash Discount amount not posting to the main branch when 'Post by Branch' flag in the currency is Off?
  57. How do I extract sales for First Nations' customers that bought goods off-reserve in Ontario that may have met requirements for the First Nations' POS Rebate of PST portion of HST?
  58. Why are some records in the A/R Interest charge screen bold while others are not?
  59. Are Terms Discounts based on Net or Gross?
  60. Is there is a way to clear the last run Calculation Date in the Interest Calculation Program:
  61. Is there a process to deal with Trade In's towards the purchase of a new product?
  62. In the Customer Master Screen, what does the field Customer PO Line # in O/E do?
  63. What is the purpose of the fields labeled Ann Int Rate/Days in the customer master file?
  64. What are the conditions for an invoice to appear on the Tax report, when the OTHER GST AND SALES TAX Flag is on?
  65. Voucher Processing Overview Document.
  66. AR > Change Master File Codes > Transfer Ship to Records
  67. What limitations/controls exist for Inactive Customers?
  68. What does the the disputed flag do if an invoice is tagged in the AR Aging details screen?
  69. If the Industry Code on a "ship to" is modified, does this change the history on sales reports?
  70. AR> Credit and Collections > AR Aging Report > Overdue Accts. How do credits age?
  71. Turning on the flag 'Barcode on Control Document' in Customer Master caused the logo to no longer print on the Control Document. Why?
  72. How does End User processing work?
  73. What is included in the SALES column on the Invoice Status Report?
  74. How do I enter a Deposit onto a customer's account, such as prepayments?
  75. Our terms and conditions are a full page of legal jargon. Is there a process to send this information with Invoices?
  76. How does the feature "Bill To" located within the Customer Master File work?
  77. I am not able to locate an Invoice number in the system?
  78. Is there a program that allows you to import values into the user defined fields in the A/R?
  79. Is there a place to select an AR invoice "start" number when loading to a new company from another system?
  80. How do credits affect orders going on credit hold?
  81. CDN Customer sent US cheque to pay his account. They short paid for exchange purposes. What is the best procedure to handle this?
  82. How is HST charged on Freight and MISC items, and misc charges.
  83. What is the process when one customer has paid for other customers' invoices?
  84. If the customer master name and/or address are modified, what will reprinted invoices pick up?
  85. Why am I not able to modify the MIsc flag in the AR Master File?
  86. to be re-used
  87. Is there a way to populate a field in the cusotmer master for all customers?
  88. How does the customer type discount work?
  89. How do I change from Single user Cash Receipts to Mutli user?
  90. Why is my session hanging when I attempt to invoice orders through invoice preparation?
  91. A Cash Receipt was applied to wrong customer, how can I fix it?
  92. Cash receipts posting should have been posted to DEC date but instead was posted to JAN date. How can we fix this?
  93. How does the Ship Via Account Numbers work
  94. How do I process a cash receipt for a US customer into my CDN bank? Or vice versa?
  95. Why can I no longer view Credit Card Numbers when I have user right VCCN?
  96. Is there an overview of the New Customer Master Interface?
  97. How do I clear existing customer part numbers?
  98. How to fix a future dated cash receipt done in error.
  99. Why have my invoice numbers jumped by 1000 or almost 1000?
  100. In AR > Master Files > Customer > What does the Priicing Overrides button do?
  101. In Cash Receipt Entry, how do I navigate to Previous Row now in .net?
  102. Top

Allpriser Integration

 
  1. As soon as an item is linked, the Alllpriser update changed our existing description. Is there an option that we can turn on/off?
  2. Allpriser (Allpri$er) Integration overview.
  3. Top

ECommerce / Web Services

 
  1. I created a new product code, but I am not seeing it in E-Commerce? What is the criteria for new items to appear in E-Commerce?
  2. What are the requirements for image sizes to properly appear on the web?
  3. Where are the various email addresses stored for those emails originating from e-commerce?
  4. I have customers placing order on the web, but the orders are not hitting streamline?
  5. My customer is trying to access E-Commerce and getting a message 'The password has been reset due to invalid login attempts'. What do I do?
  6. Is it possible to see a total On Hand qty in E-Commerce for designated warehouses instead of just the total for one warehouse?
  7. Where do I change the default email address in Streamline when sending confirmation?
  8. What Lead Time field is displayed in E-Commerce?
  9. The web user has entered a P/O number, yet E-Commerce keeps displaying the message 'P/O Number is Mandatory' when trying to submit an order. Why?
  10. What is Global Shipto Functionality in E-Commerce?
  11. Is it possible to have the website on a https://?
  12. When an order is placed through e-commerce, how long does it take for the notification email, and for the order to hit the queue?
  13. Why is the Process button sometimes greyed out in the Held Submissions page?
  14. What are E-Commerce Held Submissions and how do they work?
  15. Is there a document that shows typical E-Commerce Default Settings?
  16. Some web-users are not seeing any product images, but this works fine for other web users?
  17. Is there an overview document for the E-Commerce Newsletters sub-module?
  18. Is there an overview document for the E-Commerce Favourites Lists sub-module?
  19. Is there an overview document for the E-Commerce Reporting sub-module?
  20. Is it possible to individually set the number items that appear on a page for each customer?
  21. How long does it take for an image to replicate and appear on E-commerce?
  22. In the web-categorization relationships; I'm trying to exclude an item; but I cannot click it?
  23. What is the hierarchy for determining the warehouse against which availability will be calculated and orders will be placed?
  24. What browser are supported for E-Commerce access?
  25. What do the 2 resyn icons and 1 clear cache icon for web services data do?
  26. What email account is used to send the emails?
    Is there any way to configure the SMTP server and account login / server information that the actual e-commerce software uses to send out its notification emails?
  27. Is there an overview document for the E-Commerce Categorization sub-module?
  28. Is there a 2015 overview document for the E-Commerce Categorization sub-module?
  29. Is there an overview document for the Streamline E-Commerce (formerly WebServices) module?
  30. Is there a 2017 overview document for the Streamline E-Commerce module?
  31. I get an error message when I try to log into E commerce: Error is: Unable to cast object of type'System.DBNull ' to type 'System.String'. What does this mean?
  32. How can we get the Product Publishing long description to display on the E-Commerce website in product details? I only see option to display short description. Is this possible?
  33. What does the flashing orange triangle on the e-commerce screen mean?
  34. The flashing orange triangle with exclamation mark denotes that there are different pricing levels on this item whether it is customer contract price breaks or just general pricing rules - Can this be turned OFF from displaysing?
  35. Check list for when products are missing from E-Commerce
  36. What are the system requirements to be able to enter credit card numbers in E commerce?
  37. Why is my Web quote not converting to an order automatically when I have business rule E commerce # 8 is turned ON?
  38. Is there an overview document for the e-commerce Products LIsts sub-module?
  39. Why am I receiving errors with Captcha when either 'Request a Login' or 'Forgot Password' feature is used in E commerce?
  40. How does E commerce submission inquiry screen work
  41. How To Get Google reCAPTCHA V2 API Keys?
  42. How do I set the default logon category in the Streamline e-Commerce module?
  43. Top

Email sending module

 
  1. I am thinking of utilizing email module, what are the benefits?
  2. Business Rule EML9 (Email pending (in x days) vendor cost updates to buyers) sends out an automatic email to the buyer for cost updates scheduled. Where is this email address pulled from?
  3. We have some of the email business rules enabled to auto email sales reps information - however one rep is not receiving the emails - why?
  4. I am having trouble emailing from within the software.
  5. Will Business Rule EML11 (Integrate email into Outlook) work with another email system such as GMAIL? What are my options?
  6. When Emailing Customer Invoices, is there any way to have it send email to the Ship to email?
  7. When I email a document from Streamline, the attachments are not going through why?
  8. Can large email files within Outlook cause delays in Streamline?
  9. Emails sent from the software do not recognize Read Receipts, why?
  10. Why does the mail box icon on the Main Menu not show me my emails sent from Streamline?
  11. Does Streamline require that we use Exchange or if we were to move to something cloud based i.e. gmail would that be compatible with Streamline?
  12. How to modify the email subject or email message for emails sent from Streamline
  13. Why are attachments from Streamline software so large? Is there anything I can do to reduce the size?
  14. Is there a way to modify the the subject line and body text of an email generated from Streamline each time the email is generated?
  15. Is there a way to combine customer invoices into one email?
  16. Why do the emails I send show the wrong sender display name?
  17. Streamline 2018.x/2019.x SMTP Email Functionality
  18. I am having trouble emailing from Streamline 2018.x/2019.x
  19. Why do I see failed emailed quotes in the email log with no to address?
  20. Top

Executive Management

 
  1. In the Executive Management > Statistics > Sales orders screen there is an area that shows Hits/Misses/fill rates, and Stock orders. What does this represent?
  2. The Executive Management Inventory values do not appear to be correct?
  3. How do I balance EM Sales Order Information?
  4. How do I balance the Invoice and Credit Details?
  5. How do I balance AR Information and AP Information?
  6. How do I balance Purchasing and Inventory information?
  7. How do I balance Cash Position?
  8. What is the Days Sales Outstanding figure and how is it calculated?
  9. Top

Fax transmission module

 
  1. Where can I attach / maintain a Terms and Conditions document to be sent with our invoices when faxed or emailed?
  2. We don't dial the 1 for long distance calls due to a telephone plan. How can I turn this off when faxing?
  3. We don't want to send cover pages with our batch faxed documents - like invoices. Is there a way to control this?
  4. I want to do a mass fax from Zeta fax, what file type is supported in Zeta Fax to be able to import a file that contains the customers fax numbers.
  5. How does the long distance flag after the fax number work?
  6. How to add a new user to zeta fax?
  7. What kind of modem should I buy to use with Zetafax in Streamline software?
  8. Does faxing from Streamline work with FOIP?
  9. Some users do not have the fax option. Is this a rights issue?
  10. Where can I make changes to our fax cover sheet on purchase orders?
  11. My faxing has stopped working and Zetafax says it is offline, how to a fix it.
  12. Does the Streamline system support Internet Faxing?
  13. What is the latest version of Zeta fax that is compatible with Streamline?
  14. Top

Forms

 
  1. I have my customer set to print 2 copies of their invoices, but I only receive 1 copy. Why?
  2. I have 2nd lines of descriptions on my products, but they are not printing on my forms. Why?
  3. We don't want items that are not in stock to print on the picking / packing slips. Is there a way to control this?
  4. Can I have multiple copies of invoices print but to different printers so I can print on different types of paper?
  5. Is there a way to identify a rush transfer linked to a rush order?
  6. Top

General Ledger

 
  1. I have created a new User and assigned right ROGL (Right Of General Ledger), but the user still does not have this module on the screen. Why?
  2. How do I change the exchange rates?
  3. I am unable to close a period in Month End Period Processing. I am getting a message stating that the the period cannot be validated due to unposted BOLs. Why?
  4. I am unable to change the date on the bank reconciliation. Why?
  5. Can you explain the Month End Period Processing Program?
  6. We want to start doing our Bank Reconciliation using the software. How do we start?
  7. What are the Month End Procedures ?
  8. What are the Inventory Balancing Procedures?
  9. Can you briefly explain month end cutoff procedures?
  10. In the Currency Details, there is an A/P Posting Category labelled 'Freight Expense'. What does this G/L Account control?
  11. In the G/L Accounts details, what are the Reclaim fields in the Tax Info section?
  12. In the G/L Accounts details, what is the Tax Account flag?
  13. How does the cut date work in period maintenance?
  14. How do the G/L Accrual and Repetitive Methods work in G/L Transaction Entry?
  15. What user rights are needed to delete G/L Periods?
  16. What does the program 'Update GL Bal File for 0 PTD' in the GL Inquiry do?
  17. How do I reconcile my Bank Reconciliation?
  18. My GL Trial Balance shows in balance at the end of last year, but for this year the PTD debits equal credits the the YTD do not?
  19. How to Setup a New Bank Acct?
  20. How to setup GL Periods?
  21. We need to add another branch into our Streamline system, how do we do this?
  22. How to I post to a previous period that has been closed?
  23. How do I import a GL entry?
  24. What area of the software does User Right: RTCCA control?
  25. Balance Sheet does not balance but trial balance does - what can I do?
  26. GL > Master Files > Currencies, why can I not modify the exchange GL accounts to be 'post by branch'? What controls this?
  27. How do I give a user access to ONLY the GL Inquiry menu option?
  28. Is there a way to restrict user to only see certain GL accounts in the GL Inquiry?
  29. In GL > Excel Statment Definitions, why is the Account Ranges Button disabled?
  30. What is involved in changing year end dates?
  31. How do I end up with gaps in my periods?
  32. Top

Hand Helds

 
  1. Is there a document that gives an overview of HandHeld processing in Streamline?
  2. Top

Inventory

 
  1. I have a US vendor for which I am trying to enter a duty % rate in the inventory supplier record, but it is not letting me. Why?
  2. Why can't I change the decimal places in the Product Master File details screen?
  3. I am trying to change the details in a bill of materials list, but the Modify button is not enabled. Why?
  4. Where did this Average Cost come from?
  5. Is there a way to filter out a specific stock type for only one user?
  6. Why aren't the additional descriptions for items printing on this document?
  7. Is there a way to tell who changed a product code?
  8. Is there a way to see who changed the Standard Cost on an item?
  9. I have an assembled kit that is showing an incorrect cost. I have added some user defined charges such as 'packaging' but my cost did not update. Why?
  10. Is there something in the system that automatically changes un-used part numbers to 'To Be Deleted' Status?
  11. Is there a way to see changes made to the Standard List Price on an item?
  12. What is the calculation for EOQ/ROP quantities? NOTE: This FAQ is OBSOLETE, and has been replaced by a more recent FAQ.
  13. What User Right is required to change the address and other information in the Warehouse Master File?
  14. How are inventory turns calculated?
  15. How is average cost calculated?
  16. I need to change the status of all items in a product line for example: 'to be deleted' is there an update program available for this?
  17. What is the purpose of a Special Order Item?
  18. Why are there items on the Inventory Quantity Discrepancy Report, and what does it mean?
  19. Is the YTD sales column on the Inventory Availability Report based on Fiscal or Calendar year?
  20. Is there a report we can run at physical inventory time to help identify orders impacted by counts that have changed our on hand quantities?
  21. I have an order that has a back order... why doesn't it show in the back order flush screen?
  22. What is the basic difference between a Build to Order item and an Assembled item?
  23. We use a lot of Alias Codes. Is there a way to populate these without typing them in?
  24. I want to print count sheets - do we have to initialize physical inventory to do this?
  25. I am trying to change the lot/serial flags but it's not letting me. Why?
  26. How does the customer consignment work?
  27. How does Supplier Consignment work?
  28. What are the user rights required to access Inventory -> Remove Unwanted Products?
  29. Why am I not able to change the standard cost on an item?
  30. What user rights are required to Print Physical Count Sheets?
  31. Inventory Monthend Processing - Cutoff Process
  32. When looking at inventory history, I need the ability to see pertinent information on one screen. How can I do this?
  33. I need to have lots of character spaces for the creation of new part numbers and their descriptions. What does Streamline offer?
  34. I need the ability to do easy cost/price updates. What does Streamline offer?
  35. I am using the Import program to load new items into Streamline - however the Standard Cost field has not been populated. Why?
  36. How can I attach an Image to a product in the Product Code Master File?
  37. In Supplier Info there are 4 fields for lead times, there is Lead Time (in Days), Last Lead Time (in Days), Average Lead Time (in Days) and Average Lead Time (Date Created). What is the difference?
  38. Supplier Info > Average Lead Times - does the average lead time take into consideration branch transfers that are done?
  39. Does the average lead time in supplier record of an item take into consideration purchases made for all warehouses, or just the primary warehouse?
  40. What is the file layout for the Import Count Entry From CSV program that is located in the physical inventory module and how does it work?
  41. How do I back date the transfer report to show me open transfer as at a certain point in time when they would all be received already?
  42. Is there a way to hide the average cost from only the Inventory Browse screen?
  43. What are the user rights associated with being able to zoom into the Purchase Order details, from the purchase history button in Product Code Lookup?
  44. I am trying to do a cycle count, I have initilaized, but the system is not printing any items on my count sheets. Why?
  45. What are the basic processes of Physical Inventory?
  46. In the Inventory > Reports and Inquiries... > No Sales Since Report, there is a No Sales Since date and an optional No Movement Since date... How do these dates differ?
  47. If I want to add freight to a transfer receipt what is the calculation used to disburse freight amongst multiple lines on the transfer?
  48. I am getting an error telling me I have a bad character when I use the map import. What does this mean?
  49. How does the Inventory > Reports and Inquiries... > Stock Aging Report work?
  50. When using the Remove Unwanted Items program, what does it check to determine if an item can be permanently deleted or not?
  51. When importing into Inventory > Global Changes... > Change Inv Master Codes, we are getting an error that says there is a duplicate index. We've checked to make sure our list has no duplicates - why is this coming up?
  52. What does it mean when QUANTITIES in Product code lookup appear in RED?
  53. Inventory > Reports and Inquiries > Availability and Valuation Report - is the YTD Sales column shown on the Availability report based on Calendar or Fiscal year?
  54. In the Warehouse Detail Screen, there is a field for Primary Supplier. Why is it blank, and why does it not show us the primary supplier for the item?
  55. When superseding parts, which parts gets superseded - old or new?
  56. How do I process an item that has 2 vendors. The first vendor is the one I purchase the item from, then need to send to 2nd one for additional work?
  57. How do I restrict users from being able to see/modify cost in the supplier info record of the Product Code Lookup Screen?
  58. How do you use the warranty start and end dates on serialized items?
  59. What does the User Cost Base in User Maintenance affect and what does BR INV4 (Costing method used for quotes and orders) affect?
  60. Can I change a stocking UOM?
  61. In the Warehouse Master File there is a field located at the bottom left of the screen that reads 'replicate cost change to all warehouses' What cost is this referring to?
  62. I am trying to setup a broken case upcharge, but it's not working. Why?
  63. What is the process for handling a situation whereby a customer returns a product for repair but would like a quote before proceeding with the repair?
  64. In the program 'New Supplier List By Product', there is a flag 'Customer List in Home Currency'. When do I need to that flag ON or OFF?
  65. What are the formulae when Business Rule INV57 (EOQ/ROP formula) is set to Advanced? NOTE: This FAQ is OBSOLETE, and has been replaced by a more recent FAQ.
  66. How can I print a list of raw materials that are on a kit?
  67. I am viewing my movement and/or sales analysis reports and it is missing information. Why?
  68. Is there a way to control the default re-order method on new inventory items that are created?
  69. Why is it that users are able to change the cost field when entering a supplier RA?
  70. There is a flag in the Supplier Info screen in the Inventory Master called 'Price Update Flag'. What is it for?
  71. In the Product Line Master, there is a prompt for GL for Commission Revenue. What is this for?
  72. How does supplier consignment affect the inventory and other GL accounts?
  73. What is the formula to determine what products to include in a cycle count?
  74. Is there a way to change products' reorder method from Min/Max to EOQ/ROP other than doing them individually?
  75. In the Product Master file, there is a checkbox labelled 'Back Order'. What does this do?
  76. What is the difference between Inventory > Global Changes > Update Reorder Fields and Inventory > Global Changes > Whs Replenishment Settings?
  77. I am unsuccessfuly trying to delete a supplier record from Supplier Info screen in Product Code Lookup as it says there are open PO's found, yet I have no open PO's with the item. Why?
  78. Once a physical inventory has been initialized, can sales transactions be entered? If so, how does it affect inventory?
  79. How do I use the information on the Inventory Product Balancing Report?
  80. How do I use the Inv Transaction by Register report to help me find out why my inventory won't balance?
  81. I am trying to do a warehouse transfer and it tells me I have used an invalid account but won't allow me to change it. What can I do?
  82. How do I print the Warehouse Transfer Report to show me outstanding transfer at a point in time, so I can reconcile my In-Transit GL control accounts?
  83. How do I get my images to appear completely (without cropping) on the main product screen?
  84. How does the program Update Standard Cost with Landed located in: Installation > Reset Program work?
  85. Can I modify the stock type of KITS to be regular stock items?
  86. How does the program Map Import, located in: Inventory > Global Changes, work?
  87. What is the difference between an A and a B kit?
  88. How does the program Customer List Price Update work in the Inventory > Processing submenu?
  89. How does the Dangerous Goods flag work? And how does the Dangerous Goods Default Freight Surcharge flag in company setup work?
  90. How does VMI Processing work?
  91. How do UPC codes in the Product Master File work?
  92. How does the program 'Update List Price to BOM Cost' work?
  93. How do I assign a filename that is UNC (Universal Naming Convention) compliant?
  94. How do Templates and Configured stock types work?
  95. What transactions affect the average weighted cost for an item?
  96. In the Template Import program there is a button called 'Blank Fields'. How does this work?
  97. What does the field 'Spec Doc' do in the Inventory Master File?
  98. How do Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) work in the Inventory Master File?
  99. What tables are updated by the Inventory Statistics Refresh program?
  100. Is there a way to update the list price of type A items from the total landed cost of their associated bills of materials?
  101. What cost does the Valuation Report use, the Warehouse file cost or the cost history?
  102. Why is the Critical Flag in the Inventory Master File ghosted?
  103. What is the difference between a 'Special Order' item and a 'Non-Stock' item?
  104. What are the conditions to be able to delete a supplier Record from a product?
  105. Using my own data, is there a way to confirm EOQ/ROP calculations or simulate EOQ/ROP calculations under varous scenarios?
  106. I am trying to use the Excel spreadsheet 'EOQ_ROP_Calculations.xls'. Is there a document detailing its usage?
  107. What are the formulae for EOQ, ROP, Safety Units and Average Monthly Usage?
  108. Is 'Supplier Lead Time in Days' field based on Calendar Days, or Working Days, as in 5 days per week for example?
  109. What are the conditions that the system looks for when determining if a suppler info record can be deleted?
  110. Inventory > Processing > Convert Non Stock to Stock items, how does this work?
  111. What do the Transfer Committed and Transfer On Order buttons do in the inventory warehouse screen?
  112. Production Items Processing Overview
  113. What do the different Product Statuses do?
  114. Why are items missing from the No Sales since report?
  115. In the Average Cost History, there are system defined Transaction Types. What does each represent?
  116. How is the Average Monthly Usage calculation affected by the Exceptional Order field?
  117. We use the multi company warehouse display and not all the companies are showing, how can I fix this?
  118. What is the maximum number of characters that will print on forms for the Description fields?
  119. What is the purpose of the 'Not Stocked' flag in the Product's Warehouse and the Warehouse screens?
  120. How does the 'Print Raw Material on Forms' flag in Product Line Master work?
  121. What User Right is needed to grant a user access to change the BIN location for an item?
  122. Why is the Search feature not finding all my items?
  123. EOQ/ROP Calculation Methodologies Overview.
  124. Does the system track Quantities by Bin Location?
  125. What is the Formula used for PPV adjustments?
  126. What does the Post G/L by Product Line flag in the Prod Line master do, and what does the post by branch flag in the Currency master do?
  127. Is there a costing overview that explains what the different costs are for?
  128. Is there a way to link stock Purchase Orders for raw materials to production tickets?
  129. What right allows someone to delete inventory items from Product Master Screen?
  130. How does the Pack Size field in the Product Master File work?
  131. Do you have a processing flowchart for Assembled Items (Type-A Kits)?
  132. Do you have a processing flowchart for Built to Order Items (Type-B Kits)?
  133. Inventory > Processing > Flag Special Order Item, how does this program work?
  134. Why am I receiving error about an Inconsistency in UOM Conversion Factors, and how do I fix it?
  135. How to create a new Supplier Info Record?
  136. What date range should I use when running the ABC Classification program?
  137. What is available in the software to accomodate Cribmaster processing?
  138. When updating a file from New Supplier List By Product, what controls the field "Update customer List price with Supplier List?
  139. Notes button in product master - is there a length restriction?
  140. What does 'Inventory Transaction Error' on item XXXX tell me?
  141. What are the conditions to be able to delete a Warehouse?
  142. Why are values missing from the Stock Aging Report?
  143. Is there a way to import descriptions for multi languages?
  144. How do we restrict access from modifying the Inventory Warehouse screen?
  145. How does the Populate Alias Table program work?
  146. What are my options when a stocking Uom is incorrect, but cannot be changed due to history?
  147. What table contains the Spec Doc info that's located in the product master page?
  148. What do Substitutes, Associated Prods and Superseded buttons do?
  149. How do Substitutes, Associated Prods, and Superseded items work?
  150. What are all the areas of the software that Standard Cost can be updated from?
  151. Is there a way to see products that are missing costs?
  152. Is there an audit for changes to the Min/max levels?
  153. How are the Current and Last Year fields in the Supplier Info screen Updated?
  154. How does the Export Template Program work?
  155. How does the UDF program work in the Inventory Master Files?
  156. What is the excel file layout format for source file for V-Click?
  157. Is there an overview of how V-click works?
  158. When I print MSD Sheets from Streamline, I am receiving an error telling me I have no access?
  159. Why is the system rounding the average cost on a sale?
  160. Inventory > Master File > Product Code Lookup > Supplier Info > how does system calculate the freight %? It does seem to be accurate to me?
  161. In the Map Import program, what field do I use to update the value to the Pack Size?
  162. How does the Discrepancy Count feature work in Physical Inventory
  163. My Product Descriptions show each morning in a different language than I would like. Is there a way to have it show in that language permanently?
  164. Is there an overview document for the Visual Streamline Product Publishing program?
  165. How does Lot and Serial Processing work?
  166. How do I query UDF codes linked to products?
  167. How to fix a negative VMI quantity?
  168. Inventory > Warehouse Transfers > Transfer Product, how do I select a serial or lot number when confirming the transfer, for a committed transfer when there is a serial/lot on hand ?
  169. Why are transfers not being created when the PO is linked to a custosmer sales order for another warehouse?
  170. What is the calculation used in the Average lead time in the Prod warehouse screen?
  171. Top

Job Costing

 
  1. How do I issue a credit note for a Job, but not have it affect the customer's account?
  2. Where do I find a list of invoices that are linked to a particular Job?
  3. What is the difference between module and progress billing, and revenue recognition options on a job. What changes with different settings.
  4. What accounting methods can I use to realize revenue for Job Costing.
  5. What is the flow for posting labour against a SWO with a Job when using progress billing methods.
  6. What does the Progress Billing Flag do when used on a PO?
  7. How do I get do job cost, hold back invoice amounts to stop showing on the AR Tial balance for a job?
  8. How to release a hold back amount on a progress invoice?
  9. Top

Label Printing

 
  1. I need to have label printing capabilities?
  2. How can I change the size of my label in the label designer?
  3. Is there currently a way to insert product images into product labels?
  4. How does the Visual Label Designer Program work?
  5. Are there any other barcode fonts available that can be loaded into Visual Streamline/Visual Label Designer?
  6. To Be Re-used
  7. How do I get access to the Visual Label Designer Software?
  8. Why is an item missing from my product code list within the Label Printing Wizard Program?
  9. In the visual Streamline Label Designer, there are two areas for label counts, what does each control?
  10. Receiving error when printing labels suddenly when it worked before, why?
  11. What are the files associated with the Label Printing Routine?
  12. Sometimes the label printing program is very slow, why?
  13. Does Visual Streamline designer supports both IPL and ZPL language?
  14. Top

Multi Language

 
  1. Does Streamline provide for different spellings of words in US English vs Canadian English on screens and forms?
  2. Top

Multi-Branch Processing

 
  1. Do orders on hold still get flushed?
  2. Top

Order Processing

 
  1. How can I tell when a picking slip was printed and who printed it?
  2. Is there a way to see who released a sales order from credit hold?
  3. Is there a way to print a message on our forms as a notification to customers about xxx…?
  4. How can I ensure that product has been ordered for my customer backorders?
  5. Why didn't a backorder get created for this customer?
  6. I have a sales order and I know the stock is physically here, but it hasn't been received into the building yet - Can I force the shipment?
  7. Why isn't the 'Create P/O' button enabled on my order?
  8. Why can't I add a freight charge to this quote / order?
  9. I have an order that should have picked up customer contract pricing but it did not-Why?
  10. What does it mean when there is an asterisk in front of the product line on my packing slip?
  11. Why am I not able to cancel my backorder, the 'cancel order' button is not enabled, why?
  12. What does it mean when the text in the 'status' field in Customer Service Inquiry appears in Red?
  13. A user at Branch A entered an order for warehouse xxx - the packing slip is still printing in Branch A rather than the warehouse they specified - why?
  14. Where does the cost come from that shows in the Margin Calculator and also when I hit F5 on the price field in an order?
  15. I am using the customer history in order entry and I know there is history on that part/customer but it is not being displayed in the history?
  16. Does the customer history in order entry include parts that were sold on service work orders?
  17. How do I credit a customer back for Freight that was accidentally charged?
  18. Order entry branch/warehouse control - How does the system determine which branch/warehouse to use?
  19. We want to restrict users from re-printing picking slips once they have been printed. Is there a way to do this?
  20. Is there a way to identify contract priced items in the sales order invoice register?
  21. Is there something that we can print as a proof of return when a customer brings a product back?
  22. In Sales Order Entry our users are supposed to enter an Order Type for every order. Is there a way to force them to do this?
  23. There is a miscellaneous fee in the sales order entry screen. We would like to call this something else. Can we change the name of this?
  24. There is a message that sometimes prints on my packing slips on backordered item 'this item is considered complete' but it does not print for all backordered items. Where is this message pulled from, and what is the criteria for it to appear on the packing slip and invoice?
  25. We don't want users to be able to enter a discount in the summary part of the orders. Can we disable that field?
  26. I need the ability to enter SO quotes and have them in the system history to be able to refer back and check trends if need be
  27. I need the ability to automatically sort items in a sales order. (Our part numbers are alphanumeric and when we receive customer orders, they are not generally in our part number order. We currently have to enter the items in our part number order for easy picking and when we receive large orders, this takes up a lot of
  28. When I am looking up a customer, I need the ability to see inventory information in the same screen or on drill down. (qty on hand, qty already on po, qty on sales order/backorder)
  29. I need to have the ability for the warehouse staff, to see a screen that shows all printed orders to be shipped.
  30. When we print our sales order in the office they need to be checked by AR for approval. We need the ability of holding an order in the system, unless we choose to override a specific customer to not be held. Basically, we need to enter the order regardles of credit and have accounting deal with it within the system instead of having an order entered and shipped when it should be held.
  31. I need to easily see links between Sales Orders and Purchase Orders.
  32. I have customers who want to purchase gift certificates, how do I process this through the system?
  33. I have Business rule SO # 21 set to 10 days lead time for scheduled orders. I have a scheduled order with a release date that is not within 10 days, but got released anyway using the automated program?
  34. I am getting a warning that my cost has not been updated in more than XX amount of days, which Business Rule controls this?
  35. I want to start charging freight to my customers, how does the software handle this?
  36. How does the Free Freight Processing program work?
  37. How do I process payment for a cash sale in full that has a backorder?
  38. What are the user rights required to give someone access to the Order Status Report?
  39. What does the message 'Rebuild Open Orders' mean when in Order Entry or Invoicing?
  40. What is the calculation used in the Margin Override option in quote and order entry?
  41. What user rights are required to modify the Ship Via Codes?
  42. Is there a way to force a Quote to expire once an order has been created from the quote?
  43. Is there a way to force the quote to Expire once it has been copied?
  44. In the Customer Service Inquiry - some of my Sales Volume details are not correct.
  45. How does Business Rule SO68 (Enable PST exempt button in order entry) work?
  46. When I'm in a sales order, and parked on the Customer Code field, and I type a character and hit F5, the system is not taking me to customers that start with the character that I typed in - why?
  47. In the Customer Service Inquiry -> Expediting tab, if a PO number is displayed in RED - what does that mean?
  48. Which sales rep on a sales order does the commission go to - the one on the line details or the one in the summary 'Options' screen?
  49. We need to cancel an invoice for a drop shipment, how do we do this? The stock is not in our warehouse.
  50. What are the different order/BOL stages?
  51. I have a cash sales backorder for a cash customer and I want to print a order doc and send to them, it is partially shippable now but the Print Order button is not available. How can I get it to print.
  52. How do I credit for a price difference for an item invoiced?
  53. I have a US customer that I sell to but ship to in Canada, and I need to charge Canadian taxes to the US customer. How do I setup to allow this?
  54. In the Order Entry screen there is a flag at the bottom of the summary section of an order - Pick up. What does it do?
  55. In order entry there is a field called Customer Quoted located in the summary section of an order. What does it do?
  56. I want my pick or pack slips to print multiple copies but for each order, so order 1, print copy 1 and then copy2 , then print order 2, copy 1 and copy 2, rather then all copy 1's and then all copy 2's. How can I do this?
  57. How can I get the list of BOM items to print on the different forms for kit items.
  58. What is the order of priority for determining number of invoice copies to print?
  59. I released an order today from a scheduled order, and the system created my release order with a future Order Date? Why did it not use the actual release date?
  60. What controls the ability to see All Branches in the Cash Sale Summary?
  61. If I change my system exchange rate while I have open orders in the system, will they be udpated to reflect the new system exchange rate when they are posted?
  62. I have a customer with Credit Checking turned on but they are over the credit limit and nothing is on hold, how can this happen?
  63. How can I back date a credit note or invoice to post to a past period.
  64. I have a drop ship order with multiple lines and I need to cancel one of them, is there a way to do this without having to cancel the entire order?
  65. How does Drop Ship Processing work?
  66. Is there a way to have the standard (suggested) list price print on quotes?
  67. What does an Asterisk <*> represent when printed next to a product code on a pick slip?
  68. Is there a way to have a suggested list price print on invoices?
  69. Why are there invoices missing from the History button in the customer service inquiry screen?
  70. Why did my sales order not calculate any taxes?
  71. How are rebates posted when sale is made?
  72. Is there a way to see if a sales order was created and then cancelled or deleted?
  73. In Order Entry, I sometimes see a Create PO button. What are the conditions for this button to be enabled?
  74. Can I sell an item in more than one Unit of Measure (UOM)?
  75. I am entering an order, and receiving a messge that the stock is protected and can't be sold to this customer - what does this mean?
  76. What is the purpose of the Customer Service Inquiry menu option?
  77. How does the program 'Scheduled Orders' work?
  78. How do I enter line notes on an order?
  79. Is there an expanded window for viewing and modifying order entry details?
  80. Does the system handle HST Point of Sale Rebates?
  81. How does Streamline integrate with UPS software?
  82. What User Rights control ability to Create/Modify/Delete Cancel Order/Invoice Codes?
  83. What does the BOL Comment button in Customer Master do?
  84. How do I setup Ontario First Nations Point-of-Sales Rebate?
  85. How are Shipping Dates on Orders Calculated?
  86. I have a customer that has moved to a US office. The bill to address is in the USA but will be in CDN dollars, and the ship to remains in Canada. How do I set this up to charge taxes?
  87. What is the purpose of the 'Item Reference' field located at the end of each line item in Quote Entry?
  88. What does this error mean...A cursor with the name 'readrawmat_cursor already exists?
  89. How to enter a Deposit on an order?
  90. What email address does system use for Order Acknowledgments?
  91. Why did PST not get charged on Freight, when I have the province code master file setup to do so?
  92. I have a very large future order that I do not want inventory committed for; is this possible?
  93. There is a deposit field on the Invoice, can I populate it somehow, to show when a customer has paid a deposit on an order.
  94. When using the auto build feature to create the release schedule for Scheduled Orders, how does it work?
  95. What are the conditions for Credits to appear on the Order Status Report?
  96. Why does the software allow ability to sell an item, if the status is anything but Active?
  97. What is the calculation for extended amount in the BOL and revision details?
  98. What is the right that controls printing an order acknowledgment for a Cash Sale?
  99. Is there a way to tell who closed an order?
  100. Why is the Standard List printing on orders, rather than the unit price?
  101. I created a sales order with only freight in the summary, why can't I process this order?
  102. We are a CDN company with a satellite office in the US, how do we charge
    US sales tax on orders placed out of the US?
  103. How do I reset a sales order back to unprinted, it was printed in error to be shipped but is really no stock, so I want to edit the line to backorder it and set it back to unprinted? I do not want to cancel or delete the order.
  104. How does the Cash Sales Summary program work?
  105. Configured item's list price on the sales order matches the list price on the product master; however the raw material list price as shown on the BOM screen print is different why?
  106. What Does the On Time Delivery Fill Rate Report Measure?
  107. What does the report Options "in Process" represent on the Order Status Report?
  108. What controls the branch for credit memos?
  109. In version 10 the Customer Service Inquiry Screen is missing buttons, for Sales Volume, Statistics, etc.?
  110. How does the optional Business Rule 'Quote/Order Product Tagging Lookup' work?
  111. Additional information on optional Business Rule 'Quote/Order Product Tagging Lookup'
  112. Why are standard comments entered on orders appearing on my po?
  113. Why is the back order flag on the sales order > options button not checked?
  114. Why is my End User contract not appearing in my list of selections when I enter an order?
  115. What GL acct do I use when entering a MISC item on a sales order?
  116. What user right controls the ability to delete a Credit Memo?
  117. What are the Conditions for a Drop Ship order to appear in Invoice Preparation?
  118. What does it mean when you see Verify in the product code browse for quantity available?
  119. How do I give a user access to create special order items in order entry?
  120. What controls the Suggested Qty pop up in order entry?
  121. There is an item that has an asteriks printing as a prefix what triggers this?
  122. I am receiving a message on an order 'This customer is restricted from buying this product' where is this setup?
  123. What are the conditions for a Drop Ship order to appear in the Invoice Preparation screen?
  124. How can I restrict users from modifying inventory items but still allow them to setup special order items from Order Entry?
  125. What controls the ability to Add or Remove the Route code range in Batch printing of orders?
  126. How does the Route processing in Batch Printing of Orders work?
  127. In order entry, line notes, what controls the pop up of the purchasing notes?
  128. I have automatic freight coming into all my orders, where is this coming from?
  129. Sales Order > Reports and Inquiries > Margin Report, what cost does this report use?
  130. When I run the program to close completed scheduled orders, there is one scheduled order that never gets closed why?
  131. Why can I not modify the Product Line while creating a special order item?
  132. Can I do a credit note for an invoice not yet posted?
  133. When using customer history from order entry, why does the warehouse not automatically come from the warehouse creating the order?
  134. When entering a credit card payment in cash receipt, what controls ability to not enter the credit card number?
  135. How can I lookup a price for a customer by UPC code (scanning) from the product?
  136. What rights are required for user to be able to access the confirm button in OE screen?
  137. How are the costs on the Order Status Report picked up?
  138. There is Control Number missing. How can this happen?
  139. Why are there missing Order Numbers in the sequence that are not accounted for?
  140. Is there a way to have Bin Locations Prints on Orders?
  141. Is there a way to have BOM's print on Order Acknowledgments?
  142. Can I modify the quantity of a drop ship sales order after the purchase order has been created?
  143. Why am I not able to enter a misc stock type on an order?
  144. How can I reprint a packing slip after an order has been invoiced?
  145. What sales rep prints on the Invoice and where?
  146. How does the order/invoice analysis report display the foreign currency orders?
  147. How are costs displayed on line items on orders?
  148. What can cause a cash sales invoiced to be missing for Cash Sales Summary?
  149. In the Province Table, there are a few Tax flags, how do they work?
  150. Top

Password Module

 
  1. I need the ability to look up previous customer pricing quickly and easily
  2. Top

Pricing

 
  1. When setting the cost plus pricing base for Business Rule S/O # 2 - are the landing factors such as the user defined fields included if you set it to Vendor Cost or Last Cost?
  2. I have a new price code setup, but when I enter an item for that price code, the correct price does not come up?
  3. What is the Pricing Hierarchy?
  4. I need the ability to see different pricing/costing fields
  5. What user rights are required to allow a user to edit the details in the Pricing Codes.
  6. We are building a query and would like to know what files and fields to use to obtain the information in the Inventory Product Code Browse -> Movement screen.
  7. If I want to add an item to an existing Deal Code - how can I get to the end of the file without having to click on the 'Next' button to move through all the records?
  8. I have a contract for a US customer and enter price in US Dollares, but the price is being converted to Home Currency why?
  9. If I have an Affiliate Contract and a Customer contract, and both are valid - which one wins?
  10. How do I create a new price code?
  11. System is not picking up a Deal price why?
  12. I have a Deal setup, however the system is not pulling Deal pricing?
  13. Customer or ship to has more than one affiliate and the price it should pick up is under the 2nd affiliation code listed on the ship to, but it is not picking it up?
  14. I have a contract that is not coming up on the open contract report by product line why?
  15. Why is the Best Price flag in the AR Master File returning zero prices?
  16. The Pricing Setup Import now asks the user whether they want to clear existing records. Why?
  17. If you have Price Code set up with multiple records for different criteria, and there is overlap,
  18. In Customer Contracts, what is Contract List field used for?
  19. What User Right is required to Modify Contracts for Users? I have one user that has no access to the modify function.
  20. For a vendor that has hundreds of items is there a way to mass change the price factor for list price using the program: Pricing > Standard List Price?
  21. How do I create a new contract using the NEW Customer Contract front end?
  22. Why is the system not pulling my customer's last price in order entry?
  23. Is there a document outlining the changes to the Contract Pricing front end?
  24. How does the pricing promotions program work?
  25. What is the recommended setup for level pricing with discount from list?
  26. Is there any difference between the SQL pricing engine and the old magic pricing?
  27. Pricing > Contract Pricing > When linking customer contract to supplier contract, what does the message in RED at the bottom left of the customer contract mean?
  28. How does the program 'Standard List Pricing' work?
  29. Is there something that prevents affiliate pricinng to work, either through affiliate contracts or price codes setup by affiliation?
  30. Does Affiliate Contract Pricing support multiple affiliations attached to one customer?
  31. How does the Hierarchy work within a price code if there is overlapping information setup in different records?
  32. If I have a price file exported and I only make changes to some lines, do I need to delete the unchanged lines prior to importing back in?
  33. Top

Purchase Order Processing

 
  1. How do I change the branch code on a P/O?
  2. Why can't I re-open this Purchase Order?
  3. Why can't I modify or delete a line on a PO?
  4. Who changed this Purchase Order?
  5. How can I set up special prices from a vendor for quantity buys?
  6. Is there a way to set a PO message that only prints for a certain supplier?
  7. I have an item on back order that I expected to see in the Planned Purchasing List, but it hasn't come in-Why?
  8. I have an item with a red check box beside it in Planned PO Processing-What does this mean?
  9. Why is the cost missing on my supplier purchase order?
  10. Why aren't my supplier's part numbers printing on the Purchase Orders?
  11. Why am I not able to cancel a stock receipt?
  12. I am receiving a Purchase Order and the 'Cancel' flag is checked on the lines that are not being received. Why?
  13. I am receiving a Purchase Order and I am unable to check the 'Cancel' flag at the end of the line to cancel the remaining quantity - Why?
  14. I am unable to change the Branch in the Expediting Reports program - Why?
  15. We have moved to a new warehouse location. How can I change the address, telephone and fax number showing on our Purchase Orders?
  16. Where do the Purchase Analysis numbers come from and how are these updated?
  17. Can I have freight added at receiving, but want system to still include it in the total landed cost of the item?
  18. Can a Purchase Order for a MISC type item be cancelled via the Cancel Stock Receipts Program
  19. I ran Planned PO Preparation - PPP - There was a PO Requisition on file for vendor XXX but the system created a second requistion for this vendor rather than adding to the existing one - Why?
  20. The system allows you to attach a signature to a buyer code. Does this need to be a specific format or file type in order for this to work?
  21. Are Drop Ship Orders included in the Purchase Analysis Report?
  22. Where does the 'Vendor Contact' and the 'Ship to Contact' information pull from that appears on our purchase orders?
  23. I am trying to close a drop ship Purchase Order because we aren't going to be processing this order now but it won't allow me - why?
  24. I have a supplier that insists on us sending Purchase Orders as a text file, is it possible to export a po from streamline to text?
  25. Is there a way to see how much we have spent with a specific supplier?
  26. Is there a place I can enter a message for Request for Quotes?
  27. When entering a purchase order, how do I see inventory information in the same screen or on a drill down. (qty on hand, qty already on po, qty on sales order/backorder)?
  28. How do I change a purchase order requisition to a PO and then break apart this requisition to different vendors without having to re-enter all data for the various vendors?
  29. After receiving a partial p/o, i need the ability to print the p/o in question but with only the items remaining to be received, not the whole p/o showing items already received.
  30. I am entering a po for an item that my supplier has never purchased. The system prompts me to add the supplier field to the item, but i get an error 'initial task mode not allowed'
  31. I want the system to print logos for PO's by branch, how do I Set this up?
  32. We have a user that left some items in Planned PO Preparation and went on vacation.. How can our administrator clear these records?
  33. What is the hierarchy to determine what lines get flushed through recieving when only part of items are recieved?.
  34. I am trying to change the Freight In Bill Method on my purchase order and I am not able to - Why?
  35. How can I change the default contact for Purchase Order Ship to records?
  36. Which rights would a user require to uncheck the 'Print Required Date on P.O.' flag ?
  37. I am unable to access the Contract Cost Field in a Customer Contract - why?
  38. Is there a way to have the line numbers print on a Purchase Order?
  39. Many of our Purchase Orders are several pages long. Is there a way to not print the header information on the purchase orders on pages printed after Page 1?
  40. What do I need to do to be able to print receiving labels from the PO receiving screen?
  41. I have a Supplier Part Description entered, and my supplier wants it to show up on their Purchase Orders. Is this possible?
  42. I have a Purchase Order that is not showing up on my expediting reports, and it falls within the criteria, I am selecting.
  43. What happens if I use both the Transfers and Auto Link button in PPP?
  44. What is the difference between the Outstanding PO report, and the PO Back Order Report?
  45. I have a BLUE Product Code on a PO, what does this represent?
  46. How can I tell if a 2-way match PO has been matched to an Invoice.
  47. I want to use the percentage rebate method and I do not get the expected results?
  48. How does Business Rule Forms # 352 impact the Purchase Orders when we are printing both our product codes and the supplier part numbers?
  49. Is there a way to warn a user when they have entered a stock receipt quantity that is greater than what was ordered on the Purchase Order?
  50. What are the user rights required to enter a Supplier Contract?
  51. What sort order does the following report print in?: P/O Processing -> Reports and Inquires --> P/O's Issued.
  52. In Purchase Order Processing -> Processing -> PO Maintenance - in the Additional Information screen there is a field for 'Customer Owned #' . What does this field do.
  53. I can set a PO Tolerance in the Control File Maintenance - AP Tab. What is the calculation the system uses to determine a below tolerance condition?
  54. Where is the Purchase Analysis rebuild located?
  55. When entering a Po, what are the conditions to have the GL number on the PO screen updated automatically by the system?
  56. On the Supplier Performance Report, how is the Fill % and On Time % calculated?
  57. I there a way to see what vendor invoice number is associated with our PO number?
  58. What user right do I need to re-open closed Purchase Orders?
  59. I am trying to receive a large Po and the 'Receive All' button is not enabled - why?
  60. Why can't I receive a drop ship PO?
  61. What does the Auto Link button in PPP do?
  62. What is the right to allow us to modify or enter PO comments?
  63. What is the difference between Freight In (Bill Method and Cost Method) under Purchase Orders?
  64. I'm having trouble deleting a line item from an open PO. F3 Delete key is not working?
  65. I have Po's linked to sales order, but when the PO is recieved, the system is not flushing the shipped qty on the sales order - why?
  66. How does PO Requisitions work?
  67. Is there a way to enter the po confirmation number and date for Drop Ship Po's?
  68. Can you enter Lot/Serial transfer in PPP when you have business rule PO 45 on?
  69. I need to make an amendment to the Alternate system Ship To Address but cannot remember where this master file is located.
  70. How does the flag to transfer SO Comments to PO work if you run PPP and have have multiple SO's that would make up the PO QTY to be ordered.
  71. I am trying to re-open a closed po but the button is ghosted?
  72. IDI Connect: If a PO has been submitted through IDI connect, what happens if it's previewed or printed again? Does it get re-sent?
  73. IDI Connect: To cancel a PO or a line on the PO that was mistakenly sent when previewed, I assume I will have to contact IDI vendors to fix it?
  74. IDI Connect: How does IDI handle duplicate POs that have been sent?
  75. IDI Connect: What kind of confirmation exists apart from the PO summary screen that says 'Member PO sent on xxx date'? Is there an email sent for errors ie non matching supplier part numbers, setup errors?
  76. IDI Connect: Is there a way to preview the po before it gets sent to IDI? Purchasers/buyers would like to review their PO’s before submitting (apart from looking at the details on screen).
  77. IDI Connect: What are the mapped file specifications
  78. IDI Connect: What is the setup required for IDI Connect?
  79. How does the Distribution Center Module work?
  80. How does the program 'Request for Quote' work?
  81. How do I use the Transfer button in Planned P/O Preparation?
  82. I am getting unexpected results in my Planned Purchase Order Processing run. Why?
  83. What is the buy-up factor for in PPP?
  84. I have received a P/O that should have generated a transfer for the detail lines, but no transfer was generated. Why?
  85. I’m trying to change our US ship to address for PO’s. Can you tell where I can change them?
  86. How do I modify the Carrier field for a Drop Ship P/O?
  87. What user right is required to be able to enter P/O Notes?
  88. When creating a PO from Requisitions, how does it calculate the Date Wanted? Does it carry forward the date from the Requisitions? How does it calculate lead times if an item was on a PO requisition first?
  89. I have a Special FOB cost entered at the end of the line item in Order Entry, but it is not being picked up in Planned PO?
  90. AP > Master File > Supplier > PO info > Days Before Available for Transfer in PPP
  91. I'm getting a message Cost UOM or Conversion factor missing, how do I fix this?
  92. How does 2-way matching work?
  93. How does the Alternate Supplier Field in Planned Po Preparation work?
  94. When I cancelled a Stock Receipt why did it post to inventory with a different cost and post an inventory adjustment?
  95. Is there a way to link stock Purchase Orders for raw materials to production tickets?
  96. Why do Sales Orders that contains Build to Order Kits not flush automatically when a linked PO is received?
  97. On Printed Po's where does the information from the Supplier contact field come from?
  98. On Printed Po's where does the information from the Ship to contact field come from?
  99. On Printed Po's where does the information from the Entered By field come from?
  100. What is BR PO50 (P/O Receiving Transfers - Save transfers without processing) and how does it work?
  101. How do I get freight to print on the PO?
  102. When using thre transfers button in PPP how does it decide what warehouse to transfer from?
  103. Why is the 'Receive All' button located in the PO Stock Receipts screen not enabled?
  104. Can I back date a PO Receipt?
  105. Is there an overview document for the Enhanced Replenishment Module ( ERM )?
  106. to be re-used
  107. Can I change the cost on a PO line and not have to chagne the supplier landed cost table?
  108. I am trying to receive a zero cost po, but I am receiving an error that tells me missing uom or conversion factor missing. How do I fix this?
  109. Why can I not park and modify the branch code on po?
  110. PO requisitions that are linked to sales orders show up as RED records, but in one of my companies they are not red, why?
  111. What right do I need to be able to see costs in PO Maint?
  112. Is there a way to reprint the stock receiving reports?
  113. Why can I not link a sales order to a PO for a raw material on a kit?
  114. How do Purchase Contracts work?
  115. Can you explain what the difference is between the reorder multiple and minimum order qty in the supplier info screen?
  116. How does Freight processing work for PO and AP Invoices?
  117. Is there a way to issue a PO for internal purchases that will not affect inventory?
  118. How does the Rejected field work in PO receiving?
  119. Why am I not able to modify create a PO?
  120. When I back date the Clear Unmatched Stock Receipts program, I see records where the FOB amounts are greyed out, why?
  121. When entering PO I receive a warning: 'Your cost is outside the tolerance %' What does this mean and how do I fix this?
  122. Top

Query Questions

 
  1. Where is the way bill information stored? I would like to use this in a query.
  2. I would like to write a query for the information contained in the Customer Master File -> Pricing Overrides
  3. I would like to write a query to print a report of the customer part numbers set up for a particular customer - what do I need to pull in to the query?
  4. I want to create a report that will show me the orders that used quote pricing, and/or that were created from a quote - what information do I need to pull in for this?
  5. We are building a report and would like to see orders where a Special FOB cost was used. What file / field do we use for this?
  6. How can I easily get a list of all my suppliers for a particular currency?
  7. I would like to create a GP report and need to know what field contains the cost of a line item from a sales order.
  8. What are the files and fields required to create a query involving the type of credit memo that was created - either Return to Stock or Price Adjustment?
  9. I would like to do a query that involves the Inventory Transaction History screen files - what should I use?
  10. I would like to build a query that will look at the Company Setup -> System Auditing -> Audit Report for Code Changes data. What file would we use for that query?
  11. We are writing a Query and want to know what the so_bol_headers. bol_shp_or_prt_date records?
  12. we are writing a query and want to use the field for 'Ship Complete' in the options screen of Sales Order Entry. What is the file and field we need to look at for our query?
  13. Where can I query the information as to whether or not a Purchase Order has been printed?
  14. I am trying to create a query that will show me the primary vendor landed cost for items. How can I do this?
  15. I need to write a query to check the flags that are set in the Inventory Master File for the Extended Descriptions. I want to check what is set for the Forms Control flags. What file is the Forms Control information held in?
  16. How can I tell if a quote has been printed?
  17. How can I create a query to give me the average payment days for a customer?
  18. Sales Order Processing > processing > order entry > line comments > At the end of the line you can have line comments - where are these stored for reporting purposes?
  19. I want to write a report that pulls my quotes and the status that they are in?
  20. I am working on customized reports using Sales Analysis Reporting. What tables do I use?
  21. How do I query a list of all the Transaction types including the system defined ones?
  22. What is the file that contains the data for the ON HOLD flag in order entry?
  23. I am writing a query and need to know where the data that is entered in the Memo in the AP supplier master file is located?
  24. I am trying to run a query and receiving the following error: Microsoft ODBC - SQL SERVER DRIVER 'user public' does not have permission to run DBCC - TRACEON.
  25. How do I create a new Data Source to be able to access Streamline Data from external sources such as Microsoft Excel Query?
  26. What is the hotkey I need to press in order to identify a query string variable in Streamline?
  27. How do I create a query based on Historical Inventory Valuations?
  28. How do I avoid duplicate lines when querying descriptions?
  29. What table can I find Fill Rate information to query?
  30. I am trying to create Sales Margin Report in OBDC. What data tables should I use?
  31. I need to create a Sales Report by Affiliation, is this possible?
  32. When I query the Customer File, it shows some customers linked to Affiliation codes but when I view the customer in AR there is no affiliation code linked?
  33. What tables will provide booking/open order information to query?
  34. I am using table cust_summary_info to create a report but it does not seem to be giving me results?
  35. What are the values of srca_type_flg in sales_rep_change_aud and their meaning? I see values of C, R, S and P?
  36. Is it possible to find out who closed a PO?
  37. Inventory > Master Files > Notes > Where are the Product Notes stored?
  38. File 'gmem_memo2' in the general_memos folder contains the Memo's that are entered against customers. How do I determine the Customer the memos belong to?
  39. How to generate a crystal report showing all orders not linked to transfers or Po's?
  40. Does the system track where the pricing used came from? Example if it came from a Quote, Deal, Price Matrix, manual manipulation, etc?
  41. Table 'Customers' contains a field 'cu_last_orderdate' Is this field maintained?
  42. How can I find out if an item was on a sales order and deleted off?
  43. If I needed to query the product database, how would I pull in the file names for images and spec docs?
  44. How do I query a table to obtain a list of records that do not contain a value?
  45. The general_memos table has a "gmem_system_flg" What flag corresponds to what memo field in the system. Is a list available defining all the types?
  46. What file name and field controls the Return to Stock or Price Adjustment field in the Credit Memo?
  47. What file can I query to see Sales Order Changes Audit?
  48. Is there a quote report that shows only active quotes that haven't been changed into an order yet?
  49. How to query data to find blank values:
  50. Is there a field I can query that maintains inventory movement (which would include sales and kit building) instead of just the sales field?
  51. Is there any way I can export out all the product notes which have the "Popup Comments in Quote/Order Entry" flag turned on?
  52. I want to write a Crystal Report or Query that prints out customer notes entered. What tables do I use?
  53. How can I write a query showing the Last Payment Date for Customer Invoices?
  54. How do I create a query by inventory transactions by date by inventory transaction types? For example, I want to see all Confirmed shipments or all cancelled stock receipts etc…
  55. How does external reporting affect locking in Streamline?
  56. Top

Release Notes

 
  1. Release notes for version 1000-0020 released Nov 22, 2012.
  2. Release notes for version 1000-0021 released Nov 29, 2012.
  3. Release notes for version 1000-0022 released Dec 20, 2012.
  4. Release notes for version 1000-0023 released Jan 10, 2013.
  5. Release notes for version 1000-0025 released Mar 22, 2013.
  6. How do I see what release version I am running?
  7. Release notes for version 1000-0026 released April 18, 2013.
  8. Release notes for version 1000-0027 released May 23, 2013.
  9. Release notes for version 1000-0028 released June 10, 2013..
  10. Release notes for version 1000-0029 released July 19, 2013.
  11. Release notes for version 1000-0030 released August 22, 2013.
  12. Release notes for version 1000-0031 released Sept. 12, 2013.
  13. Release notes for version 1000-0032 released Oct. 24, 2013.
  14. Release notes for version 1000-0033 released Dec. 5, 2013.
  15. Release notes for version 1000-0034 released Jan. 22, 2014.
  16. Release notes for version 1000-0035 released Feb 20, 2014.
  17. Release notes for version 1000-0036 released Mar 20, 2014
  18. Release notes for version 1000-0037 released Apr 24, 2014.
  19. Release notes for version 1000-0038 released June 6, 2014.
  20. Release notes for version 1000-0039 released July 11, 2014.
  21. Release notes for version 10.0.1.0000 to 10.0.1.0003 released August 31,, 2014 to Oct 2, 2014.
  22. Release notes for version 10.0.3.0000 to 10.0.3.0006 released Sept 30, 2014 to Jan 6, 2015.
  23. Release notes for version 10.0.4.0000 to 10.0.4.0004 released Dec 31, 2014 to Mar 30, 2015.
  24. Release notes for version 10.1.1.0000 to 10.1.1.0005 released March 31, 2015 to June 30, 2015.
  25. Release notes for version 10.1.2.0000 to 10.1.2.0004 released July 1, 2015 to Sept 30, 2015, 2015.
  26. Release Notes for version 10.1.3.0000 to 10.1.3.0004 released Oct 1, 2015 to Jan 7, 2016.
  27. Release Notes for version 10.1.4.0000 to 10.1.4.0005 released Jan 7, 2016 to April 7, 2016.
  28. Release Notes for version 10.2.1.0000 released April 7, 2016.
  29. Release Notes for version 10.2.2.0000 released June 7, 2016.
  30. Release Notes for version 10.2.3.0000 released Sept 7, 2016.
  31. Release Notes for version 10.2.4.0000 released Jan 7, 2017.
  32. Release Notes for version 10.3.1.0000 released April 7, 2017.
  33. Release notes for version 10.3.2.0000 released July 7, 1017.
  34. Release notes for version 10.3.3.0000 released Oct 7, 2017
  35. Release notes for version 10.3.4.0000 released Dec 7, 2017
  36. Release notes for version 2018.1 released March 19, 2018.
  37. Release notes for version 2018.3 released July 25, 2018.
  38. Release notes for version 2018.4 released October 26, 2018.
  39. Release notes for version 2019.1 released January 28, 2019.
  40. Release notes for version 2019.2 released May 22, 2019.
  41. Release notes for version 2019.3 released July 24, 2019.
  42. Release notes for version 2019.4 released October 25, 2019.
  43. Top

Returns Authorization

 
  1. How do I charge a customer a restocking fee through the RA?
  2. We need to return product from one of our Suppliers. Where would I be able to do this?
  3. Why do some records appear in red in the Supplier RA Inquiry screen?
  4. What is the difference between the Flag and Status button in: Return Authorization > Reports and Inquiries > Supplier Ra Inquiry?
  5. How can I prevent users from changing the cost on the Supplier RA entry screen?
  6. How does the Supplier Reference field work in RA processing?
  7. What are the conditions and user rights to be able to modify the RA status codes?
  8. There is a button to Delete/Complete Customer RA, but when I click on it, it only gives me the option to delete - there is no complete option?
  9. What is the standard process for doing Supplier RA's.
  10. How do I call up an existing Customer RA and delete a line from it?
  11. How do I cancel a Supplier RA that has been processed?
  12. Top

Sales Analysis

 
  1. Are Inter-company orders included in Sales Analysis?
  2. When we sell a kit, either 'Built to Order' or 'Assembled', where does the sale reside? Is it against the kit, or the raw material?
  3. We would like to restrict our users to seeing only a very few sales reports - what is the best way to do that?
  4. How do I balance Commission Report Sales to EM Company Overview Sales?
  5. Why don't my Sales Analysis reports balance to the GL for a given period?
  6. When do invoices write to the commicsson files.
  7. How do the Commission Reports work?
  8. If I sell to a US customer, will the sale be recorded in US or home currency?
  9. What does the flag 'Based on accumulated sales' do in the Sales Rep Commission Setup Table?
  10. There is a statement 'Last Year (this total differs from the sum of the details, as it includes last year sales for records with no sales in the specified fiscal year)' that shows on Sales Analysis Summary Reports. What does it mean?
  11. I am looking for a profit margin report by, Sales Group, Customer or Customer Type?
  12. How does Business rule SO 51 - Commissions based on line items vs invoice work?
  13. User-Defined Budgets overview
  14. Sales Analysis > Sales Analysis Reports > Matrix Reports, how do these work with commission orders?
  15. On the Summary Sales Analysis Reports, there is a field "TRAD.ACC" What is this field representing?
  16. In Sales Analysis Reports, when running a report by Warehouse, which warehouse is used, the line details or the header branch?
  17. The rebuild sales analysis is not working, it keeps crashing?
  18. Do Price Adjustment credit memos flow through to sales analysis?
  19. Why are there total sales missing from my sales analysis reports?
  20. What does the program: Installation > Reset Programs > Recalculate Commission Amounts do?
  21. Top

Service Inquiry

 
  1. Our users are supposed to enter an order type for every order - most of the time it is the same order type - is there a way to have this come in automatically?
  2. Top

Service Work Order

 
  1. Are the Service Work Orders - Parts orders included in the 'On time Delivery Fill Report' located under: Sales Order Processing > Customer Performance?
  2. How does the branch posting for such things as Labour Revenue work?
  3. How do I issue credit for Service Work Orders?
  4. Where do I see a list of transactions and invoices for a Service Work Order?
  5. What is the hierarchy used to determine the Service Work Order billing rate?
  6. In Service Inquiry screen under Equip Tab, how do I invoice items to show up with the serial # and to populate the Orig Invoice info button screen?
  7. I am trying to re-opened a closed task to invoice it, but I am not able to change the status. Why?
  8. How do we enter an AP invoice against a Service Work Order?
  9. How does the Preventative Maintenance program in Service Work Order work?
  10. What is the intention of the button "Print Packing Slip" in the SWO screen?
  11. SWO > Processing > ServiceWork Order, What is the difference between these two buttons:
  12. When I have an unconfirmed parts order on a SWO, how do I process this?
  13. Top

Warehouse Management System

 
  1. Why when I create an item in a WMS warehouse does it not appear in WMS?
  2. Top



General

  1. I have a Sale Flyer that I would like to mail to my customers. Is there a quick way to print labels from Visual Streamline?
    On the Accounts Receivable -> Reports and Inquiries Menu, there is a program to print Customer Mailing Labels. Various 'Sort' and 'Range' options are available and the labels print on standard Avery Address Labels.

    Top

  2. Is there an easy way to get the file and field names that I need for my query?
    While your cursor is parked on the field in Streamline that you wish to query, pressing Ctrl+F1, will display a window that shows the filename and the field name the information is stored in (It will say Virtual if it's not stored in a file).

    Top

  3. How do I take a screen print?
    Screen prints are useful training tools for your staff and can also come in handy if you are contacting support with a question or problem. While you are looking at the screen you want to print, press the 'Alt' button and the 'Print Scrn' button at the same time. This captures the image. Next, open a new blank Word document. Right click anywhere on the page, and a menu will display - from here, select 'Paste'. This drops the image of your screen into the Word document. You now have a 'picture' of your screen that you can save, email, etc.

    Top

  4. Rights have been added for a user but they still don't have access to the program / functions in question - Why?
    Whenever rights or groups are added or removed from a user in the security menu, the user in question must exit from Streamline and then log back in again. They must then click on the 'Main Menu' button located at the top of the screen on the tool bar. This refreshes their user rights and will update their login with any changes that have been made.

    Top

  5. Why can't I log on to Windows?
    While it is possible that there could be a technical reason for a login failure-most often the reason is keyboard related. Before calling support, please check that you are entering the proper password - remember it is case-sensitive. Often users have accidentally turned on 'Caps Lock' or turned off 'Num Lock'. Remember to check these settings and ensure you are using the proper case.

    Top

  6. How can I increase the idle timeout for the E-Commerce module on your web server?
    You can logon as the administrator user and adjust the session timeout on the administration page.

    Top

  7. Is there a document that outlines regular processing that needs to be done within Streamline, such as daily, weekly, and month end tasks?
    Yes - We have a document that outlines regular processing. Please see Attachment.
    Document: Streamline Visual Regular Processing and Maintenance Procedures.pdf

    Top

  8. What are the special characters that are reserved and should be avoided throughout the system?
    ?
    *
    %
    [ ]
    ^
    _
    '
    <>
    "
    &
    +
    #
    ,
    :
    =
    ;

    Top

  9. Can you explain the process for intercompany sales and how this is set up in the system?
    The attached document provides information on intercompany sales setup and processing.
    Document: Inter-Company Sales & Purchasing Overview.pdf

    Top

  10. What is the Inventory Statistics Refresh Program for?
    The attached document provides information on Inventory Stats Refresh.
    Document: Company Setup - Inventory Statistics Refresh.pdf

    Top

  11. What are the logo specifications?
    Visual Streamline Logo Specification
    Logos for use with Visual Streamline should have the following specifications:
    Format: JPEG
    Size (inches): 21.25 wide and 3.44 high
    Size (cm): 53.97 wide by 8.73 high
    Size (pixels): 2040 wide by 330 high
    DPI: 96
    Color Depth: 24 bit
    If the size is incorrect, it can cause several undesired effects when you print, such as distortion, blurriness, or possibly not display any image at all.

    Top

  12. What does the Right VCISPI (View Cost in Std Prod Info screen) do?
    In the order screen, below Cust Std List, is a Cost field that is only visible if the user has BOTH of these rights. Therefore if they turn off VCISPI (View Cost in Std Prod Info screen), it is not visible in this screen regardless of whether they have DACIIL (Display Costs in Inv Lookup) on or not but if they do not have DACIIL (Display Costs in Inv Lookup) on, this cost will still not be visible.

    Top

  13. I need the ability to easily link files within the database to create custom reports.
    Our product is a true windows based product. This means we have what's called ODBC compliancy. This stands for Open Database Connectivity. ALL the data within the database can be retrieved and used by you to create whatever reports are required. You could use excel, dbase, access, crystal, MS Query etc. We train these functions. You simply go into excel and ask for data from your database.
    Streamline has 340 reports sorted a 1000 different ways out of the box. If we don't have the report you need you simply create your own.

    Top

  14. Company Setup > Company Info > User Maintenance. Under the Reporting Filter Options you can enter a Sale Rep Code... what does this control?
    User maint Rep Code reporting filters.
    Here is the Sales Rep specific rights and user setup info for you to try. I suggest you setup a test rep and login as them and go through everything and make sure they only have the access to what you want them to see before continuing.
    They will need to be able to enter orders and quotes so you need to give them these rights.
    ROSO - Right to Sales Orders
    RTSOP - Right to Sales Order Processing
    ROOE - Right of S/Order Entry/Modify
    RTQE - Right to Quote Entry/Modify
    If you set then set Business Rule, AR #7 to on and in the User Maint. assign a rep code to the user under the 'Report Filter Options' they will only be able to see their own customers in the following programs based on the sales rep code in the customer ship to.
    - Customer Service
    - Customer Zoom
    - Customer Maintenance
    - Ship to Zoom (quote/order entry)
    - Quote Zoom
    - Order Zoon
    - Order Status Report
    - Invoice Status Report
    There is also a Sales Analysis reports menu specifically for sales rep’s, in the rights for that user you can give them:
    ROSA - Right To Sales Analysis
    RTSASRR - Right To S/A Sales Reps Reports

    Top

  15. I have to look at data at an old register, is there an easy way to have the system automatically go to that register?
    Yes - you can use the F7 locate key, type the number, and hit enter, and the system will park on that register. You can use this F7 locate key in other areas of the software as well.

    Top

  16. How do I add a new user ID in Streamline v10?
    See attached doc for info.
    Document: How to add a new User ID to Streamline.pdf

    Top

  17. How do I update the TEST company?
    Steps to update the test company are as follows:
    Go to Company Setup > Companies.
    Find the TEST company and park on it and click the 'Select' button' so the test company appears with the red arrows around it.
    Then click the 'Update' button.
    A screen will come up asking you to select the company that you are copying FROM, select the Live company to copy FROM. Make sure that the TEST company is the TO field. Click proceed to continue.
    This should be run after hours when there are no users on the system to avoid locks.
    It is also best to have a current backup.

    Top

  18. What is the difference between Streamline Batch Service and Streamline Process Server and can I restart them myself?
    Streamline Batch Service is the background Streamline application that is used for Streamline processes like task scheduler, and shipping software integration, etc.. Streamline Batch Service is controlled from the Task Manager under the Services tab. Look for Streamline Batch Service and stop it, wait for a couple of minutes for any process to finish off and restart the service. Your technical support should be able to do this for you also..
    Streamline Process Server is something that we setup to execute code on the SQL box rather than from the application. Streamline Process Server is set up to work with web services data integrations, etc.. SQL Server is automatically maintained on the SQL side and as long as the SQL Agent is running, Streamline Process Server should be executing as well.

    Top

  19. What screen resolutions are supported?
    Resolution font files have been created to use the greatest amount of the Magic desktop without imparting scroll bars or overlapping text. The system automatically selects the correct font file based on the user's desktop definition. The following screen resolutions are supported in version 9:
    800 X 600 (available but not officially supported - scroll bars may be present in some screens)
    1024 X 768
    1152 X 864
    1280 X 720
    1280 X 768
    1280 X 800
    1280 X 1024
    1360 X 768
    1364 X 768
    1440 X 900
    1680 X 1050
    The font files have all been designed to be as close to proportionate as possible. So when the desktop resolution is changed, you should get roughly the same amount of display, just scaled appropriately. There are a few exceptions though, and some things of which the user should be aware. If you are connecting to a server via RDP then you need to be aware that your RDP session will inherit your own desktop resolution and you can't make it bigger unless you change your local settings and reconnect. Some servers don't allow you to make changes to your desktop when you are connected remotely. Specific monitor's can affect it also such as VDT, LCD, standard 4:3 or widescreen 16:9. The list is very specific. To get 1024 X 768 resolution for example, your machine must support 1024 X 768 EXACTLY. If you have 1024 X 764 (or any other 'close' variation) it will not work. The software 'READS' the setting of the desktop and sets the font file accordingly. If your exact resolution isn't in the list then it sets to a 'default' value.

    Top

  20. I am receiving a DB error " Row handle referred to deleted row or row marked for deletion" when running program or report. What does this mean?
    This message means that information/data has changed from the time you initially called the request. So in other words, the system had originally picked up information to report or process through whichever program you are running. In the meantime, somone has changed the result of the data, and the information that the system had originally collected is not longer valid. This message forces you to exit and re-start the program again to get the refreshed information.

    Top

  21. How do I setup access to my Streamline data through Excel Query?
    See attached document.
    Document: Creating New Data Sources to access Streamline data in Excel Query.pdf

    Top

  22. How can I shadow a user's session in Windows Server 2008?
    In order to be able to shadow a users session, you need to have administrator access, please contact your TECH support for assistance on getting access. Once you have been granted acess follow these steps:
    If you do not have an Icon setup on your desktop, click on Start > All Progragrams > Administrative Tools > Terminal Services Manager. This will open a window showing you all users that are currently connected to the server. Find the user that you need to shadow, and park on their USER ID code. Then right click. A screen will come up asking you to select the option that you need, select 'Remote Control' then click OK. The system will then display a HOT KEY screen, this is the key stroke combination that you need to enter to end the remote session's connection. For example, CTL + TAB. You can change the default by clicking on the drop down arrow box. Once you click OK, one of two things will happen:
    1) you will be automatically linked to the user's session, and able to see their screen, and take control of the mouse.

    Top

  23. Is it possible to have a 6 digital terminal ID for streamline v10?
    No, it's not recommended to have more than 4 digit terminal ids. The higher number for terminal ids - from 9000 onwards are used by system processes. You can setup Terminal ID's from 1 to 8999.

    Top

  24. How do I export a report when export is not an option?
    There is a workaround to get a report exported. You need to print the report to a PDF file. If you do not have the option to print to a PDF file, you need to get your tech support to install it for you. There is a free version of PDF writers available that your tech support can download from the internet, one of them is called CutePDF.

    Top

  25. Users are receiving a DB error: Transaction log for database sisl_data01 is full?
    This is technical issue. You should have your tech check the disk space on the sql server where the streamline databases reside. And if possible shrink and optimize the databases. You should make sure the SQL backups are running without any errors, as this is the most common cause of the transaction logs not reusing space..

    Top

  26. We are experiencing a lot of locking, why?
    There are a few different types of locks that can occur in the software, and I have included some information on each one. See below for more info.
    Lock messages are intended to report a conflict between users trying to modify the same record in a table, at same time. These tend to happen between purchasing, sales order processing and invoicing and can be legitimate. A simple example would be 2 users trying modify the same customer at the same time. Another example would be a user receiving while another user modifies a sales order that is linked to the po that is being received. There would be a lock reported for one of the users and possibly both.
    On the other hand, there can be locks that aren’t needed, we want to identify these and fix them. But to do so we need details on how it is happening, User names, table locked, what the user was doing at the time, menu path to get there, last key hit, data like SO# or PO# or product code, etc. It is always helpful to take a print screen of the lock along with the other pertinent information required as well. We can then try to recreate the same here and once identified then we can fix it, if is not a required lock.
    Magic Crash errors, these are reported as a Microsoft windows application errors and happen when something causes the magic application to freeze up, they appear as Not Responding, or close down. These are often related to technical causes or setup problems, etc and require technical assistance to resolve.

    Top

  27. How do I add a company to a User's profile?
    Go to Company Setup > User Maintenance > Find the user and click on it. Located along the right side is a button that reads ‘User Comps’ click on this. This will list all the companies that the user has access to. To add a new company to the list, you need to Modify, then use the arrow down to get to a new line, or you can use the F4 key to insert a new line, then hit F5 and select the company from the list. The user will also need to have access to user right RTCC – Right to change companies.

    Top

  28. How do a delete a user from the system?
    In the magic security file find the user and park on them and hit to F3 key to delete and you will be asked to confirm you wish to delete them.
    Document: User Maint Delete User flag.pdf

    Top

  29. I set up a new user, and they are not able to get onto our test company?
    You need to set the companies that each user has access to individually. This is done through: Company setup > User Maintenance > find the user and click on USER COMPS button located on the right hand side. You will see listed, all the companies that the user has access to. To give them access to the test company, click Modify, then F4 to add a new line, and then hit F5 on the new line. This will provide a list of all the companies. Select the company they need access to on that screen. Once this is setup, the user will be able to switch to the test company, provided that they have the user rights needed to be able to do ts.

    Top

  30. How do I set up either a New User with a Streamline icon on their desktop?
    See attachment for Intructions
    Document: How To add an Streamline Icon to the Desktop.pdf

    Top

  31. What programs does the user right 'Right to Modify Tables' control?
    See attached for list of programs controlled by this right.
    Document: Right To Modify Tables.pdf

    Top

  32. SQL Database jobs setup but need to be monitored by your technical support.
    We schedule 3 jobs executed by the SQL server that are critical to the working & disaster recovery of the Streamline databases, but their statuses need to be monitored for any failures. These are:
    - 1.All Database Backup : Executed once every week night at 10 PM. Does a complete backup of the Streamline SQL Server databases to disk to the default MS SQL Backup folder which is normally
    under D:\MSSQL$STREAMLINE\BACKUP on SQL 2000, and D:\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL10.STREAMLINE\MSSQL\Backup on the SQL 2008 servers or D:\Microsoft SQL server\MSSQL11.STREAMLINE\MSSQL\Backup on SQL 2012 servers. This is the default set of folder but some sites have requested to move these to custom folders setup specifically for backups. If this folder location doesn't exist please contact support and they can provide you with the path being used. Clears up any old database backups from this folder after 2 days
    2..Log Backups : Executed once every 2 hours from 7 to 9 PM. Generally these backups are placed in the default MS SQL folder path as indicated above. Does a transaction log backup of the live databases (sisl_app, sisl_data01 and sisl_global) to disk. Log Backups help to restore data to the last point of crash (or at least, help to restore data to the last 2 hours), and also clears any old transactions to help reuse disk space. Clears up any old log backups from this folder after 4 days.
    Document: Visual Streamline Server Maintenance Guidelines.pdf

    Top

  33. I have an old TEST company that is no longer used, can it be deleted?
    Deleting of a company can be carried out during the day. You will need to have Windows administrative access on the SQL server to be able to perform the DELETE company function from the Streamline software and no user should be using this company at the time of the delete.
    When you switch your company to the “to be deleted” company, the session is kept open even if you change the company, within Streamline. If this happens, you will have to change to a different company, log out and back into Streamline before you can proceed with the delete operation.

    Top

  34. Special Rights button in the User Maintenance is ghosted - why?
    In order to be able to add the Special rights to a user's profile you need to have RTSUCR - Right to Setup user company rights.

    Top

  35. User is receiving the following error when they try to open Streamline: Execute Permission denied on object MainMenu_Delete_User_tmp_tables. Database sisl_data01_owner. What does this mean?
    All windows users must be member of "Visual Streamline Users" group. Any member of that group should not get that error. If a user is getting the error, they are not part of this group.
    Please forward this to your tech support.

    Top

  36. How do printer defaults work?
    Under, Company Setup > Setup Printer Defaults, you can enter a default printer for the forms listed. If a printer default is entered when the form is printed it will automatically print to that printer and no choice is offered. If no printer default is listed the priinter dialog will come up allowing you to chosse the printer to print to.

    Top

  37. Are modules global or company specific?
    Modules are global for all companies but all sub modules are company specific.

    Top

  38. I am receiving an error 'COLOR MAP FILE - could not open % settings % clr.slis.eng' when I try to open streamline?
    Chances are if you are using a mapped drive for the Streamline folder the mapped drive is currently not present for this user. This is not covered under software support, please refer to your TECHNICAL support for assistance.


    Top

  39. I ran utility under: Installation > Reset Programs > Update Standard cost with Landed, but not all items were updated why?
    This program checks for Primary Supplier record, but not for default uom. Examle: Item has 2 primary supplier records one for BX and one for PR. PR has price of 3.5 and BX has price of 4.0. System sorts alphabetically so updates first record of BX first and then PR therefore price of 3.5 overrides price of 4.0.

    Top

  40. If I flag a user in User Maintenance as a sales rep, what are the restrictions?
    Sales reps are restricted from the following:
    Delete a Quote
    Close a Quote
    Create an Order from a Quote - unless user has right 'RTSFQBSR'
    Create a Contract
    Change the Ship to on a quote.
    Enter a reference in a quote
    In Sales Analysis -> Sales Analysis Reports -> Sales Reports - only reports where a sort method is sales rep will be displayed.

    Top

  41. What do the various colour codes throughout the software represent?
    Please see attached document for colour coding chart.
    Document: Colour Coding Chart.pdf

    Top

  42. User can't log into streamline v10, they are receiving license error – failed to load license parameter?
    This is a technical issue. The magic.ini file in D:\Streamline\MSSQL\Ctl is corrupt and needs to be restored. Site's who encounter this error will need to have their tech restore this from backup. If assistance is required from our Technical staff, the time is billable T&M.


    Top

  43. How does the Inter-company flag in both AR and AP Master Files work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Inter-Company Documentation.pdf

    Top

  44. How do I add company logos to forms?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Logo Setup User Documentation.pdf

    Top

  45. What User Right controls the MODIFY button within Control File Maintenance?
    RTCFM will allow to see the menu option

    Top

  46. What does the RED CROSS indicate in my SQL server?
    The "RED CROSS" indicates that the job had failed before, and you can look up the history of the details by right-clicking on it. If the current status indicates that the job is "Executing" it should be fine to leave it. Alternatively, to clear the RED CROSS you can always right-click on the Job, Stop it, right-click again and Restart it. This should clear the "Red Cross" if no more errors are encountered.

    Top

  47. What is the intended behaviour when I double-click a record on a browse screen?
    See attached FAQ document:
    Document: Double-Click on a Browse Screen.pdf

    Top

  48. When I try to open up a document linked to an FAQ, 'Error on page' is displayed?
    Since the documents are on a remote link each might need special permissions to access them which would be something their administrator and/or technical support on site might be able to give the user.

    Top

  49. How do I change my screen size in version 10?
    See attached FAQ document.
    Document: User Selectable Screen Sizes.pdf

    Top

  50. When printing, what does this error mean: Printer Not Activated, error code 30?
    This is an issue with the default printer. The user needs to make sure they have a physical printer selected as default windows printer as that will cause this error.

    Top

  51. How do I handle Sales Tax changes, and transition sales in progress at time of change?
    Please see attached for documentation.
    Document: Canadian Sales Tax Change - Transition Information.pdf

    Top

  52. What are the Posting Controls for each register that needs to be posted at the end of each day?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: Posting Control for End of day registers.pdf

    Top

  53. When trying to locate records by typing a search string there are significant delays after each character. Is there an alternative?
    There is a checkbox labeled 'Advanced Lookup Feature' in Company Setup > Control File Maintenance (Miscellaneous).

    This feature allows the user to locate based on the entire search string rather than the system auto-locating after each character.
    This feature is utilized in the following areas:
    Supplier Browse
    Customer Browse
    S/O Entry - order lookup
    Product Lookup (regular, extended, Allpri$er)
    Customer Service (multiple locations)
    Quote Entry - quote lookup
    Customer Last Price Lookup

    Top

  54. What DB Errors received in Streamline are caused by Network Issues and therefore technical?
    There are many DB errors that are caused by the network. If the network fails, even for a short while, Connections to the database are affected and can result in DB Errors. Some common Errors caused by Network connection issues are:
    Unexpected Error
    DBNETLIB (connectionwrite)wrapper write.
    [DBNETLIV]ConnectionWrite (send()).]General network error. Check your network doucmentation.
    Command text was not set for the command object. This is a general low level error. It might indicate low memory.

    Top

  55. How does the Report Generator work within Streamline 10 version?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: How does the report generator work in Streamline 10.pdf

    Top

  56. Is there a document for Technical maintenance?
    Attached is a general guide to server maintenance.
    Document: Visual Streamline Server Maintenance Guidelines.pdf

    Top

  57. Where does the date and time that Streamline uses gets picked up from?
    The date and time are picked from the server the Streamline session is running on.

    Top

  58. Is there a keyboard template for Streamline Software?
    See attached.
    Document: Printing _Keyboard Template1_.pdf

    Top

  59. Does Visual Streamline support 3M's Point of Sale requirements?
    Please see attached document. This is module is available for purchase.
    Document: White Paper for 3M Point of Sale Integration.pdf

    Top

  60. When purchasing a new computer what are the minimum specifications and requirements required to run Streamline?
    For local computers, the only requirement is that it has Remote Desktop to connect to the Streamline server. This is built-in to Windows xp, Vista and Windows 7.

    Top

  61. How do we change the time out settings on our terminals?
    It varies based on os and configuration. Please see your Technical support for instructions.

    Top

  62. How do I view, add, or delete a user right from a User ID, or User Group in Streamline v10?
    See attachment for documentation.
    Document: How to Maintain User Rights.pdf

    Top

  63. What access is required to open and modify the Security File?
    The usr_slis.eng file under the STREAMLIN\SETTINGS folder stores the Streamline credentials. This file if opened by a number of users at site - to even change their own passwords, could cause it to get corrupted. To avoid such corruption from occurring, this is locked down by most sites by your administrator (your third party technical company) to allow access to only Administrators to this file. It is recommended that only 1 or two users at most have access. If you require access to make changes to this file, you need to be contacting your third party technical support. Calling software support regarding this issue will result in the call being billable.

    Top

  64. How does the Recalculate Taxes program work?
    See attached document.
    Document: Canadian Sales Tax Changes - Recalculate Taxes Utility.pdf

    Top

  65. Can I modify the colour palette in Streamline 10?
    Please review the attached documentation.
    Document: How to modify color palette in Streamline 10.pdf

    Top

  66. Why am I receiving an error when I attempt to access the help file?
    Please review attached documentation.
    Document: Why am I receiving an error when opening Help file.pdf

    Top

  67. User-Defined Reports overview.
    See attached document.
    Document: White Paper for User-Defined Reports.pdf

    Top

  68. What needs to be done to give a user the ability to import, export data and to run queries, generally?
    Your tech support just needs to add the user to the visual streamline users group in active directory.

    Top

  69. When emailing from Streamline what can casue the email attachmenst not to show attached in email dialog window.
    If your email attachment name has any of the following special charaters in it this can happen.
    ? * % [ ] ^ _ ' <> " & + / # , : ;

    Top

  70. Copy/paste function is not working between Streamline and Local Computers anymore?
    Check your Streamline RDP icon on your local desktop to ensure that under "options / local resources" that clipboard is checked.

    Top

  71. Why in Streamline 10 when I access the security file there are no Descriptions for the User Rights?
    You need to click the Application button and select the Streamline.ecf file in the startup folder of the streamline icon.

    Top

  72. What is the use of the Restocking fee in Contol File Maint?
    Please see attachment
    Document: What is the use of Restocking fee in Control File Maint.pdf

    Top

  73. What causes the error: Arithmetic overflow error?
    This is usually data related. If the error is coming up when entering product code on either a quote or a sales order, the problem could be linked to an incorrect price code expressing a % field incorrectly.
    If the error is coming up in Executive Management, then it typically indicates a problem with a date on an invoice, for example wrong year entered.
    If the error is coming up in Map Import, then it could suggest that you are trying to import a field that exceeds the system decimal places for example: trying to inset a percentage that exceeds 3.2 format.

    Top

  74. Our Streamline server backup system has failed, is there another way to temporarily backup the data in case recovery is needed?
    Streamline performs flat file backups to "D:\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL10_50.STREAMLINE\MSSQL\Backup". You can copy the contents of this folder for backup. Please note however that the location might change slightly from site to site. For example - if you don't have a D:\ drive but an E:\ drive instead. Also the naming convention is a little different in SQL 2005/2000. So when looking for the backup file, please keep this in mind. The folder is always called Backup though and resides in the SQL instance folder.

    Top

  75. How to avoid Streamline from disconnecting from the Terminal Server if the session is idle?
    Please review attached document.
    Document: how to avoid Streamline from disconnecting when idle.pdf

    Top

  76. How do I setup taxes for a US based Company?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: Taxes for US based companies.pdf

    Top

  77. Company Setup > Company Info > Stock Types > Is this information stored in a table that can be queried?
    Yes - They are stored in the 'users' table in the last 8 columns as checkboxes. The data can be queried from there.

    Top

  78. How to use the recorder software to record steps in Streamline?
    Please see attached documentation.
    Document: how to use the recorder program.pdf

    Top

  79. What is the process for tax setup for US based companies?
    1.Conditions that must be in place:
    -In Company Setup > Control File - GL tab set home currency to US
    -In Company Setup > Company Info - ensure home state is set to TX
    -In A/P > Master Files > Provinces & States - state master for TX - ensure that country code is set to US or USA (not sure which one is part of the base package)
    -In A/P > Master Files > Countries - ensure the GST flag is off for US
    -Setup separate GL accounts for state and county tax payable.
    Document: Taxes Groups for US companies.pdf

    Top

  80. Can I access Streamline from an IPAD or Tablet?
    Yes, there is an RPD app that needs to be purchased from the iTunes store or from whatever device you are using. Once you purchase the app and have installed it on your Ipad or Tablet, then you should be able to connect to any RDP address and launch Streamline as you normally would.
    There are many apps available, and you need to try them to see which works best. There is one free app available and here is the link. https://itunes.apple.com/en/app/remote-desktop-lite-rdp/id288362576?mt=8

    Top

  81. Where is the default location for the adobe reader stored?
    Default location for setup is Installation > Setup DDE Server Names
    You don't need to specify the full path anymore, only the .exe file would do the trick.

    Top

  82. Will there be any software changes to handle the penny being discontinued.
    Investigation of this so far is indicating that no software changes are required. See web site at ,http://www.budget.gc.ca/2012/themes/theme2-info-eng.html

    "It is only the total cash payment for the transaction that will be rounded. If businesses round cash transactions to the nearest five-cent increment, any gains or losses relating to cash transactions (a maximum of two cents per transaction) will balance out over time."
    You could also check with your accountant on recommended accounting practices for this situation.

    Top

  83. Why do I not see my file in an import program when I press F5 on the path?
    The most likely reason for not seeing a file in the path of an import program, is that you have the file opened in another application. Close the file, and then retry.

    Top

  84. Are there any conditions that will cause scancode to not pick up the freight terms on some orders?
    See attached documentation.
    Document: Freight Terms and shipping software.pdf

    Top

  85. When support shadows my session I am disconnected when they exit, how do I prevent this?
    This is a MS RDP setting that your tech support should be able to resolved. It is the compression algorithm for RDP that needs to be modified to correct the issue.
    See http://social.technet.microsoft.com/Forums/en-US/winserverTS/thread/87fc497a-27fd-4a76-ab59-ea5fe01c9091

    Top

  86. What areas can I check when I find issues such as: freezing, hanging, not responding, and slow screens?
    Please review the attachment.
    Document: Areas to check for system performance issues.pdf

    Top

  87. How do I configure the Signature Pad Units?
    Please see attachment for instructions.
    Document: How to configure signature units.pdf

    Top

  88. Forms sometimes only print half the page, how can this be fixed?
    This is a work around until a permanent fix is available from Magic, this has been tested and found to successfully avoid
    the ˝ page print issue.
    We found that when you are selecting a different printer from the print dialog box, and the user is tabbing/jumping from one printer to the next in order to select the printer, if there is a label printer on in the way that the user tabs over, you would actually get a ˝ page print or page printed using the page settings of the label printer. If the user did not tab from printer to printer but instead selected the new printer directly in the print box by using the mouse button, they will not experience the ˝ page print issue. It is our understanding that somehow the Windows print dialog box is not refreshing the page setting after it encounters a label printer, even when the intended printer is to use the full page. A work around that we suggested to other clients is to name their printers in such a way that their label printers are prefix with a "z" or something that will keep it at the very end of the printer list - avoiding users to tab or hover over it if not required.
    Document: Half page printing issues work around.pdf

    Top

  89. How does multi language capability work?
    See attached.
    Document: Multi Language info.pdf

    Top

  90. I can modify Business Rules other than the Custom tab why?
    'Right To Modify Business Rules' right is needed to modify all BRs except Optional/Custom BRs.

    'Right Of Installation' right is needed to modify Optional/Custom BRs.

    Top

  91. I am receiving a Dead Lock error - what does this mean and what do I need to do?
    Dead locks happen when multiple users are trying to access the same table or info at same time, the error only comes up on the youngest session and only after trying for 1 minute unsuccessfully.
    The other user will not see the error but they will have a pause in processing and may get the 'not responding' message. When a deadlock occurs do the following:
    - Ask the user to click the details button on the error to identify the table that is locked.
    - Once the youngest session has been released the other users session will continue processing.
    - This makes it difficult to tell who else was involved as that user may finish their processing and leave the program before we have a chance to identify a lock in the same area and table by another user.
    - This makes it important to move quickly and see if any locks are showing (in data dictionary lock program
    - Ask these users what they were doing at the time.
    - Also get info on what the person with the deadlock was doing at the time.
    Deadlock occurrences can increase due to performance issues as processing is slowed down causing
    tables to be locked for longer during processing. So ask the site if they have been experiencing
    performance issues also.
    Deadlocks are assumed to be due to performance/network issues or bad timing with multiple users doing
    same thing at same time, unless the deadlock repeatedly occurs in the same table and same area and
    can be recreated.

    Top

  92. How to disable a user from seeing costs?
    Review attached document.
    Document: how to disable users from seeing costs.pdf

    Top

  93. Is there an overview document for the Task Scheduler Framework?
    Please see attached document.

    Note: Available in versions 10.2.3.0000 and higher is the ability schedule the Sales Order Invoice Register through the Task Scheduler Framework.

    Previously, prior to version 10.2.3.0000 the only way to schedule the Sales order Invoice Register was through the register itself.
    Document: White Paper for Task Scheduler Framework.pdf

    Top

  94. I need the ability to reset / disconnect users from Streamline through Terminal Serves. How do I set this up?
    The users need to be members of the administrator group on the server/domain. Best practice is to not assign administrator rights to users but to login as a separate administrator server/domain account to perform these tasks.
    Your technical team should be able to either add these users to the administrator group or create an administrator login these users can use to reset sessions.

    Top

  95. What are the specific rules sorting rules that are used to sort by bin location?
    When a Business Rule contains the option to sort by bin location or any other sort option, the specific sort method is as follows:
    The bin locations are 10 characters in length, and may contain any alpha-numeric characters. There is no attempt to sort numbers differently than letters; the sort order is determined by reading the characters from left to right and performing a normal sort. Characters 0-9 are first. Then A-Z after. Special characters may have values less than or greater than the numbers and letters. These values are based on international ASCII Standards and are not controlled by the software or the software language.

    Top

  96. What Streamline files need to be backed up to ensure we are backing up all required information to complete a restore if needed?
    locations can very site to site depending on the drives setup. Example: you will see me reference E:\ drive below for some sites this may be D:\ drive.

    Unipaas application - C:\Program Files (x86)\MSE
    Streamline application - E:\Streamline
    Streamline SQL Flat File Backups - E:\Microsoft SQL Server\MSSQL10_50.STREAMLINE\MSSQL\Backup


    Top

  97. Is there an overview document for the Signature Capture (Tethered and Remote) module?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: White Paper for Signature Capture.pdf

    Top

  98. Is there a untility to change a branch code throughout the system?
    We have a new utility in the base that allows the customer to change a branch code. This utility can be found under the Installation ' Utilities menu.
    It requires the Right of General Ledger, Right to G/L Master Files and Right to Modify Org and Branch (as well as access to the Utilities menu).
    Like changing a warehouse, customer or supplier, there is no facility to MERGE data; it simply changes the branch code throughout the system. FYI: you cannot change branch code '00000'.

    Top

  99. Integrity check and Index job optimization has failed, what do I do?
    Integrity Check & Index Optimization : is executed every Sunday at 12 AM. If during regular monitoring of your servers, it is noted that our database integration and check routines were failing, then this suggests that one of the tables in the company 10 database, seems to have become corrupted. This could have been as a result of a hardware failure or power outages. Although our monitoring service is included in our technical support contract if you have one with us, the actual fixing of any corruptions to the database are not covered in the contract.
    Therefor is it billable for us to fix these errors should they occurr. Please contact support, and provide approval for technical l billable services.

    Top

  100. When exporting a report to XML I am receiving an error "XML Parse Error" what does this mean?
    This error in XML exporting is indicating an invalid character found, we have seen this before when strange characters are part of the product code or description, most commonly happens when a product description was put in with copy/paste rather then typing it in when setting it up. To find the problem items you need to export smaller ranges to narrow down the problem products. If you export to CSV instead it will not error.

    Top

  101. How do I convert a text file to a CSV file?
    The attached workaround can be used to take any text file and either create an excel file or a CSV file.
    Document: How to turn a text file to a CSV file.pdf

    Top

  102. Is it okay for me to make changes to the Streamline DB using SQL or other applications?
    We do not encourage this as without in-depth knowledge of database relationships you could cause data integrity problems. Any cleanup required as a result would not be covered under support.
    There are many fields that require validation in order for proper processing to occur throughout the software. To import data would require that these validations are carried out and any errors reported and fixed before records are imported. Importing directly to these tables without proper validations would cause corrupt data and risk error and data integrity issues throughout.
    If Streamline programs are not available to import the data you need, we can provide assistance to help you import data. If you would like an estimate on the cost please provide information you want to import and I will ask development to review and provide a quick time estimate.

    Top

  103. How to create a Favorites menu option or add an item to it?
    See attached documentation.
    Document: How to add a menu option to Favorities list.pdf

    Top

  104. After an upgrade, why are some screens now showing scroll bars?
    There were some resolution changes made in Versions 10.2.2.0000 and higher. See attachment for details.
    Document: How to fix scroll bars on some screens.pdf

    Top

  105. What are the minimum technical requirements to upgrade to .net?
    Please find attached the latest version of the Streamline 2019.x Minimum Requirements document. This document is based on experience gathered from installs as well as existing Streamline 10.3.x installs. As more customers are upgraded to the .NET version we will gain more experience and make adjustments to this document as necessary. We are tracking who it gets sent to and will resend in the event of an update.

    It is important to note that this document reflects the minimum requirements and may need to be altered according to each individual customer. If you plan to purchase hardware in the future, it is recommended to have someone from our Technical team review before you purchase
    Document: TECSYS Streamline 2019.x Minimum Requirements.pdf

    Top

  106. Why when emailing quotes/invoices and the receipent prints the PDF is my company logo corrupted.

    Top

  107. Why is our company logo corrupted when a recipient tries to print a emailed quote or invoice.
    We found an issue that come customers may experience this behaviour after installing Adobe v2019.008.20071. Reverting back to Adobe version 11 should resolve the issue.

    Top

  108. Why when importing an Excel document into Streamline are the dashes replaced with question marks?
    See attached document.
    Document: Dashes are replaced with question marks when importing data.pdf

    Top

  109. How to add new users in Streamline .net versions?
    See attached.
    Document: Creating New Users 2018.1.pdf

    Top



Accounts Payable

  1. How do I record payment of US Supplier Invoices by Visa in Canadian funds?
    See attached document for details.
    Document: AP Invoice paid by visa across currencies.pdf

    Top

  2. How do I process A/P Invoices when vendor has sent 2 Invoices but stock receipt was done under one reference only?
    Enter the first A/P invoice and match it to the sole Stock Receipt Reference. This will create a Purchase Price Variance (PPV) for the difference between the FOB invoice amount and the partial receipt reference. The system will post this amount as a CREDIT to the Purchase Price Variance account. Enter the second A/P Invoice , but make sure you enter it as a 3-way Matching invoice even though you are technically not matching it to a receipt. Because there is no match to a P/O, the system will post the entire FOB amount to the Purchase Price Variance account as a DEBIT. These two transactions to the PPV account offset each other so no further entries need to be done.

    Top

  3. Why isn't the 'Take Late Discount' button enabled?
    There are a few conditions that apply in order for this button to be enabled. The following criteria must be met:
    The invoice Discount % can not equal 0.
    The payment date must be greater than the invoice discount date.
    The cheque can not be printed for the invoice in question
    The invoice can not be on hold due to an 'unmatched' status.
    The supplier is not on hold.
    The number of unposted payments for the invoice must be greater than or equal to 1.

    Top

  4. How do I pay an A/P Invoice with a credit card?
    There are a couple of options for this process depending on the currency of the vendor and the credit card. If the A/P Supplier and the credit card are in the same currency you can set up a 'Pay To" code on the Supplier Master File record. Enter the supplier code for the credit card. Next, enter and pay the A/P invoice as normal, the cheque will be made payable to the credit card automatically based on the 'Pay To' code you assigned.

    Top

  5. I have run the Generate by Formula program in A/P Payments and one of the invoices satisfying the date criteria is not tagged for payment?
    The most likely reason the invoice was not selected for payment is that it is not yet posted. The 'Generate by Formula' program will not select any invoices that are not posted. Similarly, the 'Tag Supplier' button in the A/P Payment screen will also ignore any invoices that are not yet updated.

    Top

  6. If I cancel an A/P Cheque, in what period will it cancel?
    When A/P Cheques are cancelled they hit the G/L in the month of the cancellation (current month), not the month in which the cheque was issued. Unless the cheque was post-dated, then it will post in the future period, same period to which the cheque was post-dated. So when attempting to reconcile your bank rec you need to keep in mind that cancelled cheques will appear as 'cancelled' in the period they were cancelled in only.

    Top

  7. Is it possible to put an A/P invoice on hold after it has been updated so it does not get paid?
    There is now a program on the Accounts Payable -> Invoices menu called Change Inv. Status /Due Date. This allows users to tag an invoice as 'on hold' or change the due date. If an invoice is put on hold with this program it will be displayed in red in the A/P Payments screen and can not be tagged for payment until the hold has been released.

    Top

  8. I just cancelled an Accounts Payable Cheque and I don't see the posting for the cancellation in the G/L?
    Once you have used the 'Cancel Printed Cheques' program to cancel an A/P cheque, the A/P Purchase Journal must be updated. This updates the cancellation to the G/L and re-instates the invoice(s) previously paid to the A/P Payments screen so that they can be re-paid.

    Top

  9. How can I find out if a P/O has been billed by the vendor?
    This question can also be triggered when trying to match to a P/O receipt and it is not showing in the list. The most efficient way to look this information up is to do a Transaction Inquiry. You can access this screen from both the Supplier Master File and the Accounts Payable -> Reports and Inquiries menu. Simply enter the P/O in question and the system will display all transactions associated with that record. You can also use this screen to search for payment information based on Invoice, Cheque Number or Date of Cheque.

    Top

  10. Is there a way to record when a cheque was mailed to a supplier?
    Go to Accounts Payable -> Payments -> Enter Cheque Mailing Date.
    Once you have specified the Supplier code, the system will display the cheques for that Supplier. Enter the date that the cheque was mailed. This information is available in the History, AP Transaction Inquiry etc. for quick reference.

    Top

  11. I have several vendors that I pay by a single credit card account using Pay To Code. How can I get all payments to print on a single cheque?
    Enabling Business Rule AP4 (Consolidate payment by Pay To Supplier code) allows the printing of a single cheque to cover multiple suppliers' invoices if they have the same alternate supplier defined in the Pay-To field of the Supplier Master File.

    Top

  12. Is there a way to deal with split terms? For example... a P/O requires deposit of 40% with order, 50% upon delivery and 10% within the normal 30 days.
    There is currently no automated way to handle split terms on an A/P invoice. In order for each piece of this P/O's invoices to show the correct payment terms, you would need to enter it in A/P as 3 separate invoices. I'd just leave the P/O as is and just make sure it is received it before the last 10 % invoice is entered.
    For Example: Enter an A/P invoice for the 40% deposit and do not match it to anything... this will credit A/P and debit PPV. You can then do your deposit cheque from this invoice. Also enter an A/P invoice for the 50% and do not match it to anything, so you can write the cheque due upon delivery. This will also credit A/P and debit PPV.
    After you have received the goods, enter the invoice for the 10% due in 30 days and match it to the receipt. This will credit A/P for the 10%, debit A/P Clearing for 100% and credit the PPV account for 90% which will offset the 2 debits above to PPV bringing the net affect on the PPV account to zero. Manually check that it does.
    You may want to use a Pre-Paid Clearing account setup in the balance sheet instead of the PPV account, if the invoice will not clear within a month.

    Top

  13. How do I clear unmatched stock receipts from my A/P Clearing Audit?
    Go to: Accounts Payable > A/P Invoicing > Clear Unmatched Stock Receipts
    Enter the Currency, dates, and, if known, the P/O that you want to clear.
    The system will then display the transactions on the screen. Find the P/O that you need to clear and click on the field that contains the amount that you need to clear. For example - if you want to clear the FOB amount, place your cursor on that field.
    At the bottom of the screen you will see a button called 'Tag FOB' click that button. This will tag the field that you were parked on, and it will result in the field appearing white in color. This white color indicates that the field has been tagged for clearing.
    If it is a 'freight' field that you are clearing, then the button at the bottom of the screen will read 'clear Freight'
    Once you have cleared all the necessary records, select the update button.
    The system will then display a confirmation message - confirm with update? Click YES to proceed.
    Select the destination printer for the report. The report that generates is the summary of what you have cleared. This will also tell you what you need to journalize; because this process does not affect the G/L.
    Running this program removes the records from the sub-ledger (AP clearing audit report) this program DOES NOT record the journal entry. It is up to you to do a journal entry to journalize the transaction to ensure that the sub-ledger remains in balance with the GL.

    Top

  14. A P/O has been issued and received for the wrong vendor. How do I now process the invoice from the correct vendor?
    Run Clear unmatched stock receipts program located in: Accounts Payable > Invoices.
    This program only clears the subledger and does not record a journal entry. Therefore you need to do a journal entry to Debit your A/P clearing and Credit an offset account.
    Next, enter the A/P invoice for the vendor as a non match, and offset as a Debit to the same GL account.

    Top

  15. How do I pay US vendor invoices via a wire transfer or bank draft?
    Please See attached document for details.
    Document: How to pay US Vendors With Draft.pdf

    Top

  16. I have a credit on a supplier's account and they have now sent us a cheque for it. How do I process this?
    Enter an on acct invoice for the amount of the cheque. The distribution will be: Credit to A/P and Debit to the same G/L acct that you used when you entered the credit note. (Make sure to use the same G/L so the two offset)
    Next in A/P payments, tag both the invoice, and the credit note, this will result in a zero dollar cheque; therefore there is no posting to bank etc.
    Next enter the cheque you received into the system using the 'Direct To G/L Deposit' in the cash receipts program. The distribution will be Debit to the Bank acct, and a credit to the same G/L you used on the A/P credit and on acct transaction.

    Top

  17. When I use line by line matching, I see two differences. What do these represent, and which one will be used to post to PPV?
    See attached document for details.
    Document: Line by Line matching totals, and differences.pdf

    Top

  18. I have done my cheque run, and I am trying to update the Disbursement Journal, but it's telling me that there are unprinted cheques. Why?
    Things to look for:
    - ensure that the cheque printing process was run for ALL the banks that have invoices tagged.
    - ensure that you have tagged invoices for manual cheques, you change the type from A to M.
    - ensure that you don't have a negative cheque, by tagging a credit, or tagging a credit that exceeds the invoice amount results in a negative cheque, and streamline does not print negative cheques

    Top

  19. What is required to be able to change the 'Match Method' when entering an A/P Invoice?
    The field has 2 conditions on it.
    If there is a link to the A/P transaction details file and if a detail transaction is found then the match method is not modifiable. What this means is that once the A/P invoices is accepted it writes a record to the detail file so as soon as you save the invoice even if you intend on coming back in to modify it, this condition would be 'true' and you wouldn’t be able to modify it.
    It checks business rule AP2 (Allow over-ride of Matching Method in A/P Invoice Entry).

    Top

  20. What lead time does the 'Date Wanted' field use on a Purchase Order?
    The Date Wanted field is pulled from the Lead Time (Days) located in the Product Master, Supplier Info file. It uses the Lead Times (Days) regardless of the Manual, or Automatic Flag. If no Lead Time (Days) is set, it takes the lead time from the Supplier Master File, located in the PO Info Field. If no lead time is set in the supplier master file, it defaults to the current date.

    Top

  21. Is there a way to restrict users that have access to Accounts Payable from viewing certain supplier records?
    There is a flag in the Company Setup User Maintenance screen to allow/prevent access to 'Restricted' suppliers. This flag will default to true for all users and must be turned off by someone with access to make changes to users for those that are not allowed access to restricted suppliers. There is a corresponding flag on the supplier master details (visible for only non-matching suppliers) that allows the site manager to designate certain non-matching suppliers as Restricted. Note - sites will need to ensure that users that do not have access to restricted suppliers also do not have access to changing their own user setups.

    Top

  22. What is the difference between Purchase Variance G/L account in Currency File, and PPV Over Tolerance G/L account in Control File?
    The system will use the G/L account in the Currency File if you are within your company tolerance, when matching an A/P invoice to a receipt. However, if you are over your tolerance, and if you have a G/L account in the Control File, the system picks up that G/L account, and uses that to post the full PPV amount. Therefore in a situation where you are over the tolerance, a G/L account in the Control File will override a G/L account in the Currency File.

    Top

  23. How does the Generate By Formula date ranges work in A/P Payments?
    Formula for discount: Late Disc As Of <= Invoice Discount Date <= Discount Date As Of
    In words: Invoice Discount date must be between "Late Disc As Of " and "Discount Date As Of"
    Formula For Tagging : Due Date As Of >= Invoice Payment Due Date
    In words : "Due Date As Of" must be larger or equal to "Invoice Payment Due Date"
    Document: AP Payment Generate By Formula examples.pdf

    Top

  24. Does Streamline have a cheque format that is CPA compliant?
    Yes we have 2 formats.
    Document: 1.New Cheque Specifications.pdf

    Top

  25. What is available in Streamline to help keep the system cheque number assigned synchronized to the Form number when using new CPA compliant formats?
    If Business Rule AP5 (Use controlled cheque numbering on A/P cheques) is ON, the Cheque print program will allow you to set the starting cheque number for the cheque run so you can keep the system cheque number synchronized to the form cheque numbers. We strongly recommend that you do try to keep these the same, or it will be difficult to reconcile your bank statement in the system.
    Document: Cheque form cheque numbers explained.pdf

    Top

  26. When printing cheques using new CPA compliant formats, the cheque portion is printing on the next page. Why?
    We have added a Scale and Page Length adjustment button to the cheque print program, in order to allow you to make adjustments if this happens. Button is only visible to "Right Of Installation" right holders.
    It seems to be most common when using format 7
    Format 7 defaults are - Scale=1, Page Length=40.
    If you find it prints to a second page, then try changing this to, Scale=8, Page Length=312, if still a problem try a Length of 309.
    Format 8 defaults are - Scale=1, Page Length=18.
    If you find it prints to a second page, then try changing this to, Scale=8, and reducing the length start at 136, if it prints okay at 136, you can try adding or subtracting some on the length to make adjustments to the line up of the cheque.
    The recommended printers are Lexmark or HP printer that supports Post Script print language.
    Further information on Page Length adjustment settings:
    Line scaling gives more precision in page length and line adjustment by dividing the page into thinner lines. Doubling scale halves height of a line. For scale 2, page length becomes 36 or for scale 4, page length becomes 72 and so on. If your last line is printing on the next page with the default length, then you can reduce it by a line or 2 and retry.
    Cheque number lower by line applies SID 17667 that prints the cheque number a little further down in the increments of 0.42mm*line numbers entered.
    Page skip fix applies SID 18419 fix. It moves cheque number and blank stubs a little down.
    Shift on ON US moves cheque number line in micr font to right a bit.

    Top

  27. Why are all buyer codes not showing up in P/O Maintenance when I hit F5 on the buyer code field?
    There is an additional flag that needs to be checked in the buyer code table. The flag is called 'buyer' you can setup a buyer code, but unless the flag is checked, the code will not be visible in P/O Maintenance when you zoom into the buyer code field.

    Top

  28. I have access to modify suppliers, but I am not able to modify the G/L Standard Distribution. Why?
    User right RMT - Right to modify tables is required.

    Top

  29. How do I match an unmatched A/P invoice?
    Enter the A/P invoice as you normally would.

    Top

  30. How do I clear outstanding AlP invoices that have been entered, posted , but will never get paid (for whatever reason)?
    Once an A/P invoice has been entered and posted, there is no way to reverse it out of the system other than to enter an offsetting credit note for the amount of the invoice. You need to Debit A/P and credit an offsetting G/L account. Then you need to use the A/P payments program to tag both the credit and the invoice, and change the payment method of the cheque to Manual. The credit and the debit will offset each other, and therefore no cheque will print.

    Top

  31. What is the font name needed for printing the MICR encoding on laser cheques?
    The font needs to be E13B compatible. The font that we use is named MICR. Fonts are stored in C:\WINDOWS\Fonts

    Top

  32. How is tax calculated for A/P invoices entered with 2-way matching method or on account?
    The GST and PST for 2 way invoices or on account are based on the tax flags set up for the G/L account(s) to which the invoices are to be expensed, so, until that is known in the distribution, it does not know how to post the taxes. Therefore unless the G/L account(s) to expense the 2 way is automatically picked up, which it is not, then how to post the taxes cannot be determined automatically and so it would have to be entered in G/L Distribution manually.
    If you entered the G/L account to expense to in the G/L distribution screen and then clicked the Tax Rec button it would actually add the tax lines to the distribution.

    Top

  33. Does the system have a process in place to handle Electronic Funds Transfer for Vendors?
    There is an EFT module available for purchase. If you are interested please contact support at IDMsupport@tecsys.com for a price. Attached is the White Paper.

    If you do not want to purchase the EFT Module, then the only option is to tag the payment as a manual cheque and record the EFT# as the cheque number.

    In addition there is a business rule FORMS360 (A/P - Suppress wire transfer form output), you can set to off and it will print a wire transfer form when printing manual cheques.

    You could also set the payment cycle in the Supplier Master, to a unique number to be used for EFT payments, suggest using '9'. Then when you run the AP Payments program for payment cycle '9' it will pick up all invoices to be paid for suppliers using EFT. These will be processed as manual cheques, so you must enter a Manual cheque number for each of the invoices, making sure you enter the same number for all invoice that belong to same supplier.


    Document: White Paper EFT processing.pdf

    Top

  34. My cheque number is incorrect, how can I change it?
    Your software administrator should have the rights to set it. This is done in the General Ledger > Master Files > Bank Accounts. Click the modify button when parked on the correct bank account... there is a field for the last cheque number that can be modified.

    Top

  35. What are the items to review if my A/P aging is out from G/L?
    Void cheques for a previous period being posted after the period closing date:

    Manual GL entries made to the AP GL acct:

    The Payable posting date is defined by BR AP3 (Allow A/P invoices to be backdated more than 1 period):
    If BR AP3 is ON, the system will post the payable invoice to the period based on the invoice date (i.e. an invoice dated December 2000 will post to December 2000 regardless of whether December 2000 is the current accounting period or not). This allows great flexibility but may post transactions unwillingly to prior periods or prior years, especially if the invoice date were to be entered incorrectly.
    If BR AP3 is OFF, any payable invoices, dated in the current or previous periods, will post to the current accounting period and any payable invoices, dated previous to the current year and the period cutoff date in General Ledger / G/L Masterfiles / G/L Periods / Current Month (modify) Cut date has not yet been reached, will post to the previous accounting period.

    Top

  36. How does the Generate By Formula work in general?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Ap payment generate by formula.pdf

    Top

  37. Can I see an example of how the Generate By Formula works?
    Please see attached document for examples
    Document: AP Payment Generate By Formula examples.pdf

    Top

  38. I am trying to match P/O xxxx to invoice yyyy but the P/O does not show up in the matching screen. Why?
    There are a few other things you can check.

    1.Accounts Payable > Reports And Inquiries > Transactions Inquiry:
    Select the 'Purchase Order Number' radio button, enter the Purchase Order Number, then click on Search.
    If the P/O has not been previously matched to an A/P invoice, you will receive a message indicating this. If you do not receive a message telling you "There are no matched invoices" Then you need to check all the invoices listed on the screen to find which one was previously matched to the receipt. If it has been matched, it cannot be matched again.

    2.Company Setup > System Auditing > A/P Clr Unmatched SR Audit:
    Check if it shows up here, if it does, it means it was cleared manually.

    3.Also check to ensure that the po was not entered in the PO maint screen as a PROGRESS PO, po's flagged as Progress po's will be excluded from the matching screen.

    4.Ensure the PO has a receipt dollar value, you can check this by looking at the purchase order receiving register.

    Top

  39. How do Supplier Rebates work?
    Please see attached documentation for information
    Document: Vendor Rebates.pdf

    Top

  40. What are AP Clearing and Exchange accounts used for in the currency master?
    See attached.
    Document: AP control accounts posting info.pdf

    Top

  41. What are the conditions to be able to modify Currency on a Supplier Master record?
    -There can be no open Purchase Orders
    -No unmatched AP Receipts
    -No unpaid invoices
    -All registers must be posted.

    Top

  42. What printer is recommended for printing from Streamline including Cheques?
    Officially Visual Streamline supports HP and Lexmark laser Ethernet/Network based printers. Having said that other laser printers generally will work with the Streamline software providing the printer is Ethernet/Network based and is supported on the Windows Server platform Streamline is installed onto. The printer must support the post script printer language to print cheques from the Streamline software.

    Top

  43. Is there a way to reverse a cancelled cheque in Streamline?
    No there is no way to reverse a cancelled cheque in Streamline.
    What you can do is enter an On Account Payment against the supplier's account. See button in the Payments program, bottom right side of screen called 'Payment On Account', give it a manual cheque number that is similar to the actual cheque number they cashed and should not have. This will then show as owing on the account and you can use it to offset future invoices you owe to them.


    Top

  44. Why is the AP Clearing Report out from the GL?
    Please see attachment for details.
    Document: Why is the AP clearing out from GL.pdf

    Top

  45. How do I create post dated cheques?
    There is no special processing to create post dated cheques.

    You would have to enter invoices dated in the future for each cheque you want to process a posted dated cheque for. Then in the payment screen enter a future payment date, tag the invoice for the payment and print the cheque and update it. Then do same for each one you need print.

    Before hand you should make sure that the future GL periods are setup and have the correct start and end dates. This is done in General Ledger > Master File > GL Periods.

    Top

  46. I need a report that shows what AP Invoices were posted in a period and what tax and other amounts were posted with the invoice.
    This will produce a report based the GL account postings.
    Run program General Ledger > Inquiry > GL Activity Report, and export to an excel spreadsheet for only the AP control account(s) and the tax account(s) used to post AP Taxes to and any other accounts the invoices may have posted to that you wish to include. Do this for each period required. I've attached an basic instruction document which assumes you know something about excel but will guide you some.
    Document: GL Activity Report Export to Excel.pdf

    Top

  47. I received a cheque for an outstanding credit in my accounts payable. What is the best way to clear this in the system, and what GL accounts should be used?
    In Cash Receipts you do a GL type transaction and offset to a clearing account. See attached.
    Then in AP enter an on account invoice and offset to same clearing account, which should zero it out.
    Document: AP Credit paid by Cheque.pdf

    Top

  48. How do I prepay a Vendor for goods that have not yet been received?
    There is a way to issue a cheque to a vendor when you have not yet been invoiced, or inventory has not yet been received. This is done through Accounts Payable > Payments... > A/P Payment Entry as follows:
    - click on the button located on the bottom called 'Payment on Acct';
    - a window will appear where you need to enter the relevant information;
    - enter the Branch and the supplier ID;
    - tab to the invoice field;
    - the system will auto-generate an invoice number (this can be over-written);
    - enter the Amount, then the cheque date, and once finished click on OK;
    - the system will automatically tag it and it will show up in Green since it is an unposted invoice;
    - print the cheque as usual;

    Top

  49. Why is the payment discount posting to a different branch?
    Check Business Rule AP16 (Org/Branch for payment discounts comes from matched P/O).

    Top

  50. In Accounts Payable > A/P Invoicing... > A/P Invoice Register, the Select button is disabled. Why?
    If BR AP12 (Get A/P Invoice approval from Group and Accounting Managers) is ON,
    and the invoice has the group manager approval set to true,

    Top

  51. In the Supplier Details, there is a field called 'Our Account No.'. Where does this appear?
    The Supplier field 'Our Account No.' appears in the following locations:
    - A/P Payment Cheque Stubs;
    - Supplier Listing Report (Report Type:Details and 'Include Codes and Options' checked)

    Top

  52. When entering a Purchase Order, I am getting stuck on the REQ # field, why?
    Check the User's warehouse code; it is likely invalid for that company.

    Try changing the warehouse code for the user who has the issue, to a valid warehouse, and get them to try it again.

    Top

  53. What are the items to review when AP is out from GL?
    Please review attachment.
    Document: Items to review when AP is out from GL.pdf

    Top

  54. How do I change the last cheque number?
    General Ledger > GL Master Files > Bank Accounts, use the modify button.
    Document: How to change Last Cheque Number.pdf

    Top

  55. I have an un-posted 3 way matched invoices but yet Select button is not enabled on the AP invoice register for me to post?
    Check if BR AP12 is set to true, if it is then you must get A/P Invoice Approval For Payment From Group Manager and Accounting Manager before the register can posted.

    Top

  56. Why am I receiving an error: 'Other Transactions Found' when I attempt to post a PPV adjustment?
    The message that you are receiving on the bottom left is legitimate. At one point we allowed PPV adjustments on everything and found that under certain circumstances it was resulting in an inaccurate cost.
    Logic has been added to prevent users from posting PPV adjustments of this kind.
    If you see the error that indicates that there are other transactions found, then it means that you need to manually do a cost adjustment as using the PPPV program will result in unpredictable results, and so it is now being prevented.
    You should be able to just click on the ACCEPT flag to clear it without posting the adjustment.

    Top

  57. How does the PPV adj processing screen work?
    Documentation attached.
    Document: PPV adjustment processing.pdf

    Top

  58. Why is the Generate by Formula option in AP Payments not enabled?
    The option will be greyed out if there is already a current printed cheque run that has not yet been posted.

    Top

  59. Why do I have records on AP clearing with zero balances, and how do I fix this?
    This happens when there is an un-cleared Other1 amt (landed cost udf1) on the PO, which will show if cost udf is marked as "reconcile". If the cost UDF is not marked as "reconcile" then iIt's invisible on the AP Clearing Audit appearing as if its all zeros. So to fix tis go to: Inventory Master Files > Landed Cost UDF's and place a check mark in the Reconciled field.
    Document: how to clear zero amts off AP clearing audit report.pdf

    Top

  60. I have an invoice and a credit sitting in my payments screen, how do I clear/offset these two together?
    You need to tag both the invioce and the credit in the payment screen. Then you need change the payment method of the cheque to Manual. The credit and the debit will offset each other, and therefore no cheque will print.

    Top

  61. What procedure can I follow when a vendor wants payment against the purchase order (various intervals), no invoice for goods sent yet. How do you tie these in later (when invoice does come in) and how to you relate the invoice and payments to the original purchase order?
    In the AP Payment Screen there is a On Account Payment button that you can you to create a payment that is not applied to any exiting invoice. The system will generated an invoice number or you can override it with your own, I'd suggest using the PO number here, with a prefix OA (On Account) and followed with - 01 or 02 etc for the number of pre-payments made. This will appear on the Supplier account as a reduction or credit and can be picked up on future cheques to reduce the payment, in effect paying invoices or parts of them off. So when the invoice does come in, it should be processed as it normally would and matched the to PO. Then when paid it should be reduced by picking up the on account payments already paid to the supply and only what remains as owed to the supplier will be paid on that cheque.

    Top

  62. Attached is a spreadsheet outlining a process for paying a US invoice by Visa.
    See attached document
    Document: Flow of US vendor Transactions.xlsx

    Top

  63. CPA form example.
    See attached.
    Document: 2) Cheque Form example.pdf

    Top

  64. What conditions apply to an Inactive Vendor?
    If you mark the vendor as INACTIVE, the following applies:

    You cannot create a new purchase order for the vendor
    You can still receive an existing po
    You can still enter an AP invoice
    You can still pay the vendor

    Top

  65. What is the process for 2 Way matching?
    Here is the basic process for 2 way suppliers:
    - Setup the supplier as with a 2 way match method in the Supplier Master.
    - Setup an Inventory Item with a misc stock type for the item to be purchased.
    - Enter a PO for the supplier with the misc item and then print the PO and send to the Supplier. You do not need to receive these 2 way PO's.
    - When you enter the AP invoice you just match to the 2 way PO and then post it to the appropriate GL account. The PO will then close.

    Top

  66. How do I use AP Payment muli user mode?
    [Telma Rocha Nov 24 2015 14:09:21]
    Accounts Payable > Payments... (Multi-User Capabilities)
    Visual Streamline now supports multi-user A/P Payments processing.
    New radio buttons have been added to the A/P tab in Control File Maintenance to allow users to switch between single-user and multi-user mode. Note - you cannot make this change yourself and so I will need turn it on for you when you are ready.

    Prior to turning on this flag you need to ensure that there are no payment tagged, all cheques are printed and the payment register has been updated before changing ap payment mode.

    Once the AP payment mode has been changed from Single (existing functionality) to Multi (new functionality) then the AP payment entry screen will look like the multi User Cash Receipt screen, where multiple users can tag AP invoices for payments at the same time under their own batch. You can have multiple batches open simultaneously. If you are already using the multi user cash receipt program then this will be familiar to you.

    Top

  67. Why is there a blank register showing in AP Invoice Registers?
    This will happen if there is any invoices entered that can't post, for example if there are umatched, or if there are partially entered invoices with just a header record or zero amount in details. If you use excel on table ap_invoices to extract any with the reigstrer number you can find them.

    Top



Accounts Receivable

  1. I ran the Sales Rep Code Change program, but my history did not update. Why?
    When you change a Sales Rep code using Accounts Receivable > Change Master File Codes > Sales Rep Code Change, it asks you for an effective date, and will change all history from that date to present based on the Customer and Ship To IDs requested. You also need to rebuild your sales analysis afterwards for S/A Reports to pick up the change.

    Top

  2. How do I process an NSF Cheque?
    Begin a cash receipt for the customer. For the Cheque Number, prefix the actual cheque number with the letters NSF. This will help the user in referencing the information. Enter the amount of the cheque as a negative. This will reinstate the amount owing on the customer's account. In the reference field, enter the letters NSF. You can also add any user defined reference to this. Apply the payment as a negative amount. Update as you normally would.

    Top

  3. Why can I not change the Sales Rep in the Customer Master File?
    In addition to the rights to modify customer records, users must also have the right ASRCCS (Allow Sales Rep Change in Customer and Ship to) in order to be able to change the Sales Rep code in the Customer Master File.

    Top

  4. Why is there an invoice number missing from the numerical sequence?
    An invoice number missing from the numerical sequence is normally the result of a user cancelling a customer invoice. You can check this by running the Cancelled Invoice Report, located on the Accounts Receivable -> Reports and Inquiries Menu. This report audits all invoices that have been cancelled and provides information such as the user who performed the cancellation, the invoice number, date, time and reason code selected.

    Top

  5. How do I issue a cheque to a customer for a credit balance on their account?
    On occasion a customer will request a cheque for a credit amount outstanding on their account rather than applying the credit to a future purchase.
    The first step is to process a cash receipt for the customer. This must be done as an N/A transaction so as not to affect the bank. Enter the amount in the adjustment column and then enter the G/L number you want the adjustment amount to go to. Generally, most customers use an A/R clearing account. This will remove the credit from the customers account.

    Top

  6. How do I process a cash receipt for a cheque we've received that is not from a customer - such as a rebate cheque?
    Using the Cash Receipts program is the best way to process these types of cheques.
    If you are using 'Single User Cash Receipts' - Go into the Cash Receipts program but instead of choosing a customer click on 'Cancel'. This will take you to the last cash receipt processed in the file. Next, select the button 'Create G/L'. The system will default G/L as the customer code.
    For those sites using 'Multi-User Cash Receipts', simply enter G/L as the customer code. Enter your cheque number and the amount. When you get to the G/L distribution screen, the system will automatically debit the bank G/L and you just need to define the offsetting entry. Make sure to enter a memo so that you have a record of where the cheque came from. The transaction will update along with any other cash receipts processed on the Cash Receipts Register. You can review these transactions at any time by going to Accounts Receivable -> Cash Receipts -> Deposits Direct to G/L.

    Top

  7. What does the button called 'AutoCheck' do in the Authorize Release Credit Hold Program?
    For sites that process a large number of cash receipts each day, the 'Auto-Check' button can be a very useful tool as it will re-evaluate Credit Holds and Past Due Holds for orders that were entered and put on hold prior to cash receipts being completed.
    When the Auto-Check button is selected, the system rechecks orders on "Credit Hold" and looks at the customer's current A/R balance + the customer's open orders. If the total is less than the customer's credit limit, it will tag the corresponding customer orders for release.
    For all on hold orders of type "Past Due", it re-checks the number of past due invoices for the customer (not including invoices flagged as 'in dispute') and if the number is 0, it tags the corresponding customer orders for release. After the above checks are completed, the user can review the list of orders the system has automatically tagged for release, manually tag or un-tag additional orders, then click on the Release button to release the held orders.
    This program however only works if no other hold conditions exist. For example, if there is both a CR and PD hold, and PD hold no longer applies, it will not look at this order.

    Top

  8. I have a customer that does not want to receive statements because they always pay by invoice. Can we NOT print a statement for them?
    In the 'Print Statements' field, select the option for 'No Statement'.

    Top

  9. How do I use customer credits to offset against their outstanding invoices in A/R?
    On occasion a customer will request that you use a credit they have been issued against an outstanding invoice or charge on their account. You may also need to perform this process to clean up customer's accounts.
    The first step is to process a cash receipt for the customer. This must be done as an N/A transaction so as not to affect the bank. Enter N/A as the Cheque #. This allows you to bypass the amount field and move to the details portion of the screen.
    Select the credit you wish to apply against an invoice. Enter the amount in the adjustment column, including the negative sign. Enter the G/L number you want the adjustment amount to go to. Generally, most customers use an A/R clearing account. If the amounts are of equal value, then they will clear eachother and there is no posting to the GL acct anyway. This will just remove the credit from the customer's account.
    Next, select the invoice you are applying the credit against. Again, enter the amount in the adjustment column. Select the same G/L number that you used for credit amount. These 2 amounts offset each other, removing both from the 'sub-ledger'. Enter a memo if required, and then proceed with the update as normal. Another helpful hint - when entering the amounts, ensure the credit is entered as a negative, and ensure invoice is entered as a positive. Otherwise you will reverse the entry causing the balance to be re-applied back onto the acct. It is a good idea to use the GL Dist button to confirm that the posting is zero.

    Top

  10. I am trying to update the Sales Order Invoice Register but I am getting a message that there is a problem with invalid G/L account?
    If you receive a message regarding invalid control accounts, the system will display a table to allow you to view which order is causing the problem. The most common reasons why this message is displayed are:
    - The order has a 'Misc' stock type item and the user has not entered a valid offsetting G/L account. This can be corrected by cancelling the invoice and backing the order up to the 'Open' stage. Assign the G/L account and then proceed to invoicing.
    - The 'Ship To' code on the sales order is for a province or state code that does not have valid G/L accounts assigned for the taxes. Review the Province and State Code Master File to ensure all tax rates have their corresponding G/L accounts assigned.
    - One or more of the items on the sales order has an invalid G/L account assigned in the Product Line. Review the Product Line Master File to ensure the G/L accounts have been assigned correctly and are valid.
    If after reviewing these areas, the register continues to give an invalid account message, please contact support.
    - there is a GL account listed in the province table that does not exist in the Org/branch for which you are posting the order to. Check the GL > Org/Branch setup to ensure the GL accounts exists in each branch.
    ***The above errors are all procedural and can be corrected following the steps above***
    -If the order listed in the error however is a drop ship order, then the posting is likely missing the AP clearing entry and this needs to be corrected by Tecys staff, if this is a DS type order, please let support know. Otherwise assistance to correct the other errors/reason is billable if required.

    Top

  11. I have a customer with 30 day terms. They have invoices that have not been paid for over 30 days but they are not going on past due hold. Why?
    One possible reason that the customer's orders are not going on past due hold is that the 'Credit Checking' flag is not enabled in the Customer Master File. This flag must be enabled for any credit checking to be performed for the customer in question. Normally, this flag should be checked unless you NEVER want the customer to go on credit or past due hold.
    Another possible reason is that there is no Past Due code defined for the customer in the Customer Master File. A past due code must be entered on customers details for the credit checking program to work for past due at all. This means that if a customer is set up for 30 day terms, and you don't want them to go past 30 days, a past due code of 1 day must be set up and assigned to the customer. Otherwise they will not go on past due hold if they exceed their terms.
    A third reason is that the system looks at the terms at invoicing time, which comes from the sales order. So check the orders to see what the terms were at the time of invoicing. This can be seen in the order entry screen under Options button.

    Top

  12. Is there a way to ensure that a Past Due Hold code is entered against all customers?
    Yes you can make the Past Due Code a mandatory field in the Customer Master Files detail screen. To do this, go to Accounts Receivable -> Master Files -> Customer Master File. While on the Customer Browse screen, press Shift and F12 at the same time. This opens a new window called 'Maintain Field Level Defaults'. Here you can tick the 'Mandatory' checkbox and also set a default value for the field.

    Top

  13. Why am I not able to tag orders to be released in the 'Authorize/Release Held Orders program?
    Users must have right RTAOC (Right to Allow Over Credit) to be able to tag orders to release them from credit.

    Top

  14. I have a customer that has paid some invoices however the Average Payment Days field in the Customer Statistics screen has not been calculated. Why?
    In order to be considered in the calculation for Average Payment Days, the invoices must be fully paid. The calculation for Average Payment Days is:
    (Invoice fully paid date - Invoice Date) / Number of Invoices

    The system looks at all the invoices that were both entered and fully paid within the past year from the current date.
    It calculates for each invoice the number of days to pay as the difference between the invoice date and the 'fully paid' date.
    It adds these figures up for all invoices and then divides by the number of invoices.
    It doesn't take into consideration partial payments or proportions, just the date the invoice was marked 'fully paid'. So if you have an invoice for $1000.00 with a date of January 1 and you pay $999.99 on January 31 but don't pay the final $0.01 until December 31 the number of days for that invoice is 364.

    Top

  15. In the Customer Master File > Stats, what are Hits and Misses?
    A 'Hit' refers to an order where all items were shipped. A 'Miss' indicates that there was a back order. Hits and Misses and the ratio are displayed by order and by line item.

    Top

  16. Is there a way to update the field 'Accept Backorders' for all customer automatically?
    Yes you can do this through Installation > Populate Master Files > Customer Master.

    Top

  17. Can a deposit slip be reprinted?
    Yes - Go to Deposit Slip Printing - select 'Tag to Print'. This displays a list of the Cash Receipt Transactions. Tag the items you wish to include on the deposit slip and then print.

    Top

  18. Can I add an interest charge to A/R statements for past due invoices?
    Please see attached document for details.
    Document: Interest Charge Program.pdf

    Top

  19. I am seeing a 'C' next to my margins on the 'Product Code Summary' report when I review my Sales Order Invoicing Register. What does the 'C' represent?
    The 'C' indicates that there is a contract. Contracts can be viewed in: Pricing > Contract Pricing.

    Top

  20. I have changed a sales rep code in the master file, but when I run the sales analysis reports, it still pulling data for my customer under the old rep. Why?
    Changing a sales rep code in the Customer Master File does not update the history. It only affects new sales from that point forward. If you want the history to also reflect the new sales rep code, then you need to use the program located under: Accounts Receivable > Change Master File Codes > Sales Rep Code Changes. Once you have run this program, you need to rebuild the Sales Analysis for the history to be updated.

    Top

  21. I have changed a Terms Code on my customer, but the invoices are still printing with the old Terms Code?
    There is a flag on the sales order in the 'Options' button for Terms Code as well. All orders that were entered prior to the change being made will still reflect the old terms code.

    Top

  22. Do Credit Memos done as either 'Return to Stock' or 'Price Adjustments' flow through to the commission payable?
    Yes - Both types of credit notes flow through to the commission payable as a negative amount to reduce the amount of the commission owed.

    Top

  23. How do I pre-bill a customer for an order that is not yet shipped/invoiced?
    First step is to do a manual A/R invoice through: Accounts Receivable > A/R Invoicing > Invoice/Adjustment Entry. This invoice will be entered for x% of the invoice amount for which they are to be billed. Use the Notes section to enter all the pertinent information that the customer needs to see. You can print this manual A/R invoice, and send it to your customer. Then when the inventory does arrive, process the stock receipt as usual, and process your sales order as usual, but do not send the new invoice to the customer since they have already been billed for x% of it through the manual invoice. You might want to add an order note so that you remember not to send this invoice.
    Enter another manual A/R invoice for the balance, and send them the manual A/R invoice in lieu of the regular invoice that the system will generate through the sales order processing module. Then when the cheque arrives, you can apply the payment against the two manual invoices that the customer received. You will then need to enter an on acct credit note for the full amount to offset the invoice that was generated through the sales order processing module. You will offset this in the cash receipts program, by clicking on both the credit, and invoice, and using the same G/L account. The net affect will be zero.

    Top

  24. I need the ability to have Built-in contact management and customer notes.
    See attachment for details on this.
    Document: AR contact info.pdf

    Top

  25. In Accounts Receivable > A/R Master Files > Customers (Statistics) - what currency is this in?
    The currency is the one set up in the A/R master file.

    Top

  26. How does the Customer Reserved stock button in my customer master file work?
    The customer reserved stock feature is used to set aside inventory for a specific customer. You can enter the item and amount that you are reserving, against the customer's account. The system will take this reserved stock into consideration when you are entering in a new order into the system. If will affect the total available calculation in order entry only. Therefore if the reserved stock is all that is left, new orders for other customers will be back ordered. There is a button located in the product code lookup screen that will be visible if there are reserved quantities on an item that you are parked on. The reserved quantities on the product lookup screen will NOT reduce the total available qty, but you are able to click on the button to see for whom you have reserved stock. Furthermore once the reserved stock has been shipped to a customer, you must manually adjust the reserve quantity in the master file.
    Document: Customer Reserved Stock.pdf

    Top

  27. How do I delete a previously entered cash receipt?
    This process is for single user cash receipts. Provided a cash receipt has not been updated, you can delete it in the following way:
    Go into the Enter Cash Receipts screen.
    If you choose Cancel instead of choosing a customer then the system will take you to the last receipt in the file that was entered. If this is the record you need you can use the delete button to remove the receipt record. However, if the cash receipt was entered earlier in the batch then you need to move to that record. At the top of the screen on the toolbar there is an icon that looks like a piece of paper with an arrow pointing up This is called Previous Row and you can click on it to move to previous entries. Once you have located the appropriate receipt the delete button can be used for that entry.

    Top

  28. What are the different types of holds, and how can they be released?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Available Holds and how they work.pdf

    Top

  29. I am not able to see the G/L Distribution in the A/R Invoices screen. Why?
    Users are required to have user right RTVSOIGLD (Right To View Sales Order Invoice G/L Distributions) in order to be able to access this area.

    Top

  30. I have received a cheque from a customer that is also a supplier, and they included the vendor credit on the cheque. How do I process this?

    Top

  31. We noticed while doing a query that there is field name 'known_as' in the Customers file. What is this for?
    Some sites deal with 'Numbered Companies'. On the first line of the Customer Name they enter the numbered company name such as 12345678 Ontario Ltd. Then on the second line which is the field 'known_as' they enter the name that the company goes by.

    Top

  32. At the time of shipping or invoicing - is there a way to add a comment that will print on the Customers invoice?
    You can add a comment at the time of shipment / invoicing in the Shipment Confirmation Screen. Just above the exit button there is a file folder. This opens a new screen that provides an area to enter a comment that will print on the customer invoice.

    Top

  33. I have user right RTMSR - Right to modify sales rep, but I am still not able to modify the sales rep in the sales rep master. Why?
    User right RMT - Right to modify tables is also required.

    Top

  34. What is 'Unapplied Cash' in the A/R Aging screen?
    The Unapplied Cash field is displayed based on Multi-Branch Business Rule MB3 (Branch cash deposit system active).
    If BR MB3 is OFF : It displays the total balance of on account type debit entries.
    If BR MB3 is ON : In multi user cash receipt mode, it displays the total of unposted entries.

    Top

  35. How do I process a Cash Receipt Deposit?
    Go to Accounts Receivable > Cash Receipts > Cash Receipts Entry
    For Single User Process:
    Select the customer # that you want to do the deposit for and then click Select
    This will take you to a new screen which is the start of the cash receipt deposit.
    Enter the cheque #, tab to the amount field, and enter the amount of the cheque, and then tab past all the header fields until you get to the detail. Once you are at the detail, find the invoice that the customer is paying, and tag it by clicking on the button located at the bottom of the screen 'tag invoice'
    The system will keep track of how you have applied compared to the cheque amount, and it will not allow you to exit until the cheque is in balance.
    Once finished - click on G/L Distribution to see the GL entries.
    Click Exit

    Top

  36. What does the Accounts Receivable > Change Master File Codes > Transfer ShipTo Location program do?
    It simply allows you to move the ship to from one customer master file record to the other so that you don’t have to delete it and the re-enter it under the code you want.
    This program allows a user to 'move' a Ship to Code from one Customer Code to another.
    This program does not impact open orders or history in any way.
    The user enters From Customer and ShipTo code to move and enters the New customer for the ShipTo code.
    The system ensures that both customers exist, that the shipto code is valid and that the new customer does not already have a shipto with the same code (except in the case of transferring a shipto back to a previous customer).
    The system will copy the ShipTo code to the new customer and marks the ShipTo code as transferred for the original customer (it does not delete the record as existing sales orders etc will reference this shipto code). However it is no longer visible in the customer master file for the ‘old’ customer. It also moves all contacts, affiliations, industry links and dispensers from the old customer/shipto to the new customer.

    Top

  37. There is a field in the A/R statements for 'payments'. There is payment history on file, and yet this field is not calculating the payment information. Why?
    The payment information field is only for partial payments received. Once a payment is received in full it moves to history and it is cleared off the statements.

    Top

  38. I have invoices that I need to write off as bad debt - how do I do this?
    Go to Accounts Receivable > Cash Receipts > Cash Receipts Entry.
    Select the customer that you want to write off as bad debt (do this like you were creating a regular cash receipt entry)
    When you get the detail screen, enter N/A in the cheque number field, and this will bypass the amount field. Since you are not actually depositing anything into the bank, you don’t have an amount to enter. Using the N/A will allow you to do this.
    Then find the invoice and enter the amount in the adjustment column and then tab over to the GL and enter the bad debt expense.
    That’s it! System will automatically credit A/R and debit the Bad debt expense GL that you entered.

    Top

  39. There is a flag in the customer master called "Summary Invoice by Cust G/L". What does this do?
    See attached for explanation.
    Document: Customer GL Summary Reporting- How it Works.pdf

    Top

  40. Sales Order Processing > Processing > Customer Service Inquiry > Statistics button shows Average Pmt Days. Is this kept in a file or built on the fly?
    Average Pmt Days = Payment Days/No. Of Invoices
    where the no. of invoices is the total no. of invoices from the previous year where the invoice
    fully paid date is lesser than or equal to the current date (arih_fullypaid_date <= current date)
    and the payment days is the total no. of payment days retrieved from the difference of the
    fully paid date - the invoice date (payment days + arih_fullypaid_date - arih_invoice_date).

    Top

  41. What controls the printing of the Terms Discount Line on the Customer Statements?
    This is controlled by the following criteria:
    If the invoice discount % > zero and the invoice discount date is not empty, and if either the checkbox 'hide expired discount' is unchecked OR 'As of date' is less than the invoice date then the discount line is printed, otherwise its not printed.

    Top

  42. Can statements be printed for customers who have no outstanding balance on the acct?
    Statements can only be printed for customers who have an outstanding balance. The customer code does not even come up in the list of customers to tag if there is no balance.

    Top

  43. What is the user right needed to be able to modify the ozone Depletion cards?
    User right RTMC (Right to Modify Customer) is required.

    Top

  44. Can you explain the use of the 'Ship Complete' flag in the AR master file?
    The ship complete flag prevents users from printing a pick slip which is the controlling document that is needed before you can confirm the order through invoice prep. However an order that is flagged as ship complete, can still be partially invoiced/confirmed through the shipment confirmation screen. Whether or not the back order is created is based on the flag ‘Accept Backorders’

    Top

  45. What are the Customer Status types that do not allow an order to be entered?
    The following are the status and the behaviour associated with each:
    Propect - BR SO88 (Allow prospect customers in order entry) must be ON for use in order entry
    Inactive - warning message is displayed on order entry but order can still be created.

    Top

  46. In the Customer Master File there is a field called 'Barcodes on controlling document' If turned on, what barcodes are printed?
    When the flag is turned on, system will print a barcode on the controlling document ( pick slip) for the order number, date, and product code fields. More details are below:
    Order number + Revision number
    Cusomter PO + Release padded to 4 numbers, if blank is 0000
    Stock Cdoe is the Customer Part Number
    Shipped qty is the quantity shipped based on the selling UOM on the line, and the UOM is not shown in any barcode.

    Top

  47. How does the button in the A/R master file Auto - Calc credit limits work?
    There is a program: Accounts Receivable -> Credit and Collections -> Calculate Credit Limits
    You enter in parameters that calculate the new credit limits for customers who have credit checking turned on and also have the recalc flag. The basis for the figures will depend on the value of BR AR9 (Base for Credit Limit calculation). There is some information on the screen of the program that describes how the calculations are performed.
    Document: Auto Calculate Credit Limits.pdf

    Top

  48. What does the button in the A/R Customer master file ' On Hold' flag do?
    The conditions are as follows:
    The ON HOLD flag in Customer master prevents orders from being entered into the system.
    Prevents you from confirming an order.
    However once it's been confirmed, you can invoice still, since confirmed usually means the shipment is gone.
    You can still call up an existing order and add to it.
    You can still enter a quote also, but can't turn quote to order.

    Top

  49. When you use Change Customer Codes does it also move the customer parts entered?
    Yes it will bring the customer parts to the new customer code.

    Top

  50. Why is my aging on my credit showing XXX days old, when it was just done today?
    Credits will age based on the original invoicing date of the linked invoice that you are crediting. It does this so that the credit is reflected for aging purposes, back to the same aging range as the original invoice. Check to see what the original aging is on the invoice and you will likely find it is XX days old as well. If the credit is not linked to an invoice, then it will age based on the date of the credit invoice itself. The credit will still post to the period when it was actually credited and dated.

    Top

  51. How does Consolidated Invoicing work?
    Please see attached for documentation.
    Document: How does Consolidated Invoicing work.pdf

    Top

  52. I need to change the currency on a customer, can I do this?
    The system checks for any open sales orders, and un-posted invoices. Additional checks have been added to the customer master maintenance routine to test for unpaid A/R invoices and unposted A/R entries. The error message that is displayed has been changed to display 1 of 4 different messages, based on the reason. The reasons are evaluated in the following order, and only the first applicable message is displayed:
    Open Sales Orders are found
    Unposted Sales Invoices are found
    Unpaid A/R invoices are found
    Unposted A/R invoices are found (typically would be a manual A/R invoice)

    Top

  53. How does the Task Scheduler work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Task Scheduler.pdf

    Top

  54. What user right controls the 'Invoice' button in the Shipment Confirmation screen?
    User right RTSOINV (Right to S/O Invoicing) controls the Invoice Button. Users without this right will not have access to the Invoice button through shipment confirmation. However, if a user has RTSINVPREP (Right to Shipping Invoice Prep) then they have access to the invoice button on that screen, when an order is in stage 2 only, and can’t invoice it unless the order has been confirmed (packing slip printed).

    Top

  55. Is there a way to create A/R Interest Invoices for overdue balances?
    There is an optional business rule for this that can be purchased.
    Document: AR Charge interest - Release.pdf

    Top

  56. Why is my Cash Discount amount not posting to the main branch when 'Post by Branch' flag in the currency is Off?
    Post by Branch flag in the Cash Discount field only works if the Warehouse field in the Customer Master is blank, otherwise it uses that branch for posting the Cash Discount if one is entered.
    If the Warehouse field in the Customer Master is ON, and Post by Branch flag in Currency is ON, then system will post the Cash Discount by Branch for the Default Users Warehouse. If the Warehouse field in the Customer Master is OFF, then it uses 00000 main branch for posting cash discount.
    Reference SID 23092

    Top

  57. How do I extract sales for First Nations' customers that bought goods off-reserve in Ontario that may have met requirements for the First Nations' POS Rebate of PST portion of HST?
    In the Customer Alternate Ship To program there is a User-Defined Fields button that launches a program for assigning values to user-defined fields. Within this program is a Maintain User Codes button to allow users to maintain the user-defined fields. We suggest creating a New user-defined code for First Nations Ontario, Off-Reserve Shipments (say, FNONOR). Once this has been created, the code value can be set to 'Yes' or 'Y' for all First Nations' Ship To addresses for which this is applicable.

    Top

  58. Why are some records in the A/R Interest charge screen bold while others are not?
    If a previous charge exists, then the record is bold.

    Top

  59. Are Terms Discounts based on Net or Gross?
    It is controlled by a field in the AR Master File > Customer > Modify. The field is called Discount on Net. If the flag is ON, then it calculates the discount on the net, otherwise if it's OFF calculates it on the gross amount.

    Top

  60. Is there is a way to clear the last run Calculation Date in the Interest Calculation Program:
    The date of the last interest calculation is stored on each invoice.
    So that would not be possible.

    Top

  61. Is there a process to deal with Trade In's towards the purchase of a new product?
    Set up a new part for the item that is being brought in.
    Use the trade-in value as the cost when setting up and use a misc vendor.
    Make sure you create a customer account for the person you are transacting with. This is important in order to use the Service Work Order/Service Inquiry functions to set up preventive maintenance on the new equipment purchased if necessary.
    Issue a credit on-account for the used product brought in.
    Issue an invoice for the full value of the new product sold (i.e. do not include the trade-in value).
    Collect payment for the net value of the invoice less the credit.
    Have accounting apply the payment collected and the credit issued against the value of the invoice.

    Top

  62. In the Customer Master Screen, what does the field Customer PO Line # in O/E do?
    When flagged in the Customer Master, and you enter an order for the customer, upon entering a product line, system will prompt you to enter a PO for each Line Item entered. The system will automatically write out the PO line to the comments at the end of the line item.

    Top

  63. What is the purpose of the fields labeled Ann Int Rate/Days in the customer master file?
    The fields are used in the AR Interest Program when custom BR is activated to create and charge Interest Invoices. Otherwise they are not visible. These are meant to override the Default Annual Interest Rate and Default Days in the Company Info.
    If either of the values are 0 in the customer master file, then the value from the company info will be used.
    The number of days field is the number of days from the invoice before interest will be charged.
    Once past that grace period, interest will be calculated against the overdue amount at the annual rate divided by 12.
    The terms code is only used to determine the overdue amount.
    For example:
    an invoice due in 30 days, will not be charged late interest until 60 days;
    An invoice due in 90 days, will have late interest calculated in 60 days but the overdue amount will be 0, resulting in late interest of zero.
    So in order to have late interest actually kick in based on the terms code, we should probably set the number of days to 1 (setting it to zero will take the default value in the company file).

    Top

  64. What are the conditions for an invoice to appear on the Tax report, when the OTHER GST AND SALES TAX Flag is on?
    Both GST and PST amounts found on the AR invoice
    must be non zero, and sales tax should not be calculated on top of GST

    Top

  65. Voucher Processing Overview Document.
    Please see attached document.
    Document: White Paper for Voucher Processing.pdf

    Top

  66. AR > Change Master File Codes > Transfer Ship to Records
    This program was not intended to move history. It will transfer the ship to from one customer to another, but it leaves the old code alone and tags it as 'transferred'. this removes it from the lookups, which will make it invisible to the original customer, but it maintains the integrity since the history is still attached to the original customer. Rebuilding Sales Analysis will NOT move over the history and this is in the intention.

    Top

  67. What limitations/controls exist for Inactive Customers?
    You are able to place a customer that has open orders and AR balances inactive.
    A warning message will come to notify you as such.
    You are able to enter an order still for an inactive customer, although there is a warning message advising you it's inactive if you have BR SO63 (Suppress warning in order entry if customer is inactive) enabled. Otherwise no warning is displayed.
    You are still able to ship and invoice an order for an inactive customer.

    Top

  68. What does the the disputed flag do if an invoice is tagged in the AR Aging details screen?
    Go to A/R > Master Files > Customers. Click on the appropriate customer and then click on the A/R AGING button on the bottom of the screen. F5 in the A/Rs Total field to display the Customer Aging Details. If a customer disputes a particular invoice, the user may flag the invoice as disputed on this screen. Then, when a new order is entered, the system will exclude the disputed invoice amount at the time of calculating the credit check/past due amounts. The user may tag/untag an invoice as disputed by using the same DISPUTED button.

    For example, if a customer's credit limit were $1000. They owed $1330.00. If a $575.00 invoice was tagged as disputed and a new order was entered with a value of $465.00, which exceeds the $1000 credit limit ($575.00 invoice is disputed and isn't included in total A/R owed), the system will display the message stating 'Customer has exceeded their credit limit. Order will be held for credit processing'. Vice versa, if the new order that was entered as a value of $244.00, which is below the $1000 credit limit ($575.00 invoice is disputed and isn't included in total A/R owed), the order will not be put on credit hold as it won't exceed the limit.

    Top

  69. If the Industry Code on a "ship to" is modified, does this change the history on sales reports?
    Once the sales analysis rebuild is done, the Sales analysis report by Industry Code is changed to reflect the NEW Industry Code

    Top

  70. AR> Credit and Collections > AR Aging Report > Overdue Accts. How do credits age?
    Example: I am running the Overdue accts only flag, and it shows that customer AAA owes 760.40, there is a credit for the same amt that is also 34 days old, and yet it's not being picked…why?

    When you run the report for 'overdue accounts only', each document is checked
    individually for the DUE DATE and compares that against the 'AS AT' date for the report. In this
    case, when you run the report AS AT August 8 (or 9, 10 etc.) the original invoice is overdue because
    its due date is August 4 but the credit memo is NOT overdue. The A/R invoice and A/R credit records
    are not linked directly; credit memos do link back to the order header and check for an original
    invoice number (which is evident in the A/R Aging Details screen) but not in the A/R aging
    report.
    While it is true that the credit was issued against the original invoice and therefore the amounts
    balance to zero, these are still 2 outstanding (unpaid) documents and when assessed by themselves
    the resulting content of the overdue receivables report is accurate.

    Top

  71. Turning on the flag 'Barcode on Control Document' in Customer Master caused the logo to no longer print on the Control Document. Why?
    The program for printing the Packing Slip with a bar code is dependent on having a logo setup against the Org and Branches. What you need to do is to setup the logo for each branch as this is how the system is setup to work. If your warehouse has a branch then the program grabs the branch logo which needs to be added in General Ledger > G/L Master Files... > Organizations And Branches (Logo > Logo for P/S with Barcode by Branch).

    Top

  72. How does End User processing work?
    Please see attachment for an overview.
    Document: How does End User Processing work.pdf

    Top

  73. What is included in the SALES column on the Invoice Status Report?
    The Invoice Status report, as well as the EM module, which balances back to the Invoice Status Report includes the manual AR invoices, and this includes credits done through AR Invoices also.

    Top

  74. How do I enter a Deposit onto a customer's account, such as prepayments?
    Use the Cash Receipts Programs to enter an on acct deposit, enter the cheque number and the amount of the deposit, and then tab past the header section. There is a button called "On Account/claim" use this option to create an on account deposit. The system will insert a new line into the details of the cash receipts screen, and it will require that you enter an invoice number to use for the transaction. The invoice number must being with the letter "O" for On Acct, C for Claims, and NSF for Returned cheques. Next proceed to enter the order number that this deposit pertains to and tab to the Payment field where the deposit amount gets entered. This creates a credit on the customer's account that can later be applied to offset an invoice.

    Top

  75. Our terms and conditions are a full page of legal jargon. Is there a process to send this information with Invoices?
    There is a way to enter a document through Company Setup > Fax Defaults (Terms Condition Doc button). If the first header line is not blank it will fax it with every Quote, Order or Invoice. It was supposed to also work with email and it would fax and email with very Quote Order or Invoice. It was a custom modification written for a site, and as such was written under specific circumstances. It was not written to pick up a saved document, and so you had to type the document into the screen.

    Top

  76. How does the feature "Bill To" located within the Customer Master File work?
    It allows you to redirect the invoice that was entered for the SOLD TO customer to a different AR customer.
    This is useful in a situation where there is an accounting office who pays other customers' bills.
    In the SOLD TO customer's acct you enter the BILL TO customer.
    Order is entered as the SOLD TO customer.
    When the order for the Sold to customer is invoiced, the invoice will hit the AR of the Bill To account, not the Sold to. The sales reside against the Sold To.

    Top

  77. I am not able to locate an Invoice number in the system?
    The first place to check for missing invoice numbers is in the Invoice Preparation screen to see if it has not yet been posted. If it's in a stage 3 or 4, it will be seen here.
    If the invoice can't be located in the Invoice Preparation screen, then check the AR Invoices to see if it has already been posted.
    If it's not in Invoice Preparation, and its not in the AR Invoices, then it must be cancelled. You can have a printed copy of an invoice that has moved to stage 4, and then if the posting and invoice are cancelled, it moves it back to stage 2, allowing the user to re-invoice it. This creates a new invoice number. Therefore the old printed copy of the invoice will no longer be valid in the system. This can be seen in the Cancelled Invoice report located in: Accounts Receivable > Reports and Inquiries.

    Top

  78. Is there a program that allows you to import values into the user defined fields in the A/R?
    There is a program located in: Company Setup ' Interface ' Import Ship-To Custom Fields.
    It enables you to only import for one customer at a time. And there are ten fields that could hold user-defined data but only the 1st one zooms to the customer UDF codes table.

    Top

  79. Is there a place to select an AR invoice "start" number when loading to a new company from another system?
    There is a way to change the control number, and it is done through: Company Setup > Last No control File. However this needs to be used with caution, and you need to be careful that it will not clobber existing invoices or further invoices as it is incremented in the future. If this happens, it will cause many issues throughout the software and will be billable to fix.
    You should be able to modify this yourself, as long as nobody else is logged into Streamline as it gets the seq. from last number control for each terminal.
    The system does not allow you to reduce control numbers but rather only increase them. Reducing the control numbers would be billable, and not advisable.

    Top

  80. How do credits affect orders going on credit hold?
    Credits will enable the customer to order more as it reduces the total AR amt. Example:
    Customer has credit limit for $100
    Credit exists for $100
    Order entered for qty of 2 @ 90.00 each total is $180 - order will go through since its below the available credit due to the credit.

    Top

  81. CDN Customer sent US cheque to pay his account. They short paid for exchange purposes. What is the best procedure to handle this?
    You will need to process the cash receipt through the system to remove the AR balance from the customer's acct. Enter the amt of the cheque, and then offset the difference to another acct such as exchange/gain loss.

    Example:
    Invoice in CDN $208.92 sitting in AR
    Cheque received from the customer is USD $200.00 (exchange of $8.92 was deducted from the cheque from customer)

    When you deposit the cheque into your CDN bank, the bank will credit you for 8.92 exchange amt to your account.

    So when you do the cash receipt, enter the cash receipt as $200 only, and then offset the 8.92 to an exchange acct, and the GL dist for the cash receipt should be:

    Accounts Receivable 208.92 credit
    Bank 200 debit
    Exchange gain/loss
    or another acct 8.92 debit

    Then when the bank processes the USD cheque they will add back the 8.92 difference. You will need to do a journal entry:

    Bank 8.92 debit
    Exchange gain/loss
    Or whatever acct was used above 8.92 credit.

    Top

  82. How is HST charged on Freight and MISC items, and misc charges.
    HST is charged on freight amount entered in the summary of the order regardless of the line items.
    HST is charged on Misc items, if the flags to charge tax are on.
    HST is also charged on misc amounts entered in the summary of the order automatically regardless of the line items.

    Top

  83. What is the process when one customer has paid for other customers' invoices?
    Example: Customer A has paid for customer B invoices. This was applied to Customer's A acct as an overpayment, and it is now sitting there as a credit. How do I use this credit to offset another customer's invoices?
    You need to process cash receipts for each customer as an N/A transaction. Enter N/A in the cheque number field and this will bypass the amount field. On customer A (the one with the credit) you will enter an adjustment as a negative, and offset to a GL acct. This will Debit the AR and Credit the offset GL. Then process a cash receipt for customer B (the one with the invoices outstanding) Enter an adjustment as a positive amount and enter the same offset GL account that was used earlier. This will Credit AR and debit the same offset GL account reversing the effects to it.

    Top

  84. If the customer master name and/or address are modified, what will reprinted invoices pick up?
    The Automatic invoices from Sales Order processing retain the history, and will always print based on what was in the customer master at the time of invoicing.

    So if the master file was modified, it would still print with the original information when you reprinted the invoice.

    However the manual AR invoices will always grab the most up to date info, and so if you reprinted a manual invoice today, it will pull the new name and address.

    Top

  85. Why am I not able to modify the MIsc flag in the AR Master File?
    There is a user right that is required to modify the MISC flag. It is RTMCMISCF (Right To Modify Cust Misc Flag).

    If you give yourself this right, then you will be able to make the changes.

    Top

  86. to be re-used

    Top

  87. Is there a way to populate a field in the cusotmer master for all customers?
    There is a program under the menu Installation > Populate Master Files > Customer Master, that is used to populate the customer master file during the initial installation. Only user with super user rights that will have access to this menu option.

    You want to be sure to only change the one field you want to set.

    To leave others as is, note info below:
    In the Flags section if you leave both True and False unchecked it will not update.
    In the Options if you leave them BLANK, then you do not need to check the DO NOT CHANGE field as nothing will update anyway. The only time it updates is when there is a value, so in other words it will not update a blank so it can't be used to wipe out an option.
    In the Table Validate Fields section leave the fields blank and the Blanks Only on, this way it will change nothing.
    In the bottom area leave the Do Not Update flag to on.

    You should run this when no one is processing, and pick a couple customers to check before and after to make sure only the information you wanted to change did change. If you are unsure, run it in your test company first to confirm it will work as you need it to.

    If you would prefer that we did this for you, the time would be billable at our current billing rates and would likely take an about an hour.

    Top

  88. How does the customer type discount work?
    See attachment
    Document: how does customer type discount work.pdf

    Top

  89. How do I change from Single user Cash Receipts to Mutli user?
    See attached.
    Document: Single vs Multi User Cash Receipts.pdf

    Top

  90. Why is my session hanging when I attempt to invoice orders through invoice preparation?
    One possible reason is that there might be documents stuck in the printer queue. Restarting the printer spooler will fix this issue, if that is the cause for the freezing when you attempt to invoice an order.

    Top

  91. A Cash Receipt was applied to wrong customer, how can I fix it?
    Here is a process that you can follow to correct this assuming the cash receipt register has been posted:

    Customer A was incorrect customer paid.
    Customer B was the correct customer.

    -Reinstate the invoice for customer A to put the balance back on the account.
    This will DR AR and the offset Cr you can put to some type of an AR adjustment account. Do this as an AR invoice on acct.

    -Then go to cash receipts, and do an adjustment (N/A cheque number to bypass amount field) for Customer B. Enter the amt to clear the balance as an adjustment and enter the same offsetting gl you used when you reinstated customer's A invoice. This will Credit the AR for customer B and DR the same acct to offset that entry. Be sure you click on the GL Dist button to confirm the posting is correct before you post it.

    Top

  92. Cash receipts posting should have been posted to DEC date but instead was posted to JAN date. How can we fix this?
    Once you post a register there is no way to have it automatically reverse it or change the posting date.
    One option would be to do a GL entry to reverse it in Jan and post it to Dec, however that will not fix the AR Aged listing for Dec 31,2013 and you would need to add a manual note for period end to it.
    Another option, if you really need to adjust the AR Aged listing you could do another cash receipt dated Dec, with an on account payment for the net amount affected for each customer, this will then cause the AR Aged list totals for each customer to reflect a payment at least as at DEC and also affect the GL. Then you would need to, pay those off with a GL adj Cash Receipt in Jan to reverse the affect and make sure you are affecting the same GL accounts.

    Top

  93. How does the Ship Via Account Numbers work
    It is controlled through Business Rule SO 134.
    Document: How does the Ship Via Accounts work.pdf

    Top

  94. How do I process a cash receipt for a US customer into my CDN bank? Or vice versa?
    You need to clear the invoice from the US AR as that is where it was issued from. What you can do to adjust the bank that the deposit is being made to is modify the GL distribution from within the Cash Receipts program by reversing the Debit to the US bank by adding a new line and crediting the same amount, and adding a new line to Debit the CDN bank for the CDN amount. Then you need to clear the exchange amts by entering new lines for the same exchange accounts to reverse them to balance the entry.
    This can all be done through the GL > Transaction Entry as a journal entry also.

    Top

  95. Why can I no longer view Credit Card Numbers when I have user right VCCN?
    Effective in versions 10.2.1.0000 and higher this user right no longer controls the display of the credit card numbers. Users with or without this user right will only see the last four digits of the credit card number. Note, users without the right may still enter credit card information in the payments screen from within the payment folder, and can select a different card from the pop-up (which also only displays the last four digits). However this user right is still required to create new and modify existing credit card numbers in the AR > Customer screen.
    Document: What does PCI Compliance entail.pdf

    Top

  96. Is there an overview of the New Customer Master Interface?
    See attached documentation.
    Document: New Customer Master Interface.pdf

    Top

  97. How do I clear existing customer part numbers?
    See attached documentation.
    Document: How to clear existing customer part numbers.pdf

    Top

  98. How to fix a future dated cash receipt done in error.
    See attached.
    Document: FAQ - Cash Receipt fix for furter dated payment done in error.pdf

    Top

  99. Why have my invoice numbers jumped by 1000 or almost 1000?
    This is usually found to have happen after an unexpected system shutdown and is by design as system will skip invoice numbers to avoid duplication. You can print the Accounts Receivable > Reports and Inquiries > Unused Invoice Numbers Report to find these.

    Top

  100. In AR > Master Files > Customer > What does the Priicing Overrides button do?
    If you setup a pricing override, it will override the percentage you enter on any pricing that is setup as by percentage. So, for example, if you have a price code setup as margin % then that margin % is overwritten with the discount % from the customer pricing override. It does not consider the price method being used. So you an only setup a pricing override if the pricing method used across the board for that customer is discount %.

    Top

  101. In Cash Receipt Entry, how do I navigate to Previous Row now in .net?
    The Previous / Next Row butons are now under: Edit > VCR in the .net environment.

    Top



Allpriser Integration

  1. As soon as an item is linked, the Alllpriser update changed our existing description. Is there an option that we can turn on/off?
    There is currently no flag that would disable this functionality.

    Top

  2. Allpriser (Allpri$er) Integration overview.
    Please see attached document.
    Document: White Paper for Allpriser Integration.pdf

    Top



ECommerce / Web Services

  1. I created a new product code, but I am not seeing it in E-Commerce? What is the criteria for new items to appear in E-Commerce?
    New Product Codes will appear on the web if these criteria are met:
    -status of the item must satisfy BR WEB19 (Default Product Status Filter);
    -stock type of the item must satisfy BR WEB20 (Default Product Stock Type Filter);
    -At least 1 description in the specified customer language is setup;
    -all applicable filters of product line, product group, sub category and/or sub group for the web user must be satisfied;

    Top

  2. What are the requirements for image sizes to properly appear on the web?
    Please see attached document for complete information.
    Document: Frequently Asked Questions - Web Images.pdf

    Top

  3. Where are the various email addresses stored for those emails originating from e-commerce?
    In summary:
    The Request a Login Account email is sent to the Sales Rep on the Catalogue User Customer if exists, if not it is sent to the Web Administrator Default in the Company Info file.
    The Additional Product Info Request email is sent to the appropriate Sales Rep on the ship-to if exists, if not, it is sent to the Customer Sales Rep. (previously, the CSR).
    The Web Submission Confirmation email is sent to the appropriate Web User, CSR, and Sales Rep on ship-to if exists, and if not, it is sent to the Customers Sales Rep.
    The Forgotten Password email is sent to the appropriate Web User.
    The Order Acknowledgment email is sent to the appropriate Web User.
    The Notice of Held Submission email is sent to the appropriate supervisor(s).
    The Notification of Product Reviews email is sent to the Product Review Notification Email identified in Company Info
    Document: E-Commerce Email Address setup.pdf

    Top

  4. I have customers placing order on the web, but the orders are not hitting streamline?
    Most likely the reason for this is that the synchronization has stopped. You can restart the SQL service agent yourself, by following the steps below:
    Right click on my computer
    Select Manage
    Open up the services and application node
    Click on services
    In the right hand pane, look for SQL Agent Service for STREAMLINE instance
    Right click
    Stop the service
    Wait about 30 seconds
    right click and START the service

    Top

  5. My customer is trying to access E-Commerce and getting a message 'The password has been reset due to invalid login attempts'. What do I do?
    The web login allows for 5 attempts for web users to login and if all 5 attempts fail (for security reasons), their password is scrambled, and you will need to reset this in Web User Accounts. After the password is reset, you can either opt to "force sync" the replication database so that the changes to the password are sent to the hosted environment, using the "Force Replication" shortcut on your desktop or wait for the next data sync to take place, (usually 15-20 minutes), before the user should try to log in.

    Note: Access to the "Force Replication" shortcut is only set up for sisl and admin users as only a user with admin access to the sql server can force replication.

    Top

  6. Is it possible to see a total On Hand qty in E-Commerce for designated warehouses instead of just the total for one warehouse?
    Yes - Web Default Controls > Display Settings for Products.
    There are various Database Columns called Available Qty Whs 1, 2, 3, ... and each has a folder icon beside them that allows you to link appropriate warehouse code(s).
    If the Quantity column is linked to ONE warehouse, then the user will only see the total on hand for that warehouse.
    All you need to do is link SOME or ALL warehouses and they will be combined in E-Commerce.

    Top

  7. Where do I change the default email address in Streamline when sending confirmation?
    The email address would be something that is supplied to us by your technical staff to configure for web services. The Web services SQL server account uses the setting and email address from the Outlook profile configured for the "sisl_sqlservr" domain account. An administrator could log onto your server as the sisl_sqlservr user and configure outlook to use a different reply-to address.

    Top

  8. What Lead Time field is displayed in E-Commerce?
    E-Commerce displays the Avg. Lead Time from the Product Master screen.

    Top

  9. The web user has entered a P/O number, yet E-Commerce keeps displaying the message 'P/O Number is Mandatory' when trying to submit an order. Why?
    This is an issue that was addressed in SID 23989, in April, 2012, in E-Commerce release 2.2.3.4.
    Releases prior to 2.2.3.4 may still encounter the problem described below.

    There is a Business Rule WEB7 (Select P/O from dropdown list of blanket purchase orders).
    If this BR is ON and 'Purchase Order Required' flag is ON for the customer linked to the web user, then there must be blanket purchase orders linked to the customer, otherwise, this message will appear even if a PO number is manually entered.
    In order to be able to manually enter PO numbers, BR WEB7 must be turned off, but then blanket purchase orders will not appear in a dropdown list.

    Top

  10. What is Global Shipto Functionality in E-Commerce?
    When E-Commerce was first developed, users were not required to specify the Shipto location until they were ready to place the order. So this was done from either the Shopping Cart or the Checkout page.

    As new modules were developed for E-Commerce (budgets, product lists, holding for future, reordering from history,...), it became apparent that shipto locations needed to be identified up front so that new and existing webpages could be filtered to only display information pertaining to the currently identified shipto address.
    So Global Shipto Functionality was initially developed and, for testing purposes, was only activated when one of these sub-modules was activated. Testing has been complete for some time and there is no longer any reason to tie this functionality exclusively to these sub-modules. So, it has now been activated regardless of sub-modules.

    The effects of this functionality are as follows:
    - shipto addresses can no longer be specified or selected in the Shopping Cart or at Checkout;
    - the webuser's default shipto address is automatically displayed on initial login to E-Commerce;
    - any shopping is assumed to belong to the currently displayed Shipto Address;
    - Shipto address can be changed at any time (provided web user has access to multiple shipto
    addresses) from any web page, provided the shopping cart is empty;

    Top

  11. Is it possible to have the website on a https://?
    Yes, it's possible. Site will have to purchase their security certificate or we can quote this for them. There are a number of options depending on the type of warranty and encryption level they are looking for.
    Once purchased we will install this on their web portal for secure data transmission. Installlation time is charged at currents rates and is estimated to take 1 to 4 hours time.

    Top

  12. When an order is placed through e-commerce, how long does it take for the notification email, and for the order to hit the queue?
    Emails go out once the data is available at the host site; so the web data, any new orders/quotes is synced back every 5 minutes and it's at this time an email would be sent out. Emails for e-commerce are sent by the Streamline Batch Service. If an order hits Streamline but no email is received, then there is a problem with the email set up at the sending or receiving side. It could also be that the spam filters are blocking this email address since chances are that a generic email address is used to send out web emails by the server.

    Top

  13. Why is the Process button sometimes greyed out in the Held Submissions page?
    If the Process button is not enabled (greyed out) it likely means that the user did not finish processing the previous held order.
    Users must finish processing the held submission or clear the shopping cart containing items from that held submission before they can attempt to process or delete the next one.

    Top

  14. What are E-Commerce Held Submissions and how do they work?
    Orders and quotes are typically submitted immediately from E-Commerce for processing in Visual Streamline. However, some customers and their web users may have different needs as follows:
    - they may wish to build an order over the month and submit at the beginning or end of each month;
    - they may wish to limit their orders to a monthly budget;
    - they may wish to limit their orders to items subject to contract pricing.
    - they may wish to limit their orders to specific product lists;
    Each of these options requires the ability, within E-Commerce, to hold submissions, either automatically or optionally, for processing at a later date. Depending on sub-modules purchased and web user credentials, orders or quotes may be automatically held if they create an over-budget condition, contain items that are not subject to contract pricing or contain items that are outside of product lists.

    For further details, see the attached document.
    Document: White Paper for E-Commerce Held Submissions.pdf

    Top

  15. Is there a document that shows typical E-Commerce Default Settings?
    Attached is a document showing typical E-Commerce Default Settings.
    Document: E-Commerce Default Settings.pdf

    Top

  16. Some web-users are not seeing any product images, but this works fine for other web users?
    As far as the thumbnails go, this should be standard HTML images. They can try refreshing the page to ensure they aren't holding onto old items in the browser cache.
    If they are unable to view the enlarged image, this is likely a javascript security issue on the users web browsers. Have them try adding the e-commerce site to their trusted sites list and see if the issue goes away (as a trusted site, it should lower the security restrictions on javascript code for the site).

    Top

  17. Is there an overview document for the E-Commerce Newsletters sub-module?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: White Paper for E-Commerce Newsletters module.pdf

    Top

  18. Is there an overview document for the E-Commerce Favourites Lists sub-module?
    Please see attached document.

    The functionality described in the document no longer applies on the following versions or higher:
    Visual Streamline Release 10.3.3.0000
    Document: White Paper for E-Commerce Favourites Lists module.pdf

    Top

  19. Is there an overview document for the E-Commerce Reporting sub-module?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: White Paper for E-Commerce Reporting module.pdf

    Top

  20. Is it possible to individually set the number items that appear on a page for each customer?
    The web user can set their own number, but this must be done every time they log in.
    The default number of items applies company wide.
    There is currently no way to set a different number of items for either customers or web users.

    Top

  21. How long does it take for an image to replicate and appear on E-commerce?
    Images are synchronized with the replication routine using the sisldata repllication; however due to performance considerations, these images are not reloaded to cache for all updates and queries made on the web. Images are only reloaded to cache once every 24 hours to minimize performance issues for the end users, or as per interval set in the admin page.

    If you add a new image, and you need to see it available on the web immediately, then do the following:
    1) Change the category image in Streamline.
    2) Clear all users cache in Streamline E-commerce > Web User Maint.
    3) Login as admin in E-commerce and clear image cache.
    4) Open webservices and refresh browser cache.

    It is also important to note that when you need to make changes to images that are already attached to products or categories in Streamline, that after you've changed the image file itself you need to delete and save and re-attache it and save in the Streamline product or category or it will not be piked up and replicated to E-commerce.

    Top

  22. In the web-categorization relationships; I'm trying to exclude an item; but I cannot click it?
    You can only exclude items for which you have included the ENTIRE product line on.
    It automatically flags items as excluded when you enter an item for an enter product line that is included. Otherwise the field is not modifiable.
    So what you need to do is just delete the item.

    Top

  23. What is the hierarchy for determining the warehouse against which availability will be calculated and orders will be placed?
    In Streamline E-Commerce, there is a hierarchy in determining the warehouse against which availability will be calculated and orders will be placed.
    The hierarchy is as follows:
    - the web user's default warehouse;
    - the web user's customer's default warehouse;
    - the product's default warehouse.

    Top

  24. What browser are supported for E-Commerce access?
    For all versions up to 2.2.5.1 We have only tested IE for E-Commerce and only support IE at this time for those versions.
    Many people have their favorite "anit-microsoft" 3rd party browser (firefox, safari, netscape,
    chrome, etc), but every version of Windows comes with IE, so all should have access to IE
    for e-commerce.

    Top

  25. What do the 2 resyn icons and 1 clear cache icon for web services data do?
    1. Force_WebServices_Synchronization - Shortcut
    - Can be used to initiate a replication immediately instead of waiting for the next automatic one to occur. This one is useful if you are making changes to data like products etc and want to see your results in e-commerce right away.

    2. Reinitialize_WebServices_Data - Shortcut
    - Completely erases the web data and rebuilds it - might take 2-4 hours to complete… ideal for large data changes like product code changes and sales analysis rebuilds on the Streamline side. Web site will not be accessible until all data is rebuild and should only be used when your replication has crashed; this will usually require Streamline support to delete the publication prior to using this. We will co-ordinate this with you. It should not be done while processing in Streamline as can cause locking.

    3. Clear Web Users Cache - Shortcut
    - Can be used when you make changes to setup areas stored in cache data tables. In order to optimize response times on E-Commerce web sites, web user specific data is stored in cached data tables, and these tables are automatically rebuilt nightly. This data includes: business rule settings, products, web user settings and/or filters. The icon allows you to clear the web user cache for all web users on demand

    Top

  26. What email account is used to send the emails?
    Is there any way to configure the SMTP server and account login / server information that the actual e-commerce software uses to send out its notification emails?

    There are 2 places where this needs to be configured. The first is the email profile of Outlook/Windows Live under the "sisl_sqlservr" account. Emails sent from the Streamline Batch Service are sent through Outlook/Windows Live as configured for the "sisl_sqlservr" account, so they will show as coming from whatever account has been setup in the email application.

    The second place is in Streamline Process Server. SQL DB Mail must also be updated (depending on what kind of email is being sent, it could come from either one). Emails sent through the SQL process are sent using the information specified in the SQL DB Mail setup.

    Top

  27. Is there an overview document for the E-Commerce Categorization sub-module?
    Please see attached document that was created with the following software versions:
    Visual Streamline Release 10.0.0.0020
    Streamline E-Commerce Build 2.2.4.1

    There is a newer version attached to another FAQ (Is there a 2015 overview document for the E-Commerce Categorization sub-module?).
    Document: White Paper for E-Commerce Categorization module.pdf

    Top

  28. Is there a 2015 overview document for the E-Commerce Categorization sub-module?
    Please see attached document that was created with the following software versions:
    Visual Streamline Release 10.1.1.0000
    Streamline E-Commerce Build 3.0.1.0.
    Document: White Paper for E-Commerce Categorization module-2015.pdf

    Top

  29. Is there an overview document for the Streamline E-Commerce (formerly WebServices) module?
    Please see attached document that was created with the following software versions:
    Visual Streamline Release 10.0.0.0020
    Streamline E-Commerce Build 2.2.4.1

    There is a newer version attached to another FAQ (Is there a 2017 overview document for the Streamline E-Commerce module?).

    Top

  30. Is there a 2017 overview document for the Streamline E-Commerce module?
    Please see attached document that was created with the following software versions:
    Visual Streamline Release 10.3.2.0000
    Document: White Paper for Streamline E-Commerce-2017.pdf

    Top

  31. I get an error message when I try to log into E commerce: Error is: Unable to cast object of type'System.DBNull ' to type 'System.String'. What does this mean?
    That error can occur for any missing required information on the user account.

    For Example: the customer name associated with the login is NULL, as well as the customer currency.

    Top

  32. How can we get the Product Publishing long description to display on the E-Commerce website in product details? I only see option to display short description. Is this possible?
    Yes, Product publishing "Long Description" will appear automatically if there is value stored in the field. This will appear just below the "add to cart" section and across the width of the page.

    Top

  33. What does the flashing orange triangle on the e-commerce screen mean?
    The flashing orange triangle with exclamation mark denotes that there are different pricing levels on this item whether it is customer contract price breaks or just general pricing rules i.e. if I buy 5 I pay $5 each, but if I buy 10 I get a discounted price of $4 each.

    Top

  34. The flashing orange triangle with exclamation mark denotes that there are different pricing levels on this item whether it is customer contract price breaks or just general pricing rules - Can this be turned OFF from displaysing?
    Yes, you can shut them off. From the E-Commerce Default Controls, go to the e-commerce screen drop down for Quantity Break Pricing and modify it. If you change the first line (UOM) to display 0, the rest of the items will blank out and that pop up will no longer appear.

    Top

  35. Check list for when products are missing from E-Commerce
    See attached check list for areas to check.
    Document: Check list for items missing from Ecommerce.pdf

    Top

  36. What are the system requirements to be able to enter credit card numbers in E commerce?
    The client must be a "credit card" or "Cash" account to enter a credit card and Moneris integration must be installed.

    Top

  37. Why is my Web quote not converting to an order automatically when I have business rule E commerce # 8 is turned ON?
    Check to see if the customer is on a manual hold, if so, the order is not created.

    Top

  38. Is there an overview document for the e-commerce Products LIsts sub-module?
    Please see attached document that was created with the following software versions:
    Visual Streamline Release 10.3.3.0000
    Document: White Paper for E-Commerce Product Lists module-2017.pdf

    Top

  39. Why am I receiving errors with Captcha when either 'Request a Login' or 'Forgot Password' feature is used in E commerce?
    Captcha Version 1 is no longer supported by Google. So, in e-commerce version 2018.3, modifications have been made to use reCaptcha V2. In earlier versions of e-commerce, captcha will need to be disabled. In order to enable reCaptcha in e-commerce version 2018.3 customers will need to do the following: - sign up for a Google account; - create a reCaptcha V2 public/private key pair, using the following link: Google reCaptcha Admin URL: https://www.google.com/recaptcha/admin#createsite - enter the key pair into the 2 new fields (Captcha Private Key and Captcha Public Key) in e-commerce for the Web Site options of the Site Administration page.

    Top

  40. How does E commerce submission inquiry screen work
    I did some additional testing and here is what I found: They can contain the same information in each tab.

    Quotes tab:
    -contains records entered as Quotes
    -this includes quotes not converted to orders
    -this also includes quotes converted to orders already and that is why you see an order number on some and not on others.

    Orders Tab:
    -contains records entered as orders
    -also includes quotes that are converted to orders.

    Top

  41. How To Get Google reCAPTCHA V2 API Keys?
    See attached documentation for information.
    Document: How To Get Google reCAPTCHA V2 API Keys.pdf

    Top

  42. How do I set the default logon category in the Streamline e-Commerce module?
    See attached.
    Document: How do I set the default logon category in the Streamline e-Commerce module.pdf

    Top



Email sending module

  1. I am thinking of utilizing email module, what are the benefits?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Email Module Highlights.pdf

    Top

  2. Business Rule EML9 (Email pending (in x days) vendor cost updates to buyers) sends out an automatic email to the buyer for cost updates scheduled. Where is this email address pulled from?
    The email address used for this business rule is pulled from Supplier Details -> P/O Info -> Zoom on buyer code field -> View Details -> Email field.
    This email is triggered at the time the sales order invoice register is updated as this is the function most often updated daily by sites.

    Top

  3. We have some of the email business rules enabled to auto email sales reps information - however one rep is not receiving the emails - why?
    The most likely reason a sales rep is not receiving their auto emails from Streamline is that their email address is not defined. The email address must be set up in the Sales Rep Master File.

    Top

  4. I am having trouble emailing from within the software.
    This FAQ covers both smart mail errors, as well as other email issues within the software.
    SmartMail is only responsible for creating the message in the Outlook Outbox, and telling Outlook to do a send operation. If there is a mail server issue, Smartmail will not throw any errors, since it is still able to do its part normally. Where the error occurs is in Outlook itself when it tries to do the actual send operation. If you click "Send/Receive" in Outlook, it will show any errors that occurred. Depending on the Outlook setup, you may be shown the send/receive window when the error occurs even when in Streamline. When issues occur do the following:
    Log the user completely out of the terminal server. Log back into the terminal server and launch outlook from the session desktop and verify that there are no popups or messages of any kind that require user intervention. Our email module is a MAPI automation client, so if there is anything requiring user intervention, our email module will wait forever to complete the initialization process. This causes errors whenever you attempt to access email features within VS (since the module was never able to completely initialize the outlook client). The error message displayed is just a generic MAPI error message with some “suggested possibilities”. Issues are almost never related to the mailbox size.
    Next, you should try to send an email directly from Outlook and see if it is successful or not. You should do this after logging off/on and verifying there are no popups when opening Outlook.
    If all this checks out, have the user login to VS. Are any message dialogs shown when they login? If not, then please send support the user/pass for the account that is having issues so that a tech can logon as that user for further troubleshooting.
    Anything beyond this and what is already in this FAQ should be handled directly through Technical support, or the site's 3rd party tech if an Outlook problem exists.

    Top

  5. Will Business Rule EML11 (Integrate email into Outlook) work with another email system such as GMAIL? What are my options?
    Streamline's email module integrates into either Microsoft Outlook 32 bit or Windows Live Mail. Outlook integration is generally used when a customer has a Microsoft Exchange server for their email solution. In cases where POP3/SMTP email is used Windows Live Mail can be used for the email module.

    Top

  6. When Emailing Customer Invoices, is there any way to have it send email to the Ship to email?
    Invoices are emailed to the AR customer, and there is currently no BR or setting to have it pick up the email address of the ship to.

    Top

  7. When I email a document from Streamline, the attachments are not going through why?
    Here are some things you can check:

    " The MAILMAN printer must be set to the "SmartMail Printer" for all sites and all SmartMail versions.

    " You must also have the "Integrate email into Outlook" turned on (BR EML 11).

    " You can look in the printer queue to see if there are any documents stuck. If you can find the printer to look in the queue, that also verifies someone didn't delete it accidentally.

    " Go to start, printers, find the smartmail printer, click on printer properties, in the advance tab and check that it is set to "Print to Printer" flag = ON



    Other than this, we would have to investigate this to determine why the attachments are not included, and if this is found to be technical or procedural, then time spent is billable.

    Top

  8. Can large email files within Outlook cause delays in Streamline?
    Yes, large PST files within Outlook can slow down the send/receive process which Streamline waits for to complete. Until the send/receive process is complete Streamline will not respond.

    Top

  9. Emails sent from the software do not recognize Read Receipts, why?
    Read receipt is an Outlook client application setting only. This means that only emails sent directly in Outlook honor these settings (same goes for signatures etc).

    Top

  10. Why does the mail box icon on the Main Menu not show me my emails sent from Streamline?
    This feature is supported for site running MS Outlook only.

    Top

  11. Does Streamline require that we use Exchange or if we were to move to something cloud based i.e. gmail would that be compatible with Streamline?
    We do not support web based email, Streamline email will not work via a browser window. We require a local email client be installed that is compliant with the Messaging API (MAPI) system. Officially supported email clients are Outlook and Windows Live Mail.

    You can check out Microsoft hosted Exchange at http://office.microsoft.com/en-ca/exchange/microsoft-exchange-online-email-for-business-FX103739072.aspx . The only issue is with a terminal server you will require Outlook 2010 or newer to have OST support which is required for performance.

    For Streamline the email account must be assessable from Microsoft Outlook or Windows Live mail. Streamline will not interface to a web based email client.

    Top

  12. How to modify the email subject or email message for emails sent from Streamline
    See attached documentation.
    Document: how to modify email subject and email message.pdf

    Top

  13. Why are attachments from Streamline software so large? Is there anything I can do to reduce the size?
    It depends on the size of the logo that is embedded, and also on how many pages there are in the document. For example, a site with a 50K logo file prints a one page PO which results in a 59K PDF file. The same site prints a 3 page PO which results in a 190K PDF file. The logo is really the culprit here. I had Charles check a couple of sites, and what we found is that sites with larger logo file sizes have larger PDF file sizes. It also appears that the logo image is embedded for each page, so if the logo is 100K, a 3 page PDF with the logo on each will be at least 300K in size (logo size X 3 + other content size).

    Top

  14. Is there a way to modify the the subject line and body text of an email generated from Streamline each time the email is generated?
    Available in Version 10.2.1.0000 is a business rule Email # 20. Enabling this Business Rule renders the Subject line editable in the email dialog.

    Top

  15. Is there a way to combine customer invoices into one email?
    This feature is available in Versions 10.2.3.0000 and higher:

    Located in the AR > Master File > Customer > Modify button, are 3 new tabs called:
    General Options; Printing Options; and A/R and Freight.
    There is a field under Printing Options called 'Multiple Invoices per Email'
    Document: How to combine Customer invoices in one email.pdf

    Top

  16. Why do the emails I send show the wrong sender display name?
    This is a feature of the email client software. If the sender's email address is in the recipients personal address book, or in a Global Address List if using Exchange Server, the email client may use the display name from the address book entry instead of the one specified in the email message. To verify if this is the case, have the recipient check their address book or global address list for the name being displayed, and the email address of the entry should match the sender's email address.

    Top

  17. Streamline 2018.x/2019.x SMTP Email Functionality
    See attached document.
    Document: Streamline 2018.x Email FAQ.pdf

    Top

  18. I am having trouble emailing from Streamline 2018.x/2019.x
    This FAQ covers both SmartMail errors, as well as other email issues within the software.
    SmartMail is only responsible for creating the PDF attachment that is attached to the email generated by Streamline.
    If there is a email server issue, Smartmail will not throw any errors,. In Streamline under the email/fax log you can check the send status (Sent/Failed). If the message fails to send an error is written to the Windows
    Event Log (eventvwr) in the Applications and Services Logs under the category Visual Streamline. Some common error examples are below.

    The specified string is not in the form of an e-mail address. Improper email address used. Should be in name@company.com format.
    Mailbox unavailable or unable to relay. Possible credential issue causing the email account to not authenticate and be available.

    Anything beyond this and what is already in this FAQ should be handled directly through Technical support, or the site's 3rd party tech if an email service SMTP problem exists.

    Top

  19. Why do I see failed emailed quotes in the email log with no to address?
    See attached document for details.
    Document: Why do I see failed emailed quotes in the email log with no to address.pdf

    Top



Executive Management

  1. In the Executive Management > Statistics > Sales orders screen there is an area that shows Hits/Misses/fill rates, and Stock orders. What does this represent?
    A hit is an order where all items were shipped on the first revision. It considers it a miss when there is an item back ordered.

    Top

  2. The Executive Management Inventory values do not appear to be correct?
    The Inventory Values for the Executive Management Company Overview are determined as follows:
    - it uses the GL accounts you setup in the Company Overview Setup;
    - it uses AS OF Date, so if you are asking to see March 8th it will total the GL Transactions in the accounts set as per above, up to March 8th only and show you the YTD up to that date;

    The EM Inventory Value is not calculated from the Inventory Valuation Report. These figures will not necessarily match unless your Inventory Valuation is balanced back to the GL control accounts as of the as at date reported.

    Top

  3. How do I balance EM Sales Order Information?
    See attached for documentation.
    Document: EM - how to balance Sales Order Information.pdf

    Top

  4. How do I balance the Invoice and Credit Details?
    Please see attachment for document.
    Document: EM_Report - 2 how to balance Invoices and Credits.pdf

    Top

  5. How do I balance AR Information and AP Information?
    Please see attached for document
    Document: EM_Report - 3 how to balance AR and AP info.pdf

    Top

  6. How do I balance Purchasing and Inventory information?
    Please see attached document
    Document: EM_Report - 4 how to balance Purchasing and Inventory.pdf

    Top

  7. How do I balance Cash Position?
    Please see attached document
    Document: EM_Report - 5 how to balance cash on hand.pdf

    Top

  8. What is the Days Sales Outstanding figure and how is it calculated?
    In accounting, Days Sales Outstanding (also called DSO) is a calculation used by a company to measure the invoicing collection process.
    It measures the average number of days that a company takes to collect revenue after a sales has been made.
    If you are strictly a cash business, your DSO will be 0. If you generate invoices for your customers and give them credit terms (some number of days before they are supposed to pay) then you will have an accounts receivable balance and thus a DSO.
    You can use the DSO number to measure the efficiency of you collections. Since DSO is so popular you can also use it as a gauge against other companies in your industry.
    The calculation of DSO is as follows:
    Days Sales Outstanding (DSO) = (Accounts Receivable / Invoiced Sales in Period) X Days in Period,
    where Invoice Sales in Period represents invoiced sales for 3 months leading up to the date of A/R figure
    and the Days in Period is therefore 90.
    Document: Days Sales Outstanding.pdf

    Top



Fax transmission module

  1. Where can I attach / maintain a Terms and Conditions document to be sent with our invoices when faxed or emailed?
    The Terms and Conditions document is stored in Company Setup -> Fax Defaults. If one is setup it will be sent with each invoice emailed or faxed.

    Top

  2. We don't dial the 1 for long distance calls due to a telephone plan. How can I turn this off when faxing?
    Business Rule FAX2 (Suppress country code and 1 for long-distance fax numbers) allows you to suppress the country code for long distance faxes. This does not affect overseas calls. Refer to the file folder on this business rule for information.

    Top

  3. We don't want to send cover pages with our batch faxed documents - like invoices. Is there a way to control this?
    Yes - The following business rules can be used to suppress Cover Pages:
    BR FAX3 (Suppress cover page for faxed orders) - when enabled all cover pages from printing in Batch Printing of Orders and Batch Printing of Credit Notes will be suppressed. It will also be used as the default for printing of an individual order or credit note - however the user can override this.
    BR FAX4 (Suppress cover page for faxed invoices) - when enabled this rule suppresses the printing of all cover pages for Batch Printing of Invoices, Batch Printing of Service Work Order Invoices and Batch Printing of Consolidated Invoices. It will also be used as the default for printing individual invoices.
    BR FAX5 (Suppress cover page for faxed purchase orders) - when enabled this rule will suppress the printing of all cover pages for purchase order printed from PPP. It will also be used as the default when printing individual purchase orders.

    Top

  4. I want to do a mass fax from Zeta fax, what file type is supported in Zeta Fax to be able to import a file that contains the customers fax numbers.
    Comma Delimited ASCII.

    Top

  5. How does the long distance flag after the fax number work?
    Check to make sure BR FAX2 (Suppress country code and 1 for long-distance fax numbers) is set to off and the long distance flag should then control if the country code long distance dialing code (a "1" in the case of Canada) is used in front of the fax number or not The country's international dialing prefix is set in the Country Code master file and can be found on the A/P and A/R Master Files menu..
    To trouble shoot problems and confirm this is working in Streamline properly you can test it with a P/O as per instructions attached and if all works and you are still having problems when the fax is sent it may be related to a Zeta Fax setting.
    Document: How to test fax long distance flag.pdf

    Top

  6. How to add a new user to zeta fax?
    If you go into ZetaFax configuration (it's in the Start Menu) you can enable users within there by right clicking your new user and selecting enable.

    Once this is done you need to restart the ZetaFax server for the change to take effect. This can be done by going to start / run and typing "services.msc" without quotations. Look for ZetaFax server then right click and select stop, then right click and select start.

    Top

  7. What kind of modem should I buy to use with Zetafax in Streamline software?
    see attached.
    Document: Recommended modem for Zetafax.pdf

    Top

  8. Does faxing from Streamline work with FOIP?
    Company Setup > Fax Defaults (FOIP Fax Service Type flag)
    When faxes are sent over phone lines, it is standard practice to embed commas (to pause for dial tone) after the local or long distance outside line access code. However now with the availability of FOIP fax service these embedded commas are generating faxing errors.

    Top

  9. Some users do not have the fax option. Is this a rights issue?
    No this is not a rights issue. The users need to be enabled within the ZetaFax server application to have a fax option in Streamline, this can be done within the Zetafax configuration accessible from the administrator profile on the server.

    You click start then go to Start / All Programs / ZetaFax /ZetaFax configuration.

    From within the ZetaFax configuration you can enable users by right clicking a user in the list and selecting enable then click ok.

    Top

  10. Where can I make changes to our fax cover sheet on purchase orders?
    During PO printing, if you uncheck the checkbox to suppress the cover page, the text that is written in the message field on the fax dialogue box will be added to the fax cover page, so you can add any note that you want in there.

    However if you are looking for a way to do a global change rather than on the po itself, then this can't be done, as the message is hardcoded and it not controlled globally by any BR.

    Top

  11. My faxing has stopped working and Zetafax says it is offline, how to a fix it.
    You need to restart Zetafax Server in services it can be found by clicking , Start > Run and type services.msc or Start > Administrative Tools > Services and right click zetafax server and then click start.

    Top

  12. Does the Streamline system support Internet Faxing?
    Yes, available in versions 10.2.1.0000 and higher is a Business Rule under the Fax tab # 6. Here you enter a web address. When a web address is entered, the system overrides faxing to send the fax through an email. The format is Country Code + Area Code + Number @ gatewayaddress.com. To use this feature Business Rule Fax # 2 must be OFF. The use of this feature also requires you to obtain a service plan with an email fax company.

    Top

  13. What is the latest version of Zeta fax that is compatible with Streamline?
    Zetafax 17 is compatible with Streamline versions 10.2.2.0000 and Higher.

    Top



Forms

  1. I have my customer set to print 2 copies of their invoices, but I only receive 1 copy. Why?
    There are several places where the number of invoice copies can be set. These places in order of precedence are as follows:
    Forms Management and this is located in: Company Setup > Interface.
    Ship to Address;
    Customer Billing Address;
    Business Rule FORMS163 (O/P - Number of additional copies for sales order invoices).

    Top

  2. I have 2nd lines of descriptions on my products, but they are not printing on my forms. Why?
    This is controlled by Business Rule FORMS352 (ALL - Print product second description line on forms).

    Top

  3. We don't want items that are not in stock to print on the picking / packing slips. Is there a way to control this?
    Yes - See Business Rule FORMS387 (O/P - Suppress products not in stock on picking/packing slip). Enabling this business rule suppresses printing items not in stock on the picking / packing slip.

    Top

  4. Can I have multiple copies of invoices print but to different printers so I can print on different types of paper?
    See attached.
    Document: Form Management - Invoice copies to different printers or trays.pdf

    Top

  5. Is there a way to identify a rush transfer linked to a rush order?
    Yes. Available in versions 10.2.1.0000 and hgher.
    New Business Rule FOR197 (Identify Rush Orders on Transfers) was added.
    Inventory > Warehouse Transfers... > Transfer Products (Picking Slip).
    Transfers can be created when purchase orders are received. Further, these transfers can be linked to
    sales orders.
    When these transfers are linked to RUSH sales orders, the picking slip is labelled as a RUSH Transfer

    Top



General Ledger

  1. I have created a new User and assigned right ROGL (Right Of General Ledger), but the user still does not have this module on the screen. Why?
    Streamline has the flexibility of granting users access to the General Ledger by company. Therefore, this right must be defined in both the user rights file and also in the user maintenance screen. Go to Company Setup -> User Maintenance. Select the user id in question and then click on 'User Comps'. Park on the Company Code and select 'Special Rights'. Add ROGL (Right Of General Ledger). The user will need to exit from Streamline and then log back in and select the 'Main Menu' button at the top of the screen to refresh their rights.

    Top

  2. How do I change the exchange rates?
    Go to General Ledger -> G/L Master Files -> Currencies. Highlight the currency you would like to change the rate for and select Modify. Park your cursor in the Rate field and modify it to the new rate you want to use. Select OK. The system will pop a box indicating that it is updating the supplier landed cost table as any items with a supplier cost in the currency you have just modified will have a newly recalculated landed cost. Because of this recalculation to your landed cost table we advise that you make any changes to the currency rate at a time when users are not on the system. Rate changes apply only to future events within the system. There are no recalculations on existing transactions, other than recalculating the standard cost if you answer YES to the question that comes up. If you answer YES to recalculate the standard cost, it will take longer to process the rate change. You need to have user right CSC (Change Standard Cost) to be able to update the Standard cost. If you answer Yes to recalculate the standard cost, this only applies to items were the Primary supplier is US.
    An audit trail of the rate changes is maintained and can be viewed using the Rate History button. This audit tracks the date, time, user, and the original and new exchange rates.

    Top

  3. I am unable to close a period in Month End Period Processing. I am getting a message stating that the the period cannot be validated due to unposted BOLs. Why?
    The Month End Period Processing program can not validate the period to be closed if there are unposted Bills of Lading. This means that there are orders that have been confirmed or invoiced in the month you are attempting to close that have not yet been posted to the General Ledger. Clicking on the detail button will allow you to view the orders that need to be addressed.

    Top

  4. I am unable to change the date on the bank reconciliation. Why?
    Once a bank reconciliation statement date has been entered, and you have started to work in the bank reconciliation - we do not allow the date to be changed. This is because the information displayed for tagging is based on the date entered. The only option is to delete the current bank reconciliation and begin again. This is accomplished by pressing the F3 button on the main screen. The system will then confirm that you wish to delete. Once the current open statement has been deleted, you will be able to enter the correct statement date and proceed.

    Top

  5. Can you explain the Month End Period Processing Program?
    The attached document outlines this program.
    Document: Month End Period Processing.pdf

    Top

  6. We want to start doing our Bank Reconciliation using the software. How do we start?
    You should manually set your opening bank statement balances.
    This can be done in General Ledger > G/L Master Files > Bank Accounts. Click the 'Modify' button and it is the field called 'Opening Balance' and is only available if you have never updated a bank reconcilation for that bank account. The user must have rights to edit the bank account master file . In addition to be able to enter the opening balance, the user must also have the right ROINSTALL (Right of Installation) which is usually limited to your internal PM.
    Because you have not been reconciling in the past there will be a large number of outstanding cheques, deposits, etc. You will need to run a Bank Reconciliation dated prior to the live month to clear these as follows:
    - set your first bank reconcilation date prior to the live Bank Reconcilation month;
    - it will display the beginnnig balance that you assigned;
    - you need to reconcile all the cheques that are showing incorrectly as outstanding to this point;
    - enter an ending Statement Balance to match the Beginning Balance and note the Difference;
    - enter the amount of the Difference in either the Deposits or the Transfers field;
    - the Difference field should now show zero;
    - click the Compute GL button;
    - there will be a Difference there also;
    - use the 'Misc Not Yet Cashed' or the 'Outstanding Deposits' fields to offset the difference;
    - once the Difference is zero, you can click the Update button.

    Top

  7. What are the Month End Procedures ?
    The attached document outlines the Month End Procedures.
    Document: Month End Period Processing.pdf

    Top

  8. What are the Inventory Balancing Procedures?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Inventory Balancing Procedure.pdf

    Top

  9. Can you briefly explain month end cutoff procedures?
    Document attached.
    Document: MONTH END PROCESSING - Cutoff.pdf

    Top

  10. In the Currency Details, there is an A/P Posting Category labelled 'Freight Expense'. What does this G/L Account control?
    This is used in A/P invoices, when freight is expensed on the P/O matching screen.
    It is used in Stock Receipts when 'Other' is set to 'Expensed' and Business Rule PO11 (Expense freight in G/L but include in landed cost at receipt) is ON.
    It is also used in RA debit memo.

    Top

  11. In the G/L Accounts details, what are the Reclaim fields in the Tax Info section?
    The G/L account Tax Reclaim % is used when entering NON matched invoices in A/P that are expensed to that account. Tax will be calculated at the appropriate rate and only the Reclaim Percentage portion will be posted to the account. Then when the GST report is run, it will have the correct portion on it.
    Document: GL Account Tax Reclaim Info.pdf

    Top

  12. In the G/L Accounts details, what is the Tax Account flag?
    This defines whether this is the GST or PST account in the G/L.
    Check the Tax Account? Box if it is a Tax Account that you’re setting up. Note: The Tax Account? Flag should be turned on for all tax accounts (i.e. PST, GST, etc.).
    Document: GL Account Tax Flag.pdf

    Top

  13. How does the cut date work in period maintenance?
    Once you've decided to complete your month for financial statements, you can't have the system posting to that period any longer. This means that you must be sure all A/R invoices are posted, cash receipts are in, P/O receipts are complete and any inventory adjustments are made.
    Unfortunately, it's not easy to get all A/P invoice entered at month end, as you likely have not received them yet. Since the A/P invoice date is normally used as the posting date and you typically don't want the invoices to post to a month for which the monthend process is already started, the Cut Date is available.
    Once the Cut Date is set, any invoice entered after that Cut Date will be posted to the month after the invoice date month.
    So if you had an invoice date September 25th, it would normally post to September, but if you had your Cut Date set to October 1st, and you were doing the entry on October 4th, the invoice would post to October not September.
    Setting the Cut Date is done via General Ledger > G/L Master Files > G/L Periods. Choose the period for which you are setting the Cut Date, click the 'modify' button and enter a date in the Cut Date field, then click the OK button.
    Setting the cut date will also efffect Cash Receipts, so you should make sure all entered for the prior month are updated before setting the cut date for a period.

    Top

  14. How do the G/L Accrual and Repetitive Methods work in G/L Transaction Entry?
    The Repetitive Method allows the user to define a journal entry to be posted in equal portions over a specified length of time and it works as follows:
    - the user enters the following information:
    - the period (Start Period) in which the repeated transactions are going to start;
    - the number of times (No. Times) that these transactions are going to repeat;
    - the frequency per month (Frequency) with which these transactions are going to repeat;
    - the journal entry representing the total of all repeated transactions.
    Therefore a repetetive journal for an amount A, number of times x and frequency y, will post transactions y times per month, in the amount of A/x starting in the user-specified start period until x transactions have been posted.
    The Accrual Method allows the user to define a jounrnal entry to be initially posted in a user-specified period and then backed out in equal portions over a specified length of time and it works as follows:
    - the user enters the following information:
    - the period (Start Period) in which the accrued transaction is going to post;
    - the number of reversals (Rvrs Times) required to back out the accrued transation;
    - the frequency per month (Frequency) with which the reversal transactions are to occur;
    - the journal entry representing the total.

    Top

  15. What user rights are needed to delete G/L Periods?
    You need user right RMT (Right to Modify Tables).

    Top

  16. What does the program 'Update GL Bal File for 0 PTD' in the GL Inquiry do?
    This program was written to create records in the G/L balance file as they can be missing under certain circumstances.

    Top

  17. How do I reconcile my Bank Reconciliation?
    Please see attached for document.
    Document: How to Balance your Bank Reconciliation.pdf

    Top

  18. My GL Trial Balance shows in balance at the end of last year, but for this year the PTD debits equal credits the the YTD do not?
    This problem is usually caused due to not all profit being posted for last year. To find it and how much go to the General Ledger > GL Entry/Update > Transaction Entry, do a new entry back dated to end of last fiscal year, and use the Generate Profit button for the entire last year and see if it comes up with an amount to be posted. This should match the amount your YTD is out on the current years Trial Balance. You then just need to post the profit to last year to make the correction.

    Top

  19. How to Setup a New Bank Acct?
    Please see attached documentation.
    Document: How to setup new Bank Acct.pdf

    Top

  20. How to setup GL Periods?
    Please see attachment
    Document: how to setup GL Periods.pdf

    Top

  21. We need to add another branch into our Streamline system, how do we do this?
    Go to GL > Master Files > Organization and Branches > click on NEW. Continue by entering in the Org, the Branch, Branch Name, then click EXIT. This will create the new Branch. Go back into the Org and Branches and find the new branch, and click on COPY. Then select the branch that you want to copy the accts from. If you want to copy over ALL accounts, then uncheck the flag to copy only the P&L accounts, and they will ALL be copied. Otherwise if you leave the flag checked, only the P&L accts are copied to the new branch so it's up to you what you want to do. This setups up the new branch with the GL accts from another existing branch.

    Top

  22. How to I post to a previous period that has been closed?
    General Ledger > Master Files > GL Periods, if you park on the period that you need to post to, there will be a button available to Open Closed Period. You can then post to it and be sure to reclose it afterwards using the General Ledger > Period End Processing > Period End Processing program

    Top

  23. How do I import a GL entry?
    See attached.
    Document: How to import a GL entry.pdf

    Top

  24. What area of the software does User Right: RTCCA control?
    RTCCA - Right to Change Control Account applies to the following 4 programs:
    AP Distribution
    AR Distribution - includes Cash reciepts > GL Distribution button.
    AR - Job Cost
    Sales Order Entry - misc gl distribution
    The only two accounts that the system looks for when determining a 'control acct' is the AR and AP in the Currency table

    Top

  25. Balance Sheet does not balance but trial balance does - what can I do?
    Here are common areas for you to investigate:

    a. There is profit to be posted - use General Ledger > G/L Entry > Transaction Entry GEN PROF button.
    b. New accounts have been set up in the chart of accounts but they have not been set up in the financial statement - use General Ledger > Financial Statements > G/L Statement Definitions and choose to modify the statement. Have the statement 'checked'. Correct any errors from the checking routine
    c. If the PTD Balance sheet does not balance, but YTD does, it is likely that profit from another month has been posted to that period. This can be corrected by rerunning the profit posting for individual months until the amount is found.

    Top

  26. GL > Master Files > Currencies, why can I not modify the exchange GL accounts to be 'post by branch'? What controls this?
    The logic to allow you to modify the 'Post by branch' flag against the Exchange GL accounts is limited to companies setup as Multi - Org's. (Reference sid 26851)

    Top

  27. How do I give a user access to ONLY the GL Inquiry menu option?
    Below are the user rights needed to set up a user with access to only the GL inquiry menu option and not the GL activity report and the Trial Balance.

    The rights needed are: ROGL, RTGLISM and RTGLIP.

    So you need to REMOVE RTGLI - which by default controls all 3 options (trial balance, gl inquiry, and gl activity report), and ADD RTGLISM instead.

    Top

  28. Is there a way to restrict user to only see certain GL accounts in the GL Inquiry?
    Company Setup >> User Maintenance new button "G/L Accounts" allows the supervisor to setup a list
    of accounts that a particular user has access to. If there are no entries for a user in this table,
    they will have access to all accounts (as they do now - assuming they have the appropriate G/L
    rights). If there is a record that has only the username and the org, the user will have access to
    all accounts for that org (regardless of whether there are other entries for this org. If there is
    no org only record for an org, but there is one or more records of username, org, branch with no
    account or dept specified, user will have access to all accounts for that/those branch/branches
    regardless of whether there are additional records for this branch specifying accounts. If there
    are records that specify G/L accounts/depts, user will only be able to see the G/L accounts that
    have been specified in the file (with the exception of if there is an org or branch record). Any
    user that has access to user maintenance can make changes to this file. There is no additional
    right required.
    General Ledger >> Inquiry >> G/L Inquiry has been modified to only display the accounts/branch/org
    specified in the user maintenance-gl accounts file if records exist for the user. There should be

    Top

  29. In GL > Excel Statment Definitions, why is the Account Ranges Button disabled?
    The account ranges button is only enabled after you entered a valid template path. Otherwise if the template path is invalid or blank, then the account button is greyed out,

    Top

  30. What is involved in changing year end dates?
    See attached general information. For more information and a quote, please log a support case into the customer care portal.
    Document: what is invovled in Changing Year End Dates.pdf

    Top

  31. How do I end up with gaps in my periods?
    This can happen when you create period manually as the system expects you to specify the next starting period.

    When you use the GENERATE button, it creates an ENTIRE year, but it starts at period 1 automatically. So, if prior to using the Generate button, you used the NEW button then you must continue to use the NEW button to create one by one, otherwise you end up with gaps.

    If you already have posted data, this cannot be fixed easily and requires a programmer to move over all the transactions. This is not covered under support and therefore billable.

    Top



Hand Helds

  1. Is there a document that gives an overview of HandHeld processing in Streamline?
    See the attachment for an overview of HandHeld processing.
    Document: HandHeld Processing Overview.pdf

    Top



Inventory

  1. I have a US vendor for which I am trying to enter a duty % rate in the inventory supplier record, but it is not letting me. Why?
    There needs to be duty codes created first in: Inventory > Master Files > Duty Code Maintenance. Once this is set up, you will be able to hit F5 on the field, and select one of the duty codes that you have created.

    Top

  2. Why can't I change the decimal places in the Product Master File details screen?
    To change the decimal places on an item, the user must have the right RTEIDP (Right to Edit Item Decimal Places).

    Top

  3. I am trying to change the details in a bill of materials list, but the Modify button is not enabled. Why?
    Assuming that the user has the user rights required to make modifications in the inventory master file, the most common reason for the 'Modify' button to not be enabled is because the item in question is currently on an open sales order, or unposted register. Should the need arise to make a change to a bill of material on an item currently selected on an open order, the user should first delete the item from the sales order. Make the change to the BOM, and then re-enter the item on the order. If the item is found on orders that are confirmed and/or invoiced, the register must be posted prior to modifying the BOM.

    Top

  4. Where did this Average Cost come from?
    To look up the cost history of an item, call up the item in the Inventory Master File. Select the Warehouse screen. If you have more than one warehouse you will need to select the one you are inquiring about. Park your cursor on the 'Average Cost' field and press F5. The screen that displays shows all of the transactions that have affected your accounting cost and what the newly calculated cost because at the time of the transaction.

    Top

  5. Is there a way to filter out a specific stock type for only one user?
    Product Browse defaults are set company-wide by Business Rules INV8 (Default stock types in Product lookup) and INV9 (Default status types for Product lookup). However, there is also the option to set this up for each employee. This is done in the Company Setup -> User Maintenance screen. You can choose different stock types and status based on employee use or preference. Setting up filters can help reduce look up time and also ensure accuracy when selecting products.

    Top

  6. Why aren't the additional descriptions for items printing on this document?
    First let's review. Additional Descriptions are set up in the Inventory Master File on the Product Detail Screen. To the right of the fields for Description and Description Line 2 there is a button that looks like a file folder. When the user clicks on this button a new window opens to allow you to set up several lines of additional description. Within this window there are also several check flags. These flags control where the extended descriptions will be printed. Checking the appropriate flag, will ensure your additional descriptions print where required.

    Top

  7. Is there a way to tell who changed a product code?
    There is an audit for changes made to Product Codes and Product Lines. This is located on the Company Setup Menu -> System Auditing -> Audit Report for Code Changes. This audit also tracks changes in other master files from one code to another. The tracking includes product, customer, customer ship to, supplier and sales rep code changes. A report is printable by type of code change, for given date ranges and code ranges and displays the date of the change and user, along with what the code was changed from and to.

    Available in versions 10.1.4.000 and higher:
    A new log file has been created to track changes to the following fields in the inventory master table: Stock Type; Status; and Overstocked/Restricted flag. There is no interface for the new table (prod_fields_audit) which contains the following fields: prfa_record_id; prfa_datetime; prfa_datetime_time; prfa_user_id; prfa_prod_record_id; prfa_field; prfa_oldvalue; prfa_newvalue. This information needs to be queried.

    Top

  8. Is there a way to see who changed the Standard Cost on an item?
    Go to the Product Master File, and once you have selected the item, click on the 'Warehouse' button. Place your cursor on the 'Standard Cost' field and press F5. The system will display a log showing the last standard cost, the user that made the change and the date and time the change was made.

    Top

  9. I have an assembled kit that is showing an incorrect cost. I have added some user defined charges such as 'packaging' but my cost did not update. Why?
    The average cost will be updated once you have built the assembled item. To build the assembled item, go to: Inventory > Processing... > Inventory Transactions (New then select Build Assembled Items from the pulldown).

    Top

  10. Is there something in the system that automatically changes un-used part numbers to 'To Be Deleted' Status?
    Yes - Obsolete - items that are no longer used and have been superseded by a newer Product Code should be flagged as Obsolete. Obsolete items display in a different colour. Once the inventory is sold and the on hand is zero, the product is automatically flagged for deletion. In addition, if the product is deleted, inactive, or obsolete, a message will appear in Order Entry to notify the user that the costing needs to be verified.

    Top

  11. Is there a way to see changes made to the Standard List Price on an item?
    Yes - go to Inventory > Processing... > Product Code Lookup (Details) and click on the Standard List field and hit 'F5' then select the option 'Price Change Audit Inquiry' This will show you all the changes that have been made to the standard price including the user, date, and the program that updated the price.

    Top

  12. What is the calculation for EOQ/ROP quantities? NOTE: This FAQ is OBSOLETE, and has been replaced by a more recent FAQ.
    This is how EOQ and ROP Quantities are calculated in the software.
    Sales Analysis quantities are used for movement history, and for Assembled Items, this only includes the finished product.
    Set up Condition:
    The program only looks at items with the "Reorder Method" set to "EOQ/ROP" and when the EOQ/ROP controls flag "Recalc" is set to "on:. These fields are in the Product Master, Warehouse screen.
    System Formulas:
    Reorder Point = Average Monthly Usage * Average Monthly Lead Time + Safety Units
    EOQ = Average Monthly Usage * Average Monthly Lead Time.
    Average Monthly Usage is calculated from sales analysis data for the item, based on 'Months Back For Calculating Average Usage' defined on the product warehouse data. (IE look back at historical sales for the last X months to calculate average monthly usage.) For items flagged as seasonal, the average monthly usage looks at historical sales from one year ago and looks X month forward from there.
    Note: For all 3 types of Bill of Materials (assembled, build to order and configured) the raw material usage is added to the sales quantities when calculating total movement for a product.
    Average Monthly Lead Time is the lead time divided by 30 days to get the lead time in terms of a monthly average.
    Safety Units is calculated as the safety stock % entered * the average monthly lead time * the average monthly usage.
    Notes:
    There are 2 Business Rules that can affect the calculation:
    - INV 32 If set, the "Average Monthly Lead Time is based on the "Lead Time (Day)" field in the product’s primary supplier’s "supplier info screen" and if off, the Average Monthly Lead Time is based on the system generated "Average lead time" field in the product’s primary supplier’s "supplier info screen".
    Note: Regardless of the business rule setting, if the lead time per above is zero, the system will use the Primary Supplier’s "supplier’s default
    -Inv # 31 allows you to set your calculation method, assume 50%
    Document: EOQ ROP reorder method information.pdf

    Top

  13. What User Right is required to change the address and other information in the Warehouse Master File?
    The user right required to change the address and other information in the Warehouse Master File is user right ROMW (Right to Modify Warehouse) .

    Top

  14. How are inventory turns calculated?
    Inventory Turns = ( YTD Cost of Goods Sold / Inventory Value ) X ( 365 / # of Days into Fiscal Year )

    Top

  15. How is average cost calculated?
    Calculation for Weighted Average Cost
    [ ( Existing on hand * Exist avg cost ) + ( Receipt qty * Receipt cost ) ] / Total on hand.

    Top

  16. I need to change the status of all items in a product line for example: 'to be deleted' is there an update program available for this?
    We currently do not have a batch update program for changing the status on items.
    It is possible to use the import program to do this - however you would have to have a good understanding of creating queries and also regarding how the import works in order to do this. You would first need to create a query for all the fields that are in the import and extract the product line. You must ensure that all data other than the status remains the same or you will end up updating information that may not be correct.

    Top

  17. What is the purpose of a Special Order Item?
    Special Order Item stock type is another way of categorizing inventory items. They can be created on the fly in quote and order entry and are given a stock type Z. This means it is a special order item. It is intended to be used as something you would not stock but can order in for a customer if you get a ‘special order’ for it.
    There are some reports that allow you to filter on the status. As well as being able to isolate these items in your own reports and also with the status filters set for users on what they see by default in the browse.
    There are a couple of programs / functions related to this if you choose to later turn your special order items into stock items see Business Rule INV18 (Convert non-stock/special-ordered to stock after x sales) and program Inventory > Processing... > Conv Non-Stock to Stock items.

    Top

  18. Why are there items on the Inventory Quantity Discrepancy Report, and what does it mean?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Inventory Qty Discrepancy Report.pdf

    Top

  19. Is the YTD sales column on the Inventory Availability Report based on Fiscal or Calendar year?
    YTD sales on the Inventory Availability report are for fiscal year as defined by the periods master file.

    Top

  20. Is there a report we can run at physical inventory time to help identify orders impacted by counts that have changed our on hand quantities?
    Yes - the Order Exception Report. Go to Inventory > Processing... > Physical / Cycle Count > Order Exception Report. During the Physical Inventory Update any items that impact the inventory in a 'negative' way are written to an exception file. This report will identify the orders that could potentially have a problem as a result. The user can modify these sales order to reflect a true actual as per the physical count .
    Note - it is strongly recommended the user F3 and delete the line item or items and re-enter them as per the exception report. By doing this the system will properly reset the committed file.
    The exception report prints the following information :

    Top

  21. I have an order that has a back order... why doesn't it show in the back order flush screen?
    The global back order flush screen shows you the back orders that could not be flushed for products that had flushed to other orders in the same report. It does not show you all unshipped back orders in the system.

    Top

  22. What is the basic difference between a Build to Order item and an Assembled item?
    Manufactured products can be defined in one of 2 ways:
    Assembled - A finished good that will be stocked - or
    Built to Order - A good that is manufactured at the time of the order and until then remains in its component parts.

    Top

  23. We use a lot of Alias Codes. Is there a way to populate these without typing them in?
    See Business Rule INV41 (Auto-populate product alias tables). When enabled, the system will automatically populate the product alias table with the following fields: Supplier Part Number, Catalogue Number, Customer Part Number, Manufacturer Part Number, Alpha Sort Code and any product supersedes that are entered. When in order entry, if you enter an alias, rather than the part number, the system will search the alias table, and return the linked Streamline part number to the order.

    Top

  24. I want to print count sheets - do we have to initialize physical inventory to do this?
    Yes - The initialization program is what sets up the file to be printed. If you want to print the count sheets ahead of time - or for a different purpose, you can initialize and then print the sheets. When you are finished printing go back into the initialization program as if you were going to initialize again - the system will tell you that there is a count in process and ask if you want to clear the file. If the file is not needed just confirm to clear it.

    Top

  25. I am trying to change the lot/serial flags but it's not letting me. Why?
    The system will not allow the change if there are ANY non-zero quantities for the product in ANY warehouse.
    The system will undo (with a warning) any lot/serial flag changes, if quantity transactions exist.
    Further, we recommend you setup a new product rather then changing an existing one to use Lot/Serial process, due to the following data issues that could arise and cause data integrity corruption:
    1. Cancelling a PO receipt where the PO was created prior to change in lot flag.
    2. Re-open a PO created prior to change in flag.
    3. Issuing a linked credit memo for item purchased prior to change in flag.

    Top

  26. How does the customer consignment work?
    Please refer to the attached document.
    Document: Customer Consignment Inventory.pdf

    Top

  27. How does Supplier Consignment work?
    Please refer to the attached document.
    Document: Supplier Consignment WH.pdf

    Top

  28. What are the user rights required to access Inventory -> Remove Unwanted Products?
    User rights required for this program are:
    - ROI (Right Of Inventory);
    - RTINVP (Right To Inventory Processing);
    - RTBDP (Right To Batch Delete Products).

    Top

  29. Why am I not able to change the standard cost on an item?
    User right CSC (Change Standard Cost) is required.

    Top

  30. What user rights are required to Print Physical Count Sheets?
    The following user rights are required to be able to print inventory physical count sheets:
    - ROI (Right Of Inventory);
    - RTINVP (Right To Inventory Processing);

    Top

  31. Inventory Monthend Processing - Cutoff Process
    See attached
    Document: MONTH END PROCESSING - Cutoff.pdf

    Top

  32. When looking at inventory history, I need the ability to see pertinent information on one screen. How can I do this?
    Every time an inventory item's on hand changes we track this information. You can drill down into each entry for more information. The on hand and ending balance must be the same. If a picker ever goes to a shelf and cannot pick what the pick slip says we put that item into the cycle count so it can be resolved

    Top

  33. I need to have lots of character spaces for the creation of new part numbers and their descriptions. What does Streamline offer?
    A product code is made up of a product line (6 spaces long) a product code (26 spaces long) and if desired a sub category (6 spaces long), a group code (6 spaces long) and a sub group code (6 spaces long). We give you further breakdown within a product line for reporting, searching and pricing setup. You can have as many lines of description as you wish. You can also define what forms the extra lines of description print on.

    Top

  34. I need the ability to do easy cost/price updates. What does Streamline offer?
    Your vendor costs are automatically updated via an excel spreadsheet that is either on a CD or excel attachment. Pricing is then adjusted if you use cost pus pricing. Sales list prices (which can be different from vendor list) can be updated using the excel file as well. The program to facilitate these updates is located in: Inventory > master files > New supplier list by product.
    Document: New Supplier List by Product.pdf

    Top

  35. I am using the Import program to load new items into Streamline - however the Standard Cost field has not been populated. Why?
    In order to populate to the 'Standard Cost' field from the import program, the Supplier List, FOB and Landed Cost must be filled in the import file.
    This is no longer the case.
    In order to populate the Standard Cost field from the import program, either the Supplier List or the FOB Cost must be included in the import.
    If both are included then only the Supplier List will be used.
    The landed cost field has been relabelled 'Landed Cost (DO NOT USE)' as it is ignored on import.

    Top

  36. How can I attach an Image to a product in the Product Code Master File?
    In order to add an image to an inventory item, choose a product, click on the ‘Preview Image’ check box, click on MODIFY, click on the INSERT IMAGE button. Zoom in on the Image File or Click on the folder button next to it and choose a valid image file (.jpg). Note, when the ‘Preview Image’ field is checked, the screen will overlay the image over the Item’s Statistical Information. Therefore, in order to view the stats, simply uncheck the ‘Preview Image’ field when you need to look at them.
    The image should be in JPEGs format and their sizes should be approximately 4x4 inches. The actual file size should not exceed 100KB

    Top

  37. In Supplier Info there are 4 fields for lead times, there is Lead Time (in Days), Last Lead Time (in Days), Average Lead Time (in Days) and Average Lead Time (Date Created). What is the difference?
    When the Lead Time Control Method is set to manual, you are able to park directly on the Lead Time (in Days) field and manually key in a value. There is no calculation involved here, its a manual entry. When the Lead Time Cotnrol Method is set to automatic, you can't park on the field, but you can update the field using the warehouse replenishment defaults located in: Inventory > Global Changes. There is also no calculation here either. Therefore the automatic flag only controls how the number gets into the field. Furthermore if the flag is set to 'automatic' the system will default the value from the supplier PO Info if a value exits.

    Top

  38. Supplier Info > Average Lead Times - does the average lead time take into consideration branch transfers that are done?
    The average lead time in the supplier recoord does not take into consideration the lead times on branch transfers, just purchase orders.

    Top

  39. Does the average lead time in supplier record of an item take into consideration purchases made for all warehouses, or just the primary warehouse?
    The average lead time takes into consideration purchases made for ALL warehouses not just the primary.

    Top

  40. What is the file layout for the Import Count Entry From CSV program that is located in the physical inventory module and how does it work?
    The Import Count from CSV program was originally written for a customer based on their specifications. The purpose of it was to have a 3rd party company perform the counts on the customer's behalf. They used Handheld scanners to do this, and then created a comma-delimited (CSV) text file that they could then import into the count entry screen. The file layout is product line, product code, description, bin location, and quantity counted.
    Notes:
    To use this feature you must have initialized the count by bin location.
    The description column may be blank but you must leave a space holder for it.

    Use of this function assumes you have the necessary tools and ability to create a CSV file in the layout described.

    Top

  41. How do I back date the transfer report to show me open transfer as at a certain point in time when they would all be received already?
    Leave the 'From Issue date' blank and set the To Issues date' as at the date you are back dating to.
    Set the 'From Reciept date' to the day after the date you are back dating to and set the 'To Reciept date' to today.
    Set the transfer status to ALL.

    Top

  42. Is there a way to hide the average cost from only the Inventory Browse screen?
    The ability to view costs on the initial product code lookup screen is controlled by user right CFILS (Cost on First Inventory Lookup Screen).

    Top

  43. What are the user rights associated with being able to zoom into the Purchase Order details, from the purchase history button in Product Code Lookup?
    User requires:
    - ROPO (Right of Purchase Orders);

    Top

  44. I am trying to do a cycle count, I have initilaized, but the system is not printing any items on my count sheets. Why?
    The cycle count program works in a very specific way. It randomly selects up the ‘number of items’ that you have indicated, and it will not bring in that same item again for the specified time period. For example, if you did a cycle count already for any of the items that fall under the criteria on your attachment, within the last 3 months, the system will not bring that item in again on another count until after 3 months has past.

    Top

  45. What are the basic processes of Physical Inventory?
    Please see the attached document which provides an overview of the Physical Inventory process.
    Document: Physical Inventory Process.pdf

    Top

  46. In the Inventory > Reports and Inquiries... > No Sales Since Report, there is a No Sales Since date and an optional No Movement Since date... How do these dates differ?
    The No Sales Since looks for only sales of the product whereas the No Movement Since checks for any inventory transactions that would have affected on hand quantity.

    Top

  47. If I want to add freight to a transfer receipt what is the calculation used to disburse freight amongst multiple lines on the transfer?
    The formula to determine freight portion per line is as follows:
    Line Freight = Total freight X (Line Transfer Cost / Total Transfer Cost ). The result is the per line freight cost rounded to 5 decimal places.

    Top

  48. I am getting an error telling me I have a bad character when I use the map import. What does this mean?
    A bad character error will occur if you are using Comma, Asterisk, or Question Mark in your text file. You need to remove these special characters, re-save the text file, and re-import the map.

    Top

  49. How does the Inventory > Reports and Inquiries... > Stock Aging Report work?
    The aging date ranges are built based on the number of days in the buckets in the aging schedule, working backwards from today. The report takes the quantity on hand (by product/warehouse) and reads through the transaction details for the product by date, and looks for transactions where the transaction type is a 'plus' type. (adds to inventory). It calculates the line cost based on the cost base times the lesser of (the transaction quantity or the remaining quantity). The remaining quantity is calculated starting with the on hand quantity, and each transaction record processed has the transaction quantity subtracted. The line cost is then added into the appropriate aging bucket by comparing the transaction date to the range dates for each bucket. The process is repeated until the remaining quantity is zero, or the end of transactions is reached for the product.
    There is an option to exclude warehouse transfers and customer returns when run for all warehouses. This prevents the scenario whereby stock that was transferred or returned yesterday falls into the 1 day aging category.

    Top

  50. When using the Remove Unwanted Items program, what does it check to determine if an item can be permanently deleted or not?
    When running the Remove Unwanted Items program - currently the system checks for the following to ensure that an item can be permanently deleted.
    - No inventory in any warehouse.
    - No sales orders (open or closed).
    - No deleted sales orders.
    - No purchase orders (open or closed).
    - No quotes (open or closed).
    - No contract pricing (supplier or customer).
    - No bill of materials set up.
    - Not used as a raw material in any other products bill of materials.
    The program will search for items that are flagged as TO BE DELETED if you check the flag.
    Otherwise if the flag is left unchecked all items are checked, regardless of the status.
    You need to enter a Created Before Date also, to be able to proceed to the next screen.
    You can click Process on the initial screen, and still back out of the program on the next screen.

    Top

  51. When importing into Inventory > Global Changes... > Change Inv Master Codes, we are getting an error that says there is a duplicate index. We've checked to make sure our list has no duplicates - why is this coming up?
    When importing using a text file - there can be no blank lines at the end of the file.
    To ensure there are no blank lines:

    Top

  52. What does it mean when QUANTITIES in Product code lookup appear in RED?
    The item is either a Build to order kit or a Configured item.

    Top

  53. Inventory > Reports and Inquiries > Availability and Valuation Report - is the YTD Sales column shown on the Availability report based on Calendar or Fiscal year?
    The YTD Sales on the Availability report are for fiscal year as defined by the 'Periods' master file.

    Top

  54. In the Warehouse Detail Screen, there is a field for Primary Supplier. Why is it blank, and why does it not show us the primary supplier for the item?
    This field allows you to have a different primary suppliers for different warehouses.

    Top

  55. When superseding parts, which parts gets superseded - old or new?
    You need to go into the NEW part, and enter the OLD Part into the Supersede screen.

    Top

  56. How do I process an item that has 2 vendors. The first vendor is the one I purchase the item from, then need to send to 2nd one for additional work?
    The easiest way to process this is to do the following:
    Do a Purchase Order as per usual.
    When the stock arrives - receive it as per usual. This needs to be a manual Purchase Order so it does not flush to the sales order
    Then transfer it to another warehouse (new warehouse)
    Then manually send the item out to the 2nd vendor and when it arrives do an Inventory Receipt
    Add the Cost of the additional work the inventory receipt, and this will adjust the weighted average cost.

    Top

  57. How do I restrict users from being able to see/modify cost in the supplier info record of the Product Code Lookup Screen?
    Access to View the Costs on the Supplier Info screen is controlled through DACIIL user right. Access to Modify the Supplier Info screen is controlled through RTMII.

    Top

  58. How do you use the warranty start and end dates on serialized items?
    There is a field in the Product Master to enter the Warranty Period in days. If you fill this in, then when you enter a sales order and ship the item the Warranty Start and Expiry dates are populated. The Start date becomes the current date and the Expiry date becomes current date plus Warranty Period days. You can extend the Expiry date after you confirm the shipment by using the Extend Warranty button also shown in the Serial Number Maintenance screen available through the product master details screen.

    Top

  59. What does the User Cost Base in User Maintenance affect and what does BR INV4 (Costing method used for quotes and orders) affect?
    There are four areas that display costs in quote/order entry:
    - Footer Cost (the cost shown in the footer area of quote/order entry along with other key warehouse information);
    - Margins Button (the cost shown when the Margins Button is clicked);
    - Margin Calculator (the cost shown in the Margin Calculator);
    - Sell Price Calculator (the cost shown in the Sell Price Calculator).

    Business Rule INV4 (Costing method used for quotes and orders) has the following settings: Average Cost; Replacement Cost; Standard Cost; and Vendor Cost. The cost corresponding to the setting will be displayed in each of the four areas, EXCEPT the Footer cost.

    Footer cost is controlled through BR Inv 2 setting. Is user cost base is not blank it used that for footer cost, else it uses INV2.

    User Cost Base in User Maintenance has the following settings: Average; Standard; and . If the User Cost Base is set to anything other than , that setting will over-ride the business rule setting in each of the four areas, EXCEPT the Margins Button cost.

    Top

  60. Can I change a stocking UOM?
    Stocking UOMs can only be modified/changed when the following conditions are met:
    On Hand Qyt = 0 AND Committ Qty = 0 AND schedule Qty = 0 AND Back Order Qty = 0
    AND On Order Qty = 0 AND In Transit Qty = 0 AND Production Qty = 0 AND
    Required for Production Qty = 0 AND Commit to Production Qty = 0 AND MTD Units Curr_Qty = 0
    and YTD Units Curr = 0
    Otherwise the Stocking UOM cannot be changed

    Top

  61. In the Warehouse Master File there is a field located at the bottom left of the screen that reads 'replicate cost change to all warehouses' What cost is this referring to?
    This flag is only referring to the Standard Cost.

    Top

  62. I am trying to setup a broken case upcharge, but it's not working. Why?
    You need to setup the UOMs starting with the smallest UOM. This is the trick to making it work.
    Document: Broken Case Upcharge.pdf

    Top

  63. What is the process for handling a situation whereby a customer returns a product for repair but would like a quote before proceeding with the repair?
    You could use Customer RA to process a record of the repair. However it’s difficult to track what you have in for repair if you’re not affecting inventory with any transactions. Some sites do the RA and when they get the goods in they then do a credit memo to return the stock. At that point the stock is on hand but part of available - which you really would not want it to be. In some cases, they then transfer the goods to a separate warehouse called ‘Repair’. This gives them the ability to see what is in that location for repair via a valuation report.
    Once the item is fixed they then transfer it back out to the main warehouse, put it on a sales order and rebill it. They add a misc item called Repair to charge for the labour/repairs that were done. The issue with crediting and rebilling the customer for a ‘repair’ is that it can get complicated if costs/ selling prices have changed since they first purchased it. You have to be careful here.
    In terms of quoting the customer first for any repair, you could just put the Repair item on a quote and give them that - then if they decide to go ahead you can turn the quote into a sales order.
    You would really have to do all of this through their test company to ensure that they match up internal procedures with what’s going on in the system. Some sites don’t like this process because it does involve a separate warehouse which complicates matters. In that case I guess you would have to have more manual processes outside the system to make it work because there’s not really a great way to track what’s in house without transactions that affect inventory.

    Top

  64. In the program 'New Supplier List By Product', there is a flag 'Customer List in Home Currency'. When do I need to that flag ON or OFF?
    When doing an update for a US vendor, this is when you will see this flag. If you want the system to update the customer list price based on the US amount, then you need to turn the flag ON. If you want the system to convert the amount based on the exchange and update it in CDN dollars then you turn the flag OFF.
    Document: Customer List In home currency.pdf

    Top

  65. What are the formulae when Business Rule INV57 (EOQ/ROP formula) is set to Advanced? NOTE: This FAQ is OBSOLETE, and has been replaced by a more recent FAQ.
    Formula is as follows:
    Average Monthly Lead Time = Lead Time / 30 days.
    Safety Stock Units = Average Monthly Usage x Average Monthly Lead Time x Safety Allowance Percentage (result is stored in existing field in prod_warehouse table)
    ROP = Average Monthly Usage x Average Monthly Lead Time + Safety Stock Units (result is stored in existing field in prod_warehouse table)
    EOQ = Square root of [(24 x R Factor x Average Monthly Usage) / ((K Factor / 100) x Primary Supplier's Landed Cost of primary supplier converted to stocking UOM)] (result is stored in existing field in prod_warehouse table)

    Top

  66. How can I print a list of raw materials that are on a kit?
    A raw material listing can be printed from : Inventory > Reports and Inquiries... > BOM Reports > BOM Explosion Printing. Enter the info needed, then click on Print, then TAG the item, and click Print again to get the list.

    Top

  67. I am viewing my movement and/or sales analysis reports and it is missing information. Why?
    It sounds like you need to rebuild the Sales Analysis files. Sales Analysis files will go out of sync if you have problems posting Invoice registers, since the invoice register update writes to the sales analysis files. A sales analysis rebuild is also required if you have performed any kind of customer code change, product code change, product line change etc.
    Movement might disappear if someone was rebuilding sales analysis and it did not finish normally. The sales analysis rebuild takes a long time, and if interrupted will clear all movement and not rebuild it.

    Top

  68. Is there a way to control the default re-order method on new inventory items that are created?
    It’s actually controlled through the product line setup. However the product line default is overwritten if you have a default record entered in the Warehouse replenishment program that matches the item being entered. (ie record for the particular product line or a record for ALL product lines) Then in this case, the record flag in the program is used instead of the product line default.

    Top

  69. Why is it that users are able to change the cost field when entering a supplier RA?
    The ability to change the cost can be controlled by going to: Inventory > Inventory Master Files > Transaction Type and modifying the details for the type R/S and setting the field called 'Allow Cost Change' to 1.Not in Effect, 2.Allow(NoAvgCostAdjst), 3.Disallow, or 4.Allow(AdjustAvgCost).

    Top

  70. There is a flag in the Supplier Info screen in the Inventory Master called 'Price Update Flag'. What is it for?
    It tracks if the last Supplier Price Update for the supplier included this product for price update or not. If not ticked it did not if is ticked on it did.
    It is also used with BR SO32 (Warning in quote/order entry if supplier price not updated), if enabled this will display a warning in Sales Order/Quote Entry if the Last Supplier List Price was not updated (flag is not ticked) for a particular product.


    The RESET button works as follows: if the Price Update Flag is ON, then the RESET button is grayed out. The only time that the RESET button is available is if the price update flag is OFF. In that situation the reset button can be used to run on the flag to stop the wrning in order entry due to BR so 32. However once you do this, then the reset button cannot be modified again, until such time as another price update is done and the flag is once again turned Off by the system.

    Top

  71. In the Product Line Master, there is a prompt for GL for Commission Revenue. What is this for?
    Commission Revenue field in the Product Line Master File is tied to Business Rule SO16 (Sales agent commission active). When the BR is ON, the field will appear, and when the BR is OFF, the field will not appear.

    Top

  72. How does supplier consignment affect the inventory and other GL accounts?
    See attached document for examples and explanations.
    Document: Consignment Inventory Processing Procedure.pdf

    Top

  73. What is the formula to determine what products to include in a cycle count?
    First the product set is determine based on products defined from sales history records with sort id=Z1and with non-zero quantities of units, and non-zero onhand quantity in product warehouse ,and have an item status indifferent from 'To Be Deleted' and should be within the ranges entered from the screen.
    Then from that product set the number of products entered by the user to include in the count is picked based on a sort order of:
    - sst_units_qty in DESCENDING order
    - whs
    - prod_id.
    - prodline_id

    Top

  74. Is there a way to change products' reorder method from Min/Max to EOQ/ROP other than doing them individually?
    Inventory > Global Changes... > Update Reorder Fields:
    Access to this menu item is controlled by user right UPRM (Update Prod Reorder Method).
    The program will set all product-warehouse records to the values selected if they meet the range
    criteria. Currently it will zero out EOQ & ROP if switching to Min/Max or Min & Max if switching to EOQ/ROP, but, in May, 2012, a SID (25664) was entered to prevent this counter-productive behaviour.
    Can also be used to set the product_supplier default lead time if lead time control is manual.

    Top

  75. In the Product Master file, there is a checkbox labelled 'Back Order'. What does this do?
    According to the investigation on sid 21131 - this field has no functionality linked to it at the moment.

    Top

  76. What is the difference between Inventory > Global Changes > Update Reorder Fields and Inventory > Global Changes > Whs Replenishment Settings?
    The program, Inventory > Global Changes > Warehouse Replenishment Settings, allows you to easily adjust all the product warehouses records that have reorder method of EOQ/ROP, and a control method of Automatic already set. It also is where the system picks up the defaults for reorder method in the warehouses when you enter a new product code. You can't change existing product warehouse reorder methods with this program.
    The program, Inventory > Global Changes > Update Reorder Fields, allows you to change reorder method and associated fields for existing products based on filters picked.


    Top

  77. I am unsuccessfuly trying to delete a supplier record from Supplier Info screen in Product Code Lookup as it says there are open PO's found, yet I have no open PO's with the item. Why?
    The conditions for the system to allow you to delete a supplier record is that the item can't be found on any open PO. So, if you have the item on a PO and the 'balance to come' is zero, and if the PO is still open, you will still not be able to delete the supplier record. You will have to wait until the PO is closed, either manually or after all other items are received to be able to delete the supplier record.

    Top

  78. Once a physical inventory has been initialized, can sales transactions be entered? If so, how does it affect inventory?
    Once a Physical Inventory has been initialized, it is not recommended that you process transactions affecting inventory (shipping, receiving, transfers, ...).
    Processing during a Physical Inventory Count can result in errors of the type outlined in the following example:
    - a product has an OnHand quantity of 200 at time of initialization;
    - after initialization, a sales order for 25 of that product is confirmed;
    - the product now has an OnHand quantity of 175;
    - a quantity of 173 (2 less than currently in the sytem) of that product is counted in the warehouse;
    - users may expect a negative adjustment of 2 (175 - 173);
    - but, system will post a negative adjustment of 27 (200 - 173);
    - resulting in an OnHand quantity of 148 (175 - 27) instead of the counted quantity of 173.
    Therefore to correct for this the count you enter would need to be adjusted for the 25 removed since the initialization. So since you counted 173 you have to add back 25 and enter a count of 198. The Count Variance will then calculate as -2.

    Top

  79. How do I use the information on the Inventory Product Balancing Report?
    See attached example.
    Document: Inventory Product Balancing Report, how to read it.pdf

    Top

  80. How do I use the Inv Transaction by Register report to help me find out why my inventory won't balance?
    See attached document.
    Document: Inventory Transactions by Register, how to use it.pdf

    Top

  81. I am trying to do a warehouse transfer and it tells me I have used an invalid account but won't allow me to change it. What can I do?
    Check that you have a valid In -Transit GL account setup in the warehouse master. See attached.
    Document: Warehouse Transfer GL account invalid.pdf

    Top

  82. How do I print the Warehouse Transfer Report to show me outstanding transfer at a point in time, so I can reconcile my In-Transit GL control accounts?
    You will need to print 2 reports and add the results to balance to the In-Transit GL accounts by warehouse. Keeping in mind the GL In-Transit is posted to the From Warehouse branch in the GL, for both the transfer and the transfer receipt.

    See attached for instructions.
    Document: Inventory In-Transit balancing.pdf

    Top

  83. How do I get my images to appear completely (without cropping) on the main product screen?
    The image preview pane in the product screen uses a Magic viewing option called 'Scaled to Fill'. This scales the display of the image to a size where it fills the width of the viewing area. Depending on the ratio of width to height of the original image, this may result in the bottom of the image being cropped from display.
    The viewing area on the product screen has an approximate ratio of 1.64:1 (5 X 3) so if your original images are near that ratio (or are wider than they are tall) they should appear in full.

    Top

  84. How does the program Update Standard Cost with Landed located in: Installation > Reset Program work?
    This program will update the Standard cost of inventory items to be the same as the Primary supplier's landed cost. This program looks for Primary Supplier record, but it does not check for default UOM. As a result it picks up all UOMs for the vendor, and sorts and updates alphabetically.

    Top

  85. Can I modify the stock type of KITS to be regular stock items?
    If the items are set up as Built to Order kits, the change can’t be made. Once items are identified as Built to order kits, they can’t be changed to anything else.
    However, if the items are set up as Assembled items, they can be changed under the following conditions, after all registers have been updated: none on any order; none on hand.

    Top

  86. How does the program Map Import, located in: Inventory > Global Changes, work?
    Please see attached documentation
    Document: Map Product Import.pdf

    Top

  87. What is the difference between an A and a B kit?
    A 'B' or Built to Order kit can never be stocked as the kit. It is intended to be built from available BOM items directly when entered on a sales order. It will write a backorder record for the entered qty required to fill the kit backorder from BOM items. For example, if your order was for 15 of kitA, and you have 2 of material A and 10 of material B available, it will take 2 of each and back order 13 for each as it can only build 2 of the kit. Then if you purchase based on the backorder links in PPP the system will want to order 13 of material B and you only really need another 3 to make 15 of KitA. So linking doesn't work great for B items. However the raw materials needed are committed and if they are products that are purchased for stock they will purchase to fill the kits also.

    Assembled Items are stocked, the raw materials are not committed when a sales order is entered, they will write a back order to PPP file for the total backordered of the kit on the sales order also, but only if the kit inventory details flag for purchase method is set to Raw Materials. To get these to purchase enough raw materials to build the kits, you must manually adjust your stocking requirements on the raw materials. If the Purchase Method, is set to Assembled, PPP will order the finished product and when received it will flush to the sales order. If PO for is for A item and flag is set to Raw Materials and it will not flush to SO but will print on the back order flush report to advise not flushed.


    Also for Assembled Items there is a Production Ticket business rule that allows you to commit the requirement for the raw materials and relieve it when you build the item. This requires training to use and the BR should not be turned on and off as data corruption can result.

    Top

  88. How does the program Customer List Price Update work in the Inventory > Processing submenu?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Customer List Price Update.pdf

    Top

  89. How does the Dangerous Goods flag work? And how does the Dangerous Goods Default Freight Surcharge flag in company setup work?
    See attached document for information.
    Document: Dangerous Goods Processing.pdf

    Top

  90. How does VMI Processing work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: VMI processing.pdf

    Top

  91. How do UPC codes in the Product Master File work?
    The hardware is essentially just a scanner that you can pick up at Staples and plug into an available USB port of your local PC (doesn’t have to be the server). The scanner is essentially just another keyboard.
    In Streamline, go to Inventory > Master Files > Product Code Lookup, find an item and select Details. From within the item details screen, find the UPC Codes field and park in it and scan the items bar code into that field. What happens next is that an alias code is created for that item based on the UPC code (as long as business rule INV41 (Auto-populate product alias tables) is ON).
    One caveat to this process, for items that have more than one selling UOM, this process will only work for the first selling UOM.

    Top

  92. How does the program 'Update List Price to BOM Cost' work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: 20445 - Utility to manage landed cost of type A items - release.pdf

    Top

  93. How do I assign a filename that is UNC (Universal Naming Convention) compliant?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: UNC Naming Locations.pdf

    Top

  94. How do Templates and Configured stock types work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: White Paper for Product Configurator.pdf

    Top

  95. What transactions affect the average weighted cost for an item?
    -Stock Receipts
    -Inventory Receipts - done through inventory transactions ( not qty adjustments, just the inventory receipts)
    -Cost Adjustments - also done through inventory transactions
    -Credit memo for stock returns
    -Transfers - will update cost in the receiving warehouse
    -Purchase Price Variance Adjustments - if using this feature

    Top

  96. In the Template Import program there is a button called 'Blank Fields'. How does this work?
    The Template Import program allows you to clear or wipe out existing data on fields, using the Blank Field button. Go to Inventory > Global Changes > Import Data > Import Products. You will see a button called 'Blank Field' You enter the selected character that you want to use to indicate that the field will be CLEARED. For example, if you want to clear your Trade List field, you can enter a character such as ^ into this screen. Then on the template, under the TRADE LIST field, you populate the records with the same character ^. The system will recognize that ^ indicated that you wish to clear the data. Use this with caution as it will remove all information from all fields that contains the special character. Please note that this feature does not exist in the map import routine, it only applies to the Template Import Program.

    Top

  97. What does the field 'Spec Doc' do in the Inventory Master File?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Spec Doc field in product Master.pdf

    Top

  98. How do Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) work in the Inventory Master File?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: MSD Sheets - User Documentation.pdf

    Top

  99. What tables are updated by the Inventory Statistics Refresh program?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Inventory Statistics Refresh tables affected.pdf

    Top

  100. Is there a way to update the list price of type A items from the total landed cost of their associated bills of materials?
    There is a program for this that can be purchased.
    Document: 20445 - Utility to manage landed cost of type A items - release.pdf

    Top

  101. What cost does the Valuation Report use, the Warehouse file cost or the cost history?
    Valuation takes warehouse average cost
    for current reports run on the day, but it uses average cost history for reports run with an as at date, and backdated.
    Under normal circumstances current warehouse average cost must be equal to last
    record in average cost history. However if they do go out of sync, it will cause issues when backdating.

    Top

  102. Why is the Critical Flag in the Inventory Master File ghosted?
    Critical Item flag is only enabled when the item is flagged as Lot Controlled.

    Top

  103. What is the difference between a 'Special Order' item and a 'Non-Stock' item?
    The main difference is that a special order item can only be created on the fly from Order Entry or Quote entry -so directly when there is an order or quote for it. Whereas Non stock can be created without an order or quote through Product Master.
    Another difference is that there is a flag in the Planned Purchase Order screen to include Special Order Items separately.

    Top

  104. What are the conditions to be able to delete a supplier Record from a product?
    System checks for open, closed, as well as received po records, and if any of these are found, the supplier record can't be deleted. We used to allow it at one point (very old version), and found it was causing data issues throughout the system, if you were to re-open, or do a cancel stock receipt as the record would then be missing, therefore it was prevented.

    Top

  105. Using my own data, is there a way to confirm EOQ/ROP calculations or simulate EOQ/ROP calculations under varous scenarios?
    An Excel spreadsheet 'EOQ_ROP_Calculations.xls' has been created for testing EOQ/ROP Calculations under varying scenarios. It has so far proven extremely useful for confirming existing calculations or for seeing the effects of single, multiple, minor or major rule changes on existing products using real data.
    This spreadsheet is attached to this FAQ, but the spreadsheet is fairly complex so a document detailing its usage is attached to the next FAQ.
    Document: EOQ_ROP_Calculations_v2.2.xls

    Top

  106. I am trying to use the Excel spreadsheet 'EOQ_ROP_Calculations.xls'. Is there a document detailing its usage?
    An Excel spreadsheet 'EOQ_ROP_Calculations.xls' has been created for testing EOQ/ROP Calculations under varying scenarios. It has so far proven extremely useful for confirming existing calculations or for seeing the effects of single, multiple, minor or major rule changes on existing products using real data.
    This spreadsheet is attached to the previous FAQ and is fairly complex so a document detailing its usage has also been created and is attached to this FAQ.
    Document: Using EOQ_ROP_Calculations spreadsheet.pdf

    Top

  107. What are the formulae for EOQ, ROP, Safety Units and Average Monthly Usage?
    The formulae, parameters and, of course, the calculated results for EOQ, ROP, Safety Units and Average Monthly Usage will vary under different scenarios.
    These different scenarios are controlled by the following:
    - Business Rules;
    - Modules;
    - inventory settings.
    Document: EOQ_ROP Formulae2.pdf

    Top

  108. Is 'Supplier Lead Time in Days' field based on Calendar Days, or Working Days, as in 5 days per week for example?
    All product and supplier lead time fields are based on calendar days.
    The customer and shipto lead time fields are based on business or working days.
    On Sales Orders, the shipping dates, for stocked items, are calculated by adding the customer (or shipto) lead time to the order date while skipping weekend days.

    Top

  109. What are the conditions that the system looks for when determining if a suppler info record can be deleted?
    The system checks for open, closed, as well as received po records, and if any of these are found, the supplier record can't be deleted. We used to allow it at one point, and found it was causing data issues throughout the system, if you were to re-open, or do cancel stock receipt as the record would then be missing, therefore it was prevented. The message is incorrect as it only refers to 'open po's but in fact is looking for more than just that.

    Top

  110. Inventory > Processing > Convert Non Stock to Stock items, how does this work?
    The report compiles the information based on the following:
    1. The number of times ordered is truly the number of ORDER times, not the number of sales;
    2. A 'hit' for point 1 is only registered for revision '0' of an order and when the order quantity >= 1. Therefore, if an item is added to an order after the original revision then it will NOT be picked up as a 'times ordered', nor will it be picked up if the quantity is between 0 and 1. Also, as a result of only looking at revision '0', backorders are NOT considered a hit.

    Top

  111. What do the Transfer Committed and Transfer On Order buttons do in the inventory warehouse screen?
    See attached document.
    Document: Transfers committed before confirmed.pdf

    Top

  112. Production Items Processing Overview
    Please see attached document.
    Document: White Paper for Production Item Processing.pdf

    Top

  113. What do the different Product Statuses do?
    Items flagged as "to be deleted" are prevented from being entered onto new orders. It's basically a status that is used for items that you no longer want to carry, but you can't delete; because history exits. PPP will not purchase under any circumstances.

    Obsolete items can still be entered onto a new order.
    Typically the process is that you mark an item Obsolete, until all inventory has been sold, then you can make mark it To be deleted. PPP will purchase for backorders but ignores Min/Max and EOQ/ROP.


    Inactive items can still be entered onto orders - it is used when you still have inventory you want to sell. PPP will purchase for backorders but ignores Min/Max and EOQ/ROP.




    Top

  114. Why are items missing from the No Sales since report?
    When running the report Sorted by Warehouse, items that have never been purchased before will not be picked up on the report, regardless of the Last Sold Date. You need to run the report sorted by Product in order to get these items to be picked up.
    Reference SID 20196.

    Top

  115. In the Average Cost History, there are system defined Transaction Types. What does each represent?
    TRV - Transfer Received
    CCO - Cancel Customer Order (cancel shipment)
    CSR - Cancel stock receipts.

    Top

  116. How is the Average Monthly Usage calculation affected by the Exceptional Order field?
    See attached document.
    Document: Exceptional Orders.pdf

    Top

  117. We use the multi company warehouse display and not all the companies are showing, how can I fix this?
    Confirm that BR INV16 (Display multiple companies' warehouse info) has not been turned off in company 01.
    Then in the Company Setup > Company Info, screen click on the 'Inv. Display Setup' button and make sure the setup looks correct.

    There is a 'Rebuild Current Company' button on this screen that should correct this.

    Top

  118. What is the maximum number of characters that will print on forms for the Description fields?
    In terms of printing the Description on forms, most places are designed to READ the full 250 characters of description but the actual display or print will be based on the physical size allotted on each individual form. This is also variable depending on what letters are printing. For example 'MMMMMMMM' and 'iiiiiiii' are each 8 characters in length but the 'i's take up less space so you get more of those characters printing on a form than you would using 'M'.

    Top

  119. What is the purpose of the 'Not Stocked' flag in the Product's Warehouse and the Warehouse screens?
    See attached document.
    Document: Not Stocked Flag.pdf

    Top

  120. How does the 'Print Raw Material on Forms' flag in Product Line Master work?
    There is a 'Print Raw Material on Forms' flag in the Product Line master file.
    This flag applies ONLY to the the raw materials in a Bill of Materials.
    It does NOT apply to the Bill of Materials item itself.

    This means that if the raw materials list is printed on a form by virtue of one of the following business rules:
    FORMS152 - O/P - Print raw materials list on quotes;
    FORMS153 - O/P - Print raw materials list on orders;
    FORMS154 - O/P - Print raw materials list on invoices;
    FORMS155 - O/P - Print raw materials list on creidit notes;
    FORMS171 - O/P - Print raw materials list on picking slip;
    FORMS172 - O/P - Print raw materials list on packing slip;
    then only those raw materials belonging to product lines with 'Print Raw Material on Forms' enabled will appear on the form.

    Top

  121. What User Right is needed to grant a user access to change the BIN location for an item?
    A user requires RTBLM (Right to Bin Location Maintenance) in order to be able to modify the Bin locations from within the Bin Location menu option located in: Inventory > Master Files > Product Code Lookup. However a user who does not have this right, but has RTMII (Right to Mofiy Inventory Item) is still able to modify the Bin Locations from within the Warehouse Button located in Product Code Lookup.

    Top

  122. Why is the Search feature not finding all my items?
    There are 2 main reasons why the search feature does not always find all items.

    First, the search file is built based on the 'words' of the code & description.
    The words are determined by the location of spaces within the text. There is no provision for search partial words so when a word is surrounded by quotation marks or other symbols these characters are considered part of the word and must be included as part of the search string.
    Note: The search WILL return partial matches only when those matches are the beginning of the word.

    The second issue is specific to reserved characters.
    Wildcard characters such as the asterisk and question mark impart different behavior when SQL scans the data which is why we do not recommend using these characters in descriptions and specifically RESTRICT these characters from being used in the product code.

    Top

  123. EOQ/ROP Calculation Methodologies Overview.
    Please see attached document.
    Document: White Paper for EOQ_ROP Calculation Methodologies.pdf

    Top

  124. Does the system track Quantities by Bin Location?
    There is an Optional Module available for purchase. Please see attachment for Specifications. Please email IDMsupport@tecsys.com to request a quote or further info.
    Document: Quantity by Bin Location - Release.pdf

    Top

  125. What is the Formula used for PPV adjustments?
    Please see attached document for the formula used.
    Document: What is the formula used in PPV adjustments.pdf

    Top

  126. What does the Post G/L by Product Line flag in the Prod Line master do, and what does the post by branch flag in the Currency master do?
    See attached examples of how this flags affect the Sales posting.

    Top

  127. Is there a costing overview that explains what the different costs are for?
    Document is attached.
    Document: Costing Overview.pdf

    Top

  128. Is there a way to link stock Purchase Orders for raw materials to production tickets?
    There is no way to link stock PO's for raw materials to production tickets.
    The work around or compromise on this one, is that the PO Receiving flush report, tells you the production tickets in need for products you just received. It does this automatically on its own. So you can call up each Production Ticket in Po Maint and reserve the stock to them before others steal it.

    Top

  129. What right allows someone to delete inventory items from Product Master Screen?
    The right that controls that DELETE button in the Product Master Screen is: RTBDP (Right to Batch Delete Products). This is the same user right that also controls the batch program to 'remove unwanted products'

    Top

  130. How does the Pack Size field in the Product Master File work?
    It works in conjunction with Business Rule SO27 (Warning in order entry if selling in non-packsize multiples).
    This business rule is dependent upon multiple selling UOMs being set up.
    Here is what it does...
    Suppose, that a product is set up with selling UOMs of EA, PR (2 EA) and DZ (12 EA).
    If the user enters 27 EA, the system will suggest 26 EA or 28 EA, to prevent the breaking of the next UOM (PR) in the hierarchy.
    If the user enters 14 PR, the system will suggest 12 PR or 18 PR, to prevent the breaking of the next UOM (DZ) in the hierarchy.

    Top

  131. Do you have a processing flowchart for Assembled Items (Type-A Kits)?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: Assembled Items Flowchart.pdf

    Top

  132. Do you have a processing flowchart for Built to Order Items (Type-B Kits)?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: Built to Order Items Flowchart.pdf

    Top

  133. Inventory > Processing > Flag Special Order Item, how does this program work?
    It takes items that have a stock type of 'Special Order Item' and changes the status code on them to 'To Be Deleted' It allows you to enter an age of inventory to determine what its picking to update to 'To Be Deleted' The criteria for selecting products in this program are as follows: The product code is scanned for products that are type 'Z' - special order item with a status of 'A'- Active. Additionally, it only looks at products with ZERO on hand and ZERO committed. The Age of Inventory is based on the product's creation date (field pr_setup_date in the table). So if you created a list with a date of (January 31st) and entered the age as 20, the system would scan the product table as indicated above, and if the setup date was before January 11th then that product would be added to the list.

    Top

  134. Why am I receiving error about an Inconsistency in UOM Conversion Factors, and how do I fix it?
    Please review the attachment.
    Document: Why am I receiving an error about uom conversion factor.pdf

    Top

  135. How to create a new Supplier Info Record?
    Please review attachment.
    Document: How to create a new supplier info record.pdf

    Top

  136. What date range should I use when running the ABC Classification program?
    The date range to use for ABC is dependent on how often you want to re-classify your products for a given warehouse. The classification calculated for any given product will impact the EOQ (for that product) as K factor and safety units are part of the classification code. You need to determine how often you want the classification to be calculated, monthly, quarterly, semi-yearly, yearly, etc.
    For example, if you wanted to calculate ABC monthly then your starting month would be the same as your ending month and would typically be the last full month of processing - we're in March and you would recalculate the ABC based on what happened from the beginning of February to the end of February. If you wanted to calculate quarterly, you would set the starting month to the beginning of your fiscal year (first month) to the end of the third month, for the second quarter, you would set your starting month to the first month of the fiscal year to the end of the 6th month (etc.) OR you might set it from the beginning of the 4th month to the end of the 6th month (depending on how much activity (movement) you wanted to include).

    Top

  137. What is available in the software to accomodate Cribmaster processing?
    We have an optional Cribmaster module available for purchase. Please review the attached release document and if you are interested in a quote, please contact support.
    Document: Cribmaster - Functional Spec - Rev7.1 - General.pdf

    Top

  138. When updating a file from New Supplier List By Product, what controls the field "Update customer List price with Supplier List?
    This field is enabled if the New Customer List UOM1, 2 or 3 has an amt of 0. Otherwise the field is disabled if any of these have a value entered more than zero. If the uom's contains a value of zero, then this flag is used to update the customer list to be the same as the supplier list, otherwise if its not zero, then it assumes you will use the values you entered into the unit of measures.

    Top

  139. Notes button in product master - is there a length restriction?
    The system allows up to 796 characters.

    Top

  140. What does 'Inventory Transaction Error' on item XXXX tell me?
    The most common reason for this error is that there is a setup issue on the selling Unit of Measure conversion factor or insufficient decimal places set on the item for the units. Example, if you have a selling UOM of IC = 0.10 MC and you have zero decimal places for units, and you sell a quantity of 16 IC on an order, then the system will result in the 'Inventory Transaction Error' since it cannot calculate the decimals. In this situation, increasing the decimal place for units will correct this.

    Top

  141. What are the conditions to be able to delete a Warehouse?
    The program looks to see if the warehouse has been used on Quotes, Orders, purchase orders and then looks at the on hand and checks if there is any on hand inventory. It does not look at manual inventory transactions so if you transferred a quantity into a warehouse and then out again, the on hand would be zero and you would be able to delete the warehouse even though there is a transaction against it. The assumption here is that we don't validate the warehouse on an inventory transaction inquiry screen or report.

    Top

  142. Why are values missing from the Stock Aging Report?
    Assuming you have verified that there is an Average Cost against the item in question, if the item is picking up the quantity but just not the cost, then one reason for this could be that the item is a converted record. The cost for Converted records/Manual entries are not picked up in the Stock Aging Report.
    Sid 26426 as a reference.

    Top

  143. Is there a way to import descriptions for multi languages?
    The map import currently does not support this. It is only designed to import descriptions into Descriptions 1 and 2 for language 1 (English). A programmer can perform this import for you, however this is a billable service.

    Top

  144. How do we restrict access from modifying the Inventory Warehouse screen?
    Affective in Versions 10.2.3.0000 and higher is a new company specific user right located in: Company Setup > User Maintenance > User Comps button > Specific Rights.

    The new user right is DMIPW.

    Previously in older versions prior to 10.2.3.0000, users with the right RTMII (Right to Modify Inventory Item) were able to modify ALL inventory related tables For Example: Inventory, Supplier, Substitutes, Associated
    Items, Superseded Items, Publishing, Aliases, Warehouse Inventory.

    Now in version 10.2.3.0000 and higher with this new right, users with RTMII (Right to Modify Inventory Item) can be DENIED the access to modify information on the Warehouse Inventory screen, while still retaining the ability to modify other inventory related tables.

    Top

  145. How does the Populate Alias Table program work?
    The Inventory > Global Changes > Populate Alias Table, program will populate the alias table from the source selected on the screen. It just writes the records, one-time, based on what is in the source. And if you run it again, it would write new records; duplicates would naturally be skipped because of the key structure of the alias table.
    IN41 is irrelevant to the program's function. If for example you have always had IN41 turned on then technically the program wouldn't write any new records because they would already be there, unless someone manually deleted aliases from the table.
    There is no clearing of existing data, nor does the alias table keep any sort of indicator as to where the alias came from.

    Top

  146. What are my options when a stocking Uom is incorrect, but cannot be changed due to history?
    Stocking Unit Of Measure cannot be changed once there is history on a product.

    You have two options:

    Option #1) Use the program to change inventory master codes to rename the existing product code to something else ie - add OLD to the end of it. Then mark it obsolete. This will enable you to reuse the same product code and re setup it up again. Once you rebuild sales analysis the history will however move over to the OLD part, so you will not be able to see the history on the new part.

    Option 2) System supports up to three selling units of measure. It is always recommended that your stocking uom be setup as the smallest uom available otherwise you end up with fractional qty's and could cause further issues for you down the road. You would need to ensure that your Decimal Places for units is set high enough to accommodate any factional qty's that might occur as a result of breaking a pack.
    You will also need to ensure your pricing, reflects this ie - ensure that the price per CS is valued properly compared to your price per EA. Remember the costing will be based on your stocking uom.

    Pack Size Adjustments on the supplier info screen is another area that can't be modified when there is history. You need to create a new supplier info record. You can create variation of a uom such as EA1 for example.
    Document: Stocking Uom Changes.pdf

    Top

  147. What table contains the Spec Doc info that's located in the product master page?
    The spec document link is found in the table prod_images. There is a field called 'prim_prodspec_filename'. This table is linked to the product table via prim_prod_id and prim_prodline_id.
    We only keep the link to the specification document, not the document's content since this could be word, PDF, Excel or anything.

    Top

  148. What do Substitutes, Associated Prods and Superseded buttons do?
    See info found below.
    1. SUBSTITUTES
    A 'Substitute' screen will appear whereby the user may F5 in the 'Substitute Product' field and select the appropriate 'Substitute' product. The system will backfill the 'Description' field. More than 1 'substitute' may be added to the list by using the arrow key or the F4 key. The user may also delete items from this list. Once correct/complete, EXIT from the 'Substitutes' screen to return to the 'Product Master'. These 'Substitute' products come into play in Quote Entry and Order Entry under the SUBSTITUTE button. The user has the option to select a 'Substitute' product if there's not enough stock for the original product.

    2. ASSOCIATED PRODS
    Associated Products are items that are affiliated to the original item. For example, if a sales rep were to sell an item such as a flashlight, you would want them to also recommend to the customer that they also purchase batteries, an extra lamp, etc. at the same time which would increase the sale, etc. 'Associated Products' is where you would set these items up. To do this, F5 in the 'Associated Product' field and select an item. The system will backfill the 'Description' field. Next, enter the 'Quantity Required' of the 'Associated Product'. To add additional lines of associated products, use the ADD LINE button, or the arrow key, or the F4 key. The user may also use the buttons along the bottom of the screen to MODIFY or DELETE an associated product from the list. Once complete and correct, use the EXIT button.

    3. SUPERSEDED

    Top

  149. How do Substitutes, Associated Prods, and Superseded items work?
    1. SUBSTITUTES

    A 'Substitute' screen will appear whereby the user may F5 in the 'Substitute Product' field and select the appropriate 'Substitute' product. The system will backfill the 'Description' field. More than 1 'substitute' may be added to the list by using the arrow key or the F4 key. The user may also delete items from this list. Once correct/complete, EXIT from the 'Substitutes' screen to return to the 'Product Master'. These 'Substitute' products come into play in Quote Entry and Order Entry under the SUBSTITUTE button. The user has the option to select a 'Substitute' product if there's not enough stock for the original product.

    2. ASSOCIATED PRODS

    Associated Products are items that are affiliated to the original item. For example, if a sales rep were to sell an item such as a flashlight, you would want them to also recommend to the customer that they also purchase batteries, an extra lamp, etc. at the same time which would increase the sale, etc. 'Associated Products' is where you would set these items up. To do this, F5 in the 'Associated Product' field and select an item. The system will backfill the 'Description' field. Next, enter the 'Quantity Required' of the 'Associated Product'. To add additional lines of associated products, use the ADD LINE button, or the arrow key, or the F4 key. The user may also use the buttons along the bottom of the screen to MODIFY or DELETE an associated product from the list. Once complete and correct, use the EXIT button.

    3. SUPERSEDED

    Top

  150. What are all the areas of the software that Standard Cost can be updated from?
    Standard Costs can be updated through the following programs:
    -Manually through Inventory > Master Files > Product Master > Product Code Lookup > Warehouses > Details. Park on the Standard Cost field and enter the cost.
    -From a change being made to the Supplier Info Landed Cost record.
    -Through the 'Adjust Standard Cost Program' located in: Inventory > Global Changes.
    -Through the 'Import Changes to Standard Cost program' located in: Inventory > Global Changes.
    -Through the 'Update Standard Cost with Landed Cost program' located in: Installation > Reset Programs.
    -Through 'Map Import Program' only when a landed cost change is made
    -Through 'New Supplier List By Product' located in: Inventory > Processing
    -Through updating the system exchange rate

    Top

  151. Is there a way to see products that are missing costs?
    Yes - Under Inventory > Utilities > Missing Product Info report

    Top

  152. Is there an audit for changes to the Min/max levels?
    See attachment for documentation.
    Document: Min Max audit.pdf

    Top

  153. How are the Current and Last Year fields in the Supplier Info screen Updated?
    See attached document.
    Document: How are the current and Last Year fields in supplier info updated.pdf

    Top

  154. How does the Export Template Program work?
    Documentation attached.
    Document: Export Template.pdf

    Top

  155. How does the UDF program work in the Inventory Master Files?
    See attachment.
    Document: 27687 Product UDF.pdf

    Top

  156. What is the excel file layout format for source file for V-Click?
    see attached.
    Document: V-Click excel file layout.pdf

    Top

  157. Is there an overview of how V-click works?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: White Paper for V-Click.pdf

    Top

  158. When I print MSD Sheets from Streamline, I am receiving an error telling me I have no access?
    Follow these steps to fix the issue for each user:
    1. From Acrobat Reader, select Edit > Preferences.
    2. Select Security (Enhanced) on the left pane.
    3. Uncheck the Enable Protected Mode at startup box.
    4. Select Yes to the prompt about being sure about making this change.
    5. Click OK.

    Top

  159. Why is the system rounding the average cost on a sale?
    Here is an example of the system rounding the average cost to $2.00 when it should be $1.89per unit and an example of when this can happen and why: It happens when the stocking UOM of EA for example is 2 decimals, and to convert cost at UOM of C which is for example $1.89/100=.0189 which rounded to 2 decimals for EA it becomes .02 cost for each. Since everything is taken back to stocking UOM this math is done and then extended by multiplying by 100. To avoid this rounding, you would need to have a stocking UOM set to 4 decimal places and then it will round EA to .0189 per EA.

    Top

  160. Inventory > Master File > Product Code Lookup > Supplier Info > how does system calculate the freight %? It does seem to be accurate to me?
    The calculation is as follows: it takes the FOB amount and calculates the exchange on it first, then it calculates the freight on FOB + exchange.

    Top

  161. In the Map Import program, what field do I use to update the value to the Pack Size?
    The field that updates the value of the pack size in the Supplier Info Screen is: uom conv factor.

    Top

  162. How does the Discrepancy Count feature work in Physical Inventory
    Please see attached Release document
    Document: 23646 - Release Doc.pdf

    Top

  163. My Product Descriptions show each morning in a different language than I would like. Is there a way to have it show in that language permanently?
    Yes - the default for the language is set in the Company Setup > User Maintenance screen for each user. If the language is set to English, all descriptions will be shown in English. If the user modifies the language in the product master file from English to any other language, it will revert back to the user maintenance setting when the user logs off and logs back into the software.

    Top

  164. Is there an overview document for the Visual Streamline Product Publishing program?
    Please see attached documentation
    Document: White Paper for Product Publishing.pdf

    Top

  165. How does Lot and Serial Processing work?
    See attached White Paper on Lot and Serial Processing.
    Document: White Paper for Lot and Serial Processing.pdf

    Top

  166. How do I query UDF codes linked to products?
    You need to join prudfv_prod_recid to pr_record_id in the products table. This is an internal unique identifier in the product table which is assigned by the database.

    Top

  167. How to fix a negative VMI quantity?
    You can fix your own neagative VMI quantity. See attached.
    Document: How to fix negative VMI quantities.pdf

    Top

  168. Inventory > Warehouse Transfers > Transfer Product, how do I select a serial or lot number when confirming the transfer, for a committed transfer when there is a serial/lot on hand ?
    In order to be able to confirm a committed transfer for a serial/lot item, you must go into the detail of the transfer, click on the file folder next to the UOM field and select it form there.

    Top

  169. Why are transfers not being created when the PO is linked to a custosmer sales order for another warehouse?
    There is a flag in the AR customer master file called 'Direct Ship from Main WHSE' When this flag is ON for the customer, the system does not create a warehosue transfer for any po's received that are linked to customer orders for that same customer.

    Top

  170. What is the calculation used in the Average lead time in the Prod warehouse screen?
    The average lead day is calculated from the date that the purchase order line for that product was created (or the committed date of the product transfer) to the date of receipt in the warehouse.

    No there is no way to manually manipulate this field.

    Top



Job Costing

  1. How do I issue a credit note for a Job, but not have it affect the customer's account?
    You can enter a credit note in Sales Order Processing and as long as you include the Job code in the header it will not apply the invoice against the customers account, it posts it to a job billings clearing account instead of the AR control account. It posts it exactly the same way it would have posted the original parts invoice but rather reverses it.

    Top

  2. Where do I find a list of invoices that are linked to a particular Job?
    Go to: Job Costing > Job Maintenance > Find the job code, then click on the modify details, then click on the 'Item Summary' button. This will list all the invoices that have been processed against that particular job.

    Top

  3. What is the difference between module and progress billing, and revenue recognition options on a job. What changes with different settings.
    Job cost - Billing Method: Progress Billing, Revenue Updated: Progress Billing:
    SO invoice will write and post:
    SA costs and SA Revenue show
    Customer account not billed
    GL posts: Inventory credit/ Material expense debit
    Job Transaction shows only material expense 2d.
    Job cost - Billing Method: Progress Billing, Revenue Updated: Module Billing:
    SO invoice will write and post:
    SA costs and SA Revenue show
    Customer account not billed
    GL posts: Inventory credit/ Material expense debit/AR over/under(is set in Control file)/ Material Revenue
    Job Transaction shows revenue and material expense with invoice 1d,2d
    Job Cost - Billing Method: Module, Revenue Updated: Module Billing:
    SO invoice will write and post:
    SA cost and SA Revenue Show
    Customer Account billed.
    GL posts: Inventory credit/Material expense debit/Accounts Receivable/Material Revenue
    Job Transaction shows revenue and material expense with invoice posting 1d,2d.

    Top

  4. What accounting methods can I use to realize revenue for Job Costing.
    Process to use to realize revenue at job completion:
    -At the end of each month you would invoice for part orders, labour and other expense incurred against the Jobs worked on during the month.
    -Then make sure all jobs completed in the month are fully invoiced to customers and closed.
    - Run a Job Cost Trail Balance for open jobs only, use this report to determine the total expenses to date.
    - Do a Journal entry to credit these expense accounts and debit a Job Work In Progress asset account and a debit to the job revenue accounts with a credit to a deferred revenue liability account.
    - Then reverse this entry in the following month.



    Process to use to accrue job revenue to each period on a percentage of completion basis:
    - At the end fo each month you would invoice for part orders, labour and other expeses incurred against the Jobs worked on during the month.
    - Then make sure all jobs completed in the month are fully invoiced to customers and closed.
    - Run a job Cost Trial Balance, use this report to analyse the most accurate % completion you can for each open job. Apply this % complete the total sales value to each job to determine the revenue earned for each job.
    - The total revenue earned (per above) less any billings actually made to the job are entered via a GL Entry to credit the appropriate Job Revenue GL account and debit a Job Revenue Accrual asset account. If the total revenue earned is less than the amount actually billed on the job, then the journal entry debits and credits are reversed.
    - Reverse this entry in the following month.

    Top

  5. What is the flow for posting labour against a SWO with a Job when using progress billing methods.
    The flow when using Progress Billing as the billing and revenue update method for the Job.

    1. Hours worked are entered on a task through the SWO, Time Entry button and marked as 'Not Billed'. At this point they will only show as potential billing in the 'Analysis' button for the task. The column 'Actual' uses the employee master rate for 'SWO Cost', and the 'Opportunity Cost' column uses the employee mater 'Job Cost Value', 'Bill Amount' uses the ‘Estimate Labour Rate’ entered on the SWO Task. No GL posting has happened. The SWO Summary button will also show the labour values in the estimate columns, based on time entered before posted.

    2. Service Work Order > Work Order Billing > Billing confirmations, then Invoicing, once you confirm the task it will pick up the hours entered to date to be invoiced on the next “Internal” invoice (to post costs only). You can then Invoice it and print it. At this point nothing is posted yet, but the SWO is marked as in the Confirmation/Invoicing stage and the time is marked as ‘Billed’ in the task’s time entered button. No further time can be entered against it until the current invoice it updated or all is cancelled back to before the confirmation.

    3. Service Work Order > Work Order Billing > Register and Update, once you run the register and update, the costs will post to the actual labour costs on Job, SWO, and GL. You can now view labour costs on the Job or SWO, under the Transactions button. Only costs are posted with the invoice as the Job Cost billing method is Progress Billing, therefore revenue will post when a Progress Bill Invoice is done throught Accounts Receivable > A/R Invoicing> AR Invoices. The labour expense debit is posted to the GL setup in the, Job Cost > Master Files > Job Cost GL Integration, and the credit is posted to the GL account setup in, Company Setup > Control File Maint, SWO tab, Payroll Recovery GL account.

    Top

  6. What does the Progress Billing Flag do when used on a PO?
    When a PO is entered with a Job Number and flagged as a Progress Billing in the header, it does not post to AP Clearing as it is not to be matched. It will post to the AP Over/Under Billed account which is setup in the Control File Maint., Job Cost tab. When you then enter an AP Invoice with a Job Number and flagged as a Progress Billing it will offset this posting by debiting the same account. There is no report to balance this account to, it is up to you to track and reconcile it.

    Top

  7. How do I get do job cost, hold back invoice amounts to stop showing on the AR Tial balance for a job?
    The hold back portion for each invoice will continue to show up on the AR Trail balance, when you sub total by job, until all invoices on the Job are paid off and the job no longer shows up on the report.

    Top

  8. How to release a hold back amount on a progress invoice?
    See attached FAQ.
    Document: How to release holdback on progress invoice.pdf

    Top



Label Printing

  1. I need to have label printing capabilities?
    Please see attached for details.
    Document: Label Printing.pdf

    Top

  2. How can I change the size of my label in the label designer?
    Label sizes can’t be changed once they are initially setup. A new label would have to be created in order to change the size on it.

    Top

  3. Is there currently a way to insert product images into product labels?
    Unfortunately there is not - the field would have be created to allow data binding and that functionality is not there.

    Top

  4. How does the Visual Label Designer Program work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Label Designer - user Documentation.pdf

    Top

  5. Are there any other barcode fonts available that can be loaded into Visual Streamline/Visual Label Designer?
    We have coded in the ability to use Code 128 fonts from IDAutomation; however sites have to purchase those fonts in order to use them. The software also supports UPC/EAN, and code 39.

    Top

  6. To Be Re-used
    To be re-used

    Top

  7. How do I get access to the Visual Label Designer Software?
    If the software has been setup on your site, then each user must follow the steps below to successfully setup the profile for access to the Visual Label Designer Software.

    1) Run the designer application, and go to: File-> Settings (will take a few seconds to come up while it scans the network for SQL instances).
    2) Uncheck "Windows Authentication", and specify "labels_user" for the SQL username, and enter the SQL Password. Please ask your tech support for the SQL password for the SQL server. (user is always "labels_user" and password is site specific)
    3) Enter the name of the SQL server in the SQL instance box, then click or tab to the timeout field. The company dropdown should now be enabled. Select an appropriate company for preview data. If the Name of the SQL server is not known, please check with your Tech support for this information.
    4) Click "OK" to save the changes.
    5) Close and then reopen the designer to pick up the changes.

    Top

  8. Why is an item missing from my product code list within the Label Printing Wizard Program?
    Check to ensure that the item in question has a primary warehouse selected in Product Master > Warehouse screen.

    Top

  9. In the visual Streamline Label Designer, there are two areas for label counts, what does each control?
    The two areas are: label counter object in the toolbox and binding the field. The label count field will always print a fixed value ie: box 1, box 2, box 3 etc... However the counter object will count numbers, thus providing a case count ie: 1 of 5, 2 of 5, 3 of 5 etc….

    Top

  10. Receiving error when printing labels suddenly when it worked before, why?
    Error is: "Label Printing: Execute reader requires an open and available connection. Connection current state is closed"
    If you receive the above error when printing labels when it worked before then the issue is most likely due to the settings being removed from the registry. . There isn't a setup window for the printing settings. Technical team just enters the settings directly into the registry manually, since it only needs to be done at install time, or if you change SQL servers. So if you are seeing this error, and you have not changed SQL servers, then it most likely is a result of a reboot that did not properly load the settings. Email Support so we can get someone from Tech support to enter the missing information into the registry.

    Top

  11. What are the files associated with the Label Printing Routine?
    Here are the files associated with the labeling software.

    C1.Win.C1Command.2.dll
    C1.Win.C1FlexGrid.2.dll
    LabelPrint.dll
    Visual Streamline Designer.exe

    Top

  12. Sometimes the label printing program is very slow, why?
    There are 2 versions of programs in the menu to print labels.
    1. The older and Slower programs are using the label designer engine which is not suitable to handle high amount of data, because the selection combo boxes are downloading all data to display for selection, for example all product codes, and causing the slowdown.
    2. The newer and Faster running programs are using the Streamline application engine to handle high loads of data for range selections like product codes mentioned above.
    Please use :
    Sales Order Processing->Shipping->Shipping Labels instead of Sales Order Processing->Shipping->Print Shipping Labels (older program that works slowly)
    And
    Inventory->Label Print->Inventory Label Printing instead of Inventory->Label Print->Label Printing Wizard (older program that works slowly)

    Top

  13. Does Visual Streamline designer supports both IPL and ZPL language?
    No, We only support printers that allow GDI based printing. ZPL is not GDI printing therefore not supported.

    Top



Multi Language

  1. Does Streamline provide for different spellings of words in US English vs Canadian English on screens and forms?
    Yes - NEW as of release 10.0.0.0038. The programming language provides a text phrase translation utility that allows the programmer to identify specific words and phrases to translate into other languages. We have identified certain key words that are most commonly spelled differently in a US English environment and have incorporated these into a translation table.
    Document: Canadian English to US English Translations.pdf

    Top



Multi-Branch Processing

  1. Do orders on hold still get flushed?
    Whether an order on hold gets flushed is dependent on the setting in business rule SO10 (Backorder flush processing options for held orders).

    Top



Order Processing

  1. How can I tell when a picking slip was printed and who printed it?
    This information is tracked by an audit for the printing of the controlling documents. Your controlling document is determined by Business Rule SO8 (Controlling document for warehouse control (Print flag)). This audit is located in Company Setup -> System Auditing -> Controlling Document Prt Audit. Users can view the order number, date and time the controlling document was printed, along with other pertinent details. The system also records where the document was printed from - either order entry or batch printing of orders.

    Top

  2. Is there a way to see who released a sales order from credit hold?
    Credit Hold Releases are audited. This information can be accessed via Sales Order Processing -> Reports and Inquiries -> Price Change / Credit Release. A date range can be specified and the report can be printed to the screen or a printer. The system records the date, time, order & revision, user, and the type of hold that was released.
    This program also stores the price change audit information. If a user changes a selling price on an order - the date, time, order & revision, user, and the original price and new price are recorded for review.

    Top

  3. Is there a way to print a message on our forms as a notification to customers about xxx…?
    A standard message can be set up to print on specific forms for all or some of your customers. For example, you may want to notify your customers regarding upcoming holiday hours. This can be done in Sales Order Processing -> Master Files -> Standard Form Comments. Choose the form the message is to print on and then define the parameters. You can create records that will apply to all of the selected forms or you can range it on a particular customer, customer type, or sales group.

    Top

  4. How can I ensure that product has been ordered for my customer backorders?
    Using Planned Purchase Order processing for all purchasing is a great way to ensure that backorders are getting picked up and ordered. All of the great built-in features in Planned Purchasing make it easy and efficient to make sure outstanding backorders for customers are linked to outstanding P/O's. To check that all outstanding backorders are accounted for in purchasing you can run the Order Status Report and check for links to P/O's. To do this, go to Sales Order Processing -> Reports And Inquiries -> Order Status Report. Under the options section, when defining the report parameters, choose a 'Details' report and select 'Backorders' as the Report Option. This will show you a list of all outstanding customer backorders and it will indicate if a link exists to a P/O or Warehouse Transfer along with providing details of that link such as the transaction number and line number. You can easily follow up with Purchasing on any backorders that have not yet been linked to Purchase Orders or Transfers.

    Top

  5. Why didn't a backorder get created for this customer?
    The creation of the backorder revision is controlled by the flag for 'Accept Backorder' located on the Options screen of the sales order entry screen. This flag must be enabled in order for the system to create the next revision for any items that were not available at the time the order was shipped. This flag defaults from the Customer Master File, but can be changed by users in the order processing screen as well.

    Top

  6. I have a sales order and I know the stock is physically here, but it hasn't been received into the building yet - Can I force the shipment?
    The simple answer to this question is yes, BUT there are implications to this. By forcing a shipment you may be forcing the item into a negative on hand value, and it could also potentially have inventory balancing implications. It's also possible that if your costs on the item fluctuate, you could be affecting your profit margins because the accounting cost for the item may not be accurate if there is pending receiving. While we recognize there may be times that you need to force ship an item for customer service reasons, the BEST policy is to make sure all receiving is up to date and allow the order to flush through the system normally.

    Top

  7. Why isn't the 'Create P/O' button enabled on my order?
    There are several conditions that must be met to enable this function. If the button is not enabled - check that ALL of the following conditions are met:
    The order type must be OE: Order Entry or DS: Drop Shipment.
    The user must have the right to modify a po (MPO)
    Order can't be a cash sale
    The backordered quantity on at least one line of the order must be greater than zero.
    The Picking / Packing Slip (Controlling document) can not be printed.
    The user must be in 'Modify' mode.
    The order can not have been already picked up in Planned Purchase Processing and / or subsequently purged from the PPP edit list.
    If all of the above conditions have been met and the 'Create P/O' button is still disabled, please call support for assistance.

    Top

  8. Why can't I add a freight charge to this quote / order?
    The ability to add a charge for freight in the summary portion of the quote or order entry screen is controlled by a flag in the customer master file details. The field is called 'Add Freight' and must be enabled to allow the charge to be entered.

    Top

  9. I have an order that should have picked up customer contract pricing but it did not-Why?
    Most often the cause for contract pricing not getting picked up is because of the dates on the contract. Check to ensure that the order was entered during the valid date range of the contract. It is important to note that if you enter an order today and then set up a contract tomorrow with a start date prior to when the order was entered, the system does not go back and re-price the order with the contract price. The pricing is set at the time the order is entered. In this case, if a contract is entered AFTER the order is processed, the lines on the order would need to be deleted and re-entered to grab the contract price.
    Other areas to check:
    -ensure contract header and detail lines contain a date that has not expired.
    -ensure that the UOM on the contract matches the uom for the item
    -check BR SO47 (Contract pricing overrides customer best price) and BEST PRICE flag on the customer, as this BR controls whether or not the contact overrides best price.
    -ensure that the qty's entered on the order qualify for qty break entered on contract.

    Top

  10. What does it mean when there is an asterisk in front of the product line on my packing slip?
    An asterisk in front of the product line on a packing slip indicates that the item is a substitute item.

    Top

  11. Why am I not able to cancel my backorder, the 'cancel order' button is not enabled, why?
    Backorders can't be cancelled, you have to use the 'close CSO' button to close the order instead. The 'cancel order' button is only enabled for orders that have not been shipped - revision 0. Using the close button will flag the back order part of the order as 'Closed' and will reset any outstanding committed quantities.

    Top

  12. What does it mean when the text in the 'status' field in Customer Service Inquiry appears in Red?
    A red text in the 'status' field indicates that the order is on some type of a hold.

    Top

  13. A user at Branch A entered an order for warehouse xxx - the packing slip is still printing in Branch A rather than the warehouse they specified - why?
    Batch Printing of orders / packing slips follows the header of the order (Branch Code) - not the warehouse line details. This is because we allow the option to have multiple warehouses defined per order.

    Top

  14. Where does the cost come from that shows in the Margin Calculator and also when I hit F5 on the price field in an order?
    The cost that comes in to the margin calculator is the cost that is defined in the user maintenance screen for 'user cost base'.
    If nothing is set there, it uses the cost defined in Business Rule IN#4.

    Once the order hits the stage set in Business Rule OP#6 - Location to grab accounting cost, it will show the accounting cost as per BR IN#2 setting.

    Top

  15. I am using the customer history in order entry and I know there is history on that part/customer but it is not being displayed in the history?
    One possible reason for this is due to Business Rule SO # 25. This business rule controls the button 'ALL' on the customer history screen in order entry. If the BR is ON, items that are marked 'to be deleted' do not appear in the history, unless you click the 'All' button. To automatically have the system display ALL orders, then the BR must be turned off, and the 'ALL' button disappears from the screen.

    Top

  16. Does the customer history in order entry include parts that were sold on service work orders?
    If business rule SO # 25 is turned ON, then the SWO parts will NOT be included in the customer history in order entry. If the business rule is turned OFF, then yes the SWO parts are included in the list.

    Top

  17. How do I credit a customer back for Freight that was accidentally charged?
    You can create a misc billing code called Freight - misc stock types do not affect inventory and are primarily used for billing purposes. You can then add the freight billing code on the credit as a line item. The system will prompt you to enter the GL distribution that you want to book the credit to.
    Or the other option is to do an internal credit note through: Accounts Receivable > AR invoicing > AR invoices for the freight amount.

    Top

  18. Order entry branch/warehouse control - How does the system determine which branch/warehouse to use?
    The order entry branch code in the header determines what branch will get the credit for the sale, and cost of sale and also controls the packing slip print location. AR will post to this branch if the Currency control account is set to post by branch also.
    It defaults to the Customer default warehouse branch.
    If no customer warehouse branch is set, then it will use the users default warehouse branch.
    If the Product Line Master is not set to post by Branch then this is how it posts.
    If no user warehouse branch is set then it uses the main branch "00000"
    If MB 16 is not ON for Quote Entry it defaults to users warehouse branch.
    There is also a Business Rule that allows users to manually change the branch in order entry header, and that Business Rule is MB 20, if it is set to 1, 2 or 3 and if the user has user right RTCBIOE, they are able to simply park in the Branch code field and modify it. MB 11 must also be set to 0 for you to be able to change branch code.

    The order entry detail line warehouse is used to determine what warehouse the inventory will be coming from, this warehouse branch will be credited for the inventory on the sales. It will default to the user default warehouse unless one of the BR below override it:
    BR OP 65 can be set to use the product default warehouse unless overwritten by SO 99 to follow the customers default warehouse.
    If BR MB 20 is set to values 2 or 3 it will be set based on the branch in header automatically. This setting overrides So 99 and 65. SO 99 if on and the customer master default warehouse is blank, the user will be able to modify the warehouse on the line during initial line creation. The ability to change the branch code in the order header after that order has been entered but not shipped has been added also this is controlled through user right CBIOEWD.

    Top

  19. We want to restrict users from re-printing picking slips once they have been printed. Is there a way to do this?
    Yes - User Right RTRPS - Rithg To Reprint Packing Slip contols this function. All users will be able to print the original packing slip - however the ability to reprint can be controlled by not assigning this user right.

    Top

  20. Is there a way to identify contract priced items in the sales order invoice register?
    Yes - Business Rule S/O # 100 controls this ability. When enabled, contract priced itmes will be identified on the sales order invoice register - in the product summary portion and also on the invoice analysis report. See file folder on Business Rule for details.

    Top

  21. Is there something that we can print as a proof of return when a customer brings a product back?
    Enabling Business Rule S/O # 102 - Allow Printing Acknowledgment for Credit Memos may be an option. Enabling this business rule will allow users to print an order Acknowledgement when processing credit memos. This document can then be given to the customer as proof of return at point of sale.

    Top

  22. In Sales Order Entry our users are supposed to enter an Order Type for every order. Is there a way to force them to do this?
    Yes - Enabling Business Rules SO50 (Force entry of order type in order entry) will force the user to enter a valid order type.

    Top

  23. There is a miscellaneous fee in the sales order entry screen. We would like to call this something else. Can we change the name of this?
    Yes - Go to Sales Order Processing -> Master Files -> Miscellaneous Charges Maintenance. This screen allows you to change the display label for this field.

    Top

  24. There is a message that sometimes prints on my packing slips on backordered item 'this item is considered complete' but it does not print for all backordered items. Where is this message pulled from, and what is the criteria for it to appear on the packing slip and invoice?
    The message that appears on backorders 'this item is considered complete' is a result of the user zeroing out the back order quantities while in the invoice preparation screen. When a back order qty is zero'd out, a message will be displayed asking you if you want to mark the item as complete. The user must answer YES for the message to print on the packing slip. If the user answers NO, the message will not print.

    Top

  25. We don't want users to be able to enter a discount in the summary part of the orders. Can we disable that field?
    You can password protect the discount field in the summary screen of the sales orders. This is controlled by Business Rule PWD7 (Password to enter summary discount for sales orders).

    Top

  26. I need the ability to enter SO quotes and have them in the system history to be able to refer back and check trends if need be
    Please see the attached document containing the details.
    Document: Sales order quotes.pdf

    Top

  27. I need the ability to automatically sort items in a sales order. (Our part numbers are alphanumeric and when we receive customer orders, they are not generally in our part number order. We currently have to enter the items in our part number order for easy picking and when we receive large orders, this takes up a lot of
    We have a business rule that allows you to select the sort for picking slip and packing slip. It is Business Rule FORM362 (O/P - Sort order for picking slip).

    Top

  28. When I am looking up a customer, I need the ability to see inventory information in the same screen or on drill down. (qty on hand, qty already on po, qty on sales order/backorder)
    Please see attachment for details on this.
    Document: Customer Service Info.pdf

    Top

  29. I need to have the ability for the warehouse staff, to see a screen that shows all printed orders to be shipped.
    This is available through Invoice Preparation in the Shipping menu.

    Top

  30. When we print our sales order in the office they need to be checked by AR for approval. We need the ability of holding an order in the system, unless we choose to override a specific customer to not be held. Basically, we need to enter the order regardles of credit and have accounting deal with it within the system instead of having an order entered and shipped when it should be held.
    Please see attached for details on how to handle this scenario.
    Document: Process for Held Orders.pdf

    Top

  31. I need to easily see links between Sales Orders and Purchase Orders.
    See attached for details.
    Document: SO PO lInks.pdf

    Top

  32. I have customers who want to purchase gift certificates, how do I process this through the system?
    Create a new Customer Account that is setup to not charge taxes. You can call this new customer acct - Gift Certificate.
    Rather than creating a non stock item, use a misc item called ‘gift certificate’ this will not affect inventory, nor will it affect planned purchasing.
    Create a new GL acct that will be used as a clearing account for gift certificate sales.
    When you enter your order, you will offset the sale to the new GL acct.
    Process the order through, invoice it, and then apply your cash in cash receipts to the invoice.
    This will leave a credit sitting in the new GL that you created – this is also how you will know how much you have sold in gift certificates that have not been claimed yet.
    When the gift certificate is redeemed, enter an order with the product etc that they are taking, and then process the invoice through. Then in cash receipts, do an N/A adjustment to clear the invoice, and offset to Debit the same GL clearing acct.


    Top

  33. I have Business rule SO # 21 set to 10 days lead time for scheduled orders. I have a scheduled order with a release date that is not within 10 days, but got released anyway using the automated program?
    Business rule SO21 (Scheduled orders release lead time (in days)) is used within the following calculation:

    Top

  34. I am getting a warning that my cost has not been updated in more than XX amount of days, which Business Rule controls this?
    Business Rule SO101 (Warning in order entry if no cost change in last x days).

    Top

  35. I want to start charging freight to my customers, how does the software handle this?
    Please see attached document for an overview on how this works.
    Document: Freight Processing for Sales orders.pdf

    Top

  36. How does the Free Freight Processing program work?
    Please review attached document for an overview.
    Document: Free Freight processing.pdf

    Top

  37. How do I process payment for a cash sale in full that has a backorder?
    See attached document outling the process.
    Document: Cash sale- paying for order in full with backorder.pdf

    Top

  38. What are the user rights required to give someone access to the Order Status Report?
    The rights are:
    ROSO - Right Of Sales Orders
    RTSORI - Right To Sales Order Reports and Inquirie

    Top

  39. What does the message 'Rebuild Open Orders' mean when in Order Entry or Invoicing?
    This message indicates that the program is adjusting the open order value in the customer master which is used for credit processing.

    Top

  40. What is the calculation used in the Margin Override option in quote and order entry?
    The program calculates the new sell price based on the Total Cost and Margin Override% as follows:
    New Total Sell = Total Cost / (Margin Override%/100-1)
    The Total New Sell then distributed to each line of the order or quote divided by each line quantity.

    Top

  41. What user rights are required to modify the Ship Via Codes?
    The user right required to modify the Ship Via Master File is RTMCARR -Right To Modify Carrier.

    Top

  42. Is there a way to force a Quote to expire once an order has been created from the quote?
    Business Rule SO92 (Quote expiry decision after order creation) determines the status of a quote once it has been used to create an order. The options for this rule are:
    Leave Open
    Force Expire
    User Select with Default Open

    Top

  43. Is there a way to force the quote to Expire once it has been copied?
    Business Rule SO116 (Quote expiry decision after quote copy) determines the status of the quote after it has been copied. The options are:
    Leave Open
    Force Expire
    User Select with Default Open
    User Select with Default Expire.

    Top

  44. In the Customer Service Inquiry - some of my Sales Volume details are not correct.
    Running the Company Setup -> Inventory Stats Refresh Program may correct discrepancies in this display. If after running this program there is still an issue with the data, please contact support with the details.

    Top

  45. How does Business Rule SO68 (Enable PST exempt button in order entry) work?
    If this business rule is turned on, there will be a little toggle button marked 'E' for exempt or 'A' for apply. The purpose is to allow CSR's at the counter to make a SO PST exempt after it has been entered with PST included. For walk in clients that forget to mention they are tax exempt before you enter the order. The 'A' will reapply taxes based on the customer ship to PST exempt status, so if they are set to be PST exempt and you do click the 'A' it will not add PST, it will reset the lines based on the current tax status for PST on the Ship to.

    Top

  46. When I'm in a sales order, and parked on the Customer Code field, and I type a character and hit F5, the system is not taking me to customers that start with the character that I typed in - why?
    Busines Rule AR1 (Default sort method for Customer lookup) needs to be set to 'CODE' for this to work.

    Top

  47. In the Customer Service Inquiry -> Expediting tab, if a PO number is displayed in RED - what does that mean?
    If a PO number appears in red in the Expediting Tab, it indicates that it is a PO Requisition or that there is a link to a Request For Quote.

    Top

  48. Which sales rep on a sales order does the commission go to - the one on the line details or the one in the summary 'Options' screen?
    Commissions are calculated based on the sales rep that is assigned in the summary Options screen of the sales order.
    However, the Sales Rep Reports in Sales Analysis pull the sales based on the rep in the detail line. In order to ensure that the two of them are the same, when you click on the Options button in the summary, a message will pop up asking if you also want to update the detail lines, answer YES to keep the details consistent with the summary.

    Top

  49. We need to cancel an invoice for a drop shipment, how do we do this? The stock is not in our warehouse.
    When the original invoice is sold, because the inventory does not come from your warehouse, the system would have posted a credit to AP Clearing. When a credit invoice is posted, it should be done as a 'Return To Stock type and it should be cross referenced to the original invoice. All GL postings will be reversed with the exception of the AP Clearing. As a result, the credit will post a debit to the Inventory GL.

    Top

  50. What are the different order/BOL stages?
    Order Stages: Table held in so_ordrev_headers
    0 - entered
    1 - not in use
    2 - bol printed
    3 - invoiced
    8 - closed
    9 - deleted
    BOL Stages: Table held in so_bol_headers
    0 - open
    1 - not in use
    2 - bol printed
    3 - invoiced
    4 - ready to post
    5 - updated/completed
    9 - deleted

    Top

  51. I have a cash sales backorder for a cash customer and I want to print a order doc and send to them, it is partially shippable now but the Print Order button is not available. How can I get it to print.
    If you have BR SO84 (Cash Sales - Printed forms) set to option 3 (Both Pick Slip and Invoice) and the right RTPRNCS (Right to Print Counter Sales), the print order button will be avialable otherwise you can't print a deposit slip etc until the revision has entry in the payments screens to pay it in full.

    Top

  52. How do I credit for a price difference for an item invoiced?
    To do a credit note when you need to credit a customer for a price difference, you enter through order entry with a doc type of "Credit Note" then select the"‘Price Adjustment" type instead of a "Return to Stock" type. You can select the original invoice number and tag the lines to be credited, then basically, make sure the quantity matches the quantity on the original invoice and enter just the price difference in the ‘Price’ field. By doing this through Order Entry CM (Credit Memo), this ensures that Sales Analysis will be correct, Customer Sales Statistics will be correct, along with Inventory Statistics.


    Top

  53. I have a US customer that I sell to but ship to in Canada, and I need to charge Canadian taxes to the US customer. How do I setup to allow this?
    If the ship to used on the sales order has a province/state code with tax rates setup up on it, it will charge tax based on that rate for lines on the sales order if the Pay GST and Pays PST flags are set for each line on the order.
    The Customer flag for "Pays GST" and the Ship to flag for "Pays PST" are what will cause the order line detail flag to be set to on or off. If off the extended amount on that line will be excluded from the tax base amount calculated.
    The rate that shows in the summary section on the salse order is what is applied to the tax bases calculated as per above, tax rates are brought in from the Ship To province/state code on the order. So if you have a US order with a US ship to, as long as the state code for the ship to has no tax rates setup then tax should be calculated at a zero rate. If you have a Canadian Ship To on it then the tax rates from the Province will be brought in and tax will be charged on the tax bases calculated.

    Top

  54. In the Order Entry screen there is a flag at the bottom of the summary section of an order - Pick up. What does it do?
    As per sid 19795 - Cross Reference was done by programmer.
    - used to write to controlloing doc audit when printing orders
    - used on order entry for displaying and modifying purposes
    - used to write to controlling doc audit when printing pick slip - if checked it means that the SO is a pick up, so checks for default printer to determine where to print the BOL pick slip.
    - used to udpdate the Bo rev details during the BOL confirmation and invoicing stage
    - used on customer service inquiry screen for display purposes
    - used to update handheld files
    - used to write controlling doc audit when updating sales order from flush
    - used to write controlling doc adit when pick slip is deleted in inv prep and cancellation
    - used to write controlling doc audit when generating pick pack from CSO
    - used on expediting inquiry screen for dispay purposes
    - used to write to the cancelled orders report file
    - used to update scancode data
    - used on customer orders screen for display purposes

    Top

  55. In order entry there is a field called Customer Quoted located in the summary section of an order. What does it do?
    As per sid 19795 - Cross reference was done by programmer:
    - used on order entry for displaying and modifying purposes
    - used on customer service inquiry > inv screen to control the display fonts. Records will show in bold if BR SO43 (Require manager's approval for invoicing) is ON, BOL detail link exists and customer quoted flag is on.
    - used when order is created from quote
    - used on invoice prep and cancellation screen to control the display fonts. Records will show in bold if BR SO43 (Require manager's approval for invoicing) is ON and customer quoted flag is on
    - used on manager AR invoice approval orders screen to control the display fonts. Records will appear in bold if BR SO43 (Require manager's approval for invoicing) is ON and customer quoted flag is on

    Top

  56. I want my pick or pack slips to print multiple copies but for each order, so order 1, print copy 1 and then copy2 , then print order 2, copy 1 and copy 2, rather then all copy 1's and then all copy 2's. How can I do this?
    If you are using Forms Management you will only be able to print all copy 1s and then copy 2's. In order to do otherwise you must allow the windows printer dialog to control the number of copies and the order they coellate in . Remove all setup for packing slip forms from, Forms Managment. Then set BR FORMS162 (O/P - Number of additional copied for packing slips) to 1 or 2 copies. When you then choose to print packing slips stop at the printer dialog box and pick the number of copies you want to print and turn the collate off. You will now get all copies of each page before it moves on to the next page to print.

    Top

  57. How can I get the list of BOM items to print on the different forms for kit items.
    There are Business Rules under the Forms tab to control this for each type of form. There is also a flag "Print Raw Materials on Forms" in the Inventory > Master Files > Product Line Master that also has to be ticked for each product line in order for them to print.
    The Business Rules are:
    FORMS152 - Print Raw Material Lists on Quotes
    FORMS153-- Print Raw Material Lists on Orders
    FORMS154 - Print Raw Material Lists on Invoices
    FORMS155 - Print Raw Material Lists on Credit Notes
    FORMS171 - Print Raw Material Lists on Picking Slip

    Top

  58. What is the order of priority for determining number of invoice copies to print?
    System checks the following in this order:
    1st Company > Setup > Interfaces > Forms Management file is checked, if invoice is not setup,
    then the Customer Master Ship To file setting for Invoice copies is checked and used, if none there either
    then Customer Master file invoice copies is used, if none there either
    then the BR FORMS163 (O/P - Number of additional copies for sales order invoices) setting is checked and if it is blank or 0

    Top

  59. I released an order today from a scheduled order, and the system created my release order with a future Order Date? Why did it not use the actual release date?
    Total lead time = BR SO21 (Scheduled orders release lead time (in days)) + customer’s lead time + supplier lead time, if there is no supplier lead time then it uses average lead time.
    Suggested release date = Required Date – Total lead time

    Top

  60. What controls the ability to see All Branches in the Cash Sale Summary?
    This is controlled by BR MB4 (P/O lookup - Show P/Os for user warehouse). If BR is OFF users will see all branches in cash sale summary. If BR is ON, only users who are part of the ORG and BRANCHES > Management table will see all branches.

    Top

  61. If I change my system exchange rate while I have open orders in the system, will they be udpated to reflect the new system exchange rate when they are posted?
    The sell price on a US order is in US dollars, therefore if you change the exchange rate while you have open order in the system, the sell price will remain as it was when the order was entered in the system. When the register is posted, AR will be debited based on the sell price on the order which will be based off the old exchnage rate, but it will use the current system exchange to calculate the amount that posts to the exchange acct.

    Top

  62. I have a customer with Credit Checking turned on but they are over the credit limit and nothing is on hold, how can this happen?
    You will have to turn on the credit checking flag for all customer that you want the system to check, if it was off in the past and only recently turned on this could explain it.
    Also you can release orders from hold in Sales Order entry which would allow accounts to go over there credit limit. You can check this in the Sales Order Processing > Reports and Inquiries > Price Change/Credit Release audit report.


    Top

  63. How can I back date a credit note or invoice to post to a past period.
    You can back date a credit note or invoice as long as you make sure the dates are all backdated when entered. I've attached a screen print of a credit note and pointed to the dates to watch for and check.
    You must also make sure that the posting period you want it to post to is open. I recommend you do the invoices as direct invoice, then you can also do it all in one step as per the screen print for the credit note. Otherwise easy to miss changing the ship date which is the most important.
    Document: Back dating invoices.pdf

    Top

  64. I have a drop ship order with multiple lines and I need to cancel one of them, is there a way to do this without having to cancel the entire order?
    Yes, when in the shipment confirmation screen modify the line(s) you want to cancel, and change the shipped qty and the backordered qty to zero, and then confirm or invoice the order. This will also cancel the drop ship line on the Purchase Order.

    Top

  65. How does Drop Ship Processing work?
    Drop ship orders assume that the inventory is coming from the supplier directly to the customer's site. So it does not care whether or not you have inventory, it will always update the shipped qty on the order.
    In order to be able to enter a drop ship sales order, the customer needs to be flagged to Accept Drop shipment - and this is a flag you will find in the customer master file.
    The order type needs to be changed to 'DS' upon entering the order - this is done in the order header before you even enter the customer code.
    Once the order is entered, you need to create the linked PO, this is done one of two ways:
    1) you can use the CREATE PO button located directly on the order to create the po - same process (nothing different here) system will automatically flag it as a drop ship PO.
    2) Second option is to run PPP for the sales order and select the option for Drop ship on the PPP screen.
    Once the PO has been created, the order will automatically appear in the invoice prep screen for you to invoice. If you have Business Rule OP1 enabled and OP96 set to 'None', the Drop Ship orders will be displayed in Invoice Prep Screen automatically, if not then you will have to use the shipment confirmation screen to invoice the order.
    Drop ship orders can now be back ordered, so if you partially invoice, system will create a back order and back order po as well.
    Once the order is invoiced in full, the system will automatically close the po for you.
    Drop ship po's do are not received through PO Recipts as the stock is never put into your inventory. The AP Clearing record is created through the invoicing of the sales order and the PO is adjusted for qty's invoice also.

    Top

  66. Is there a way to have the standard (suggested) list price print on quotes?
    There is business rule SO57 (Use suggested list price on quotes) that you can turn on, that will allow you to set a flag in the Customer type field to control if the standard list will print on quote for customers with that type set.

    Top

  67. What does an Asterisk <*> represent when printed next to a product code on a pick slip?
    An Asterisk <*> next to a product on a pick slip indicates that the item was a substitute item that was used.

    Top

  68. Is there a way to have a suggested list price print on invoices?
    There is a business rule FORMS176 (O/P - Print regular list price and total savings on invoice) that will allow you to print either the standard list price or the customers list price on both sales order invoices and SWO invoices. It will only print if the suggested list is greater then the actual price and it will also print a total savings line at the bottom of the invoice.

    Top

  69. Why are there invoices missing from the History button in the customer service inquiry screen?
    Business Rule SO25 (Most recent invoice only for products in customer history) controls this. When the BR is ON, the system will only show the most recent invoice for the product, and eliminates all others. When the Business Rule is OFF, it shows ALL invoices.

    Top

  70. Why did my sales order not calculate any taxes?
    There are a few reasons why taxes might not calculate:
    Check to ensure that the tax flags are setup in the Customer and SHIP TO.
    Check to make sure that the items on order are flagged for taxes, you can do this by clicking on the folder at the end of each line item.
    Check to make sure that the item is not flagged for Zero Rated GST on the product master file
    Check to make sure that item is not entered as a non taxable item in the customer master file
    Check to make sure that the province on the orders ship to, is setup with the correct tax %
    Users are also able to park in the tax field and remove the taxes if they have the user right that controls this, ensure the user is not removing taxes accidentally.

    Top

  71. How are rebates posted when sale is made?
    Calculations are:
    Supplier FOB - Rebate (Deviated) Cost = Rebate Amount
    Average cost - Rebate Amount = Cost of Good Sold
    Postings are:
    - 'Cost of Good Sold' amount is debited to COGS control account.
    - 'Rebate Amount' is debited to Rebate Clearing control account.
    - 'Average Cost' is credited to Inventory control account.

    Top

  72. Is there a way to see if a sales order was created and then cancelled or deleted?
    If the item was deleted off the sales order, then you can query so_hist_details and use field sohd_flag_flg = ‘D’ for the item in question and it will show you sale orders that originally had the item on it. If the entire order was cancelled, you can view the order cancelled report located in: sales order processing > reports and inquiries, you will have to run in detail to see items numbers, and scan the report for the item in question. Of you can export to file and then do analysis a bit easier through excel.


    Top

  73. In Order Entry, I sometimes see a Create PO button. What are the conditions for this button to be enabled?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Conditions for Create PO button in OE.pdf

    Top

  74. Can I sell an item in more than one Unit of Measure (UOM)?
    Yes - You can have up to 3 selling UOMs.

    Top

  75. I am entering an order, and receiving a messge that the stock is protected and can't be sold to this customer - what does this mean?
    This means that the stock you are selling resides in a CUSTOMER CONSIGNMENT warehouse, and in order to be able to sell out of the Customer Consignment warehouse, the Customer's warehouse record must be set to the same warehouse record as the Consignment warehouse.

    Top

  76. What is the purpose of the Customer Service Inquiry menu option?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Visual Streamline Customer Service Screen Prints..pdf

    Top

  77. How does the program 'Scheduled Orders' work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Scheduled Orders Documentation.pdf

    Top

  78. How do I enter line notes on an order?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: How to enter line notes.pdf

    Top

  79. Is there an expanded window for viewing and modifying order entry details?
    There is an optional business rule for this that can be purchased.
    Document: 20425 Extend number of detail lines in OE - release.pdf

    Top

  80. Does the system handle HST Point of Sale Rebates?
    See the attached user document about HST Point of Sale Rebates
    Document: HST Point of Sale Rebate.pdf

    Top

  81. How does Streamline integrate with UPS software?
    See the attachment for an overview of integration with UPS software.
    Document: Integration with UPS WorldShip.pdf

    Top

  82. What User Rights control ability to Create/Modify/Delete Cancel Order/Invoice Codes?
    RTMRC - Right to modify reason codes.

    Top

  83. What does the BOL Comment button in Customer Master do?
    In addition to the button in the AR Master Files, there is also a button located in: Sales order processing > Op Master Files. In the confirmation/invoicing screen there is a BOL details button beside the freight in the summary section that is linked. This button will bring in the comments entered from the Customer master "BOL Comments" button.
    They print with the BOL that is a button at the bottom of the Invoice Prep main screen.
    There is also a button beside the Order number column on the invoice prep main screen that access these comments and allows you to enter them. The visibility of the menu option and the button on the customer master is not tied to any specific Right. It is based solely on the control parameter 'Print Bill of Lading Form'. This is set under Control File Maintenance ' O/E. (The visibility of the menu item is of course tied to the usual rights associated with S/O Master Files, S/O Processing, etc.)

    Top

  84. How do I setup Ontario First Nations Point-of-Sales Rebate?
    Processing options available in Streamline Software are as follows:

    Option 1: This is the simplest option, as you will not have to modify tax flags at the end of each line. However, it can only be used if all items you sell to your First Nations’ customers qualify for the First Nations POS Rebate.
    Set up a new province code 'ONF' for Ontario First Nations, with the HST flag on and the HST Rate set to 5%, then change the applicable customer ship to province codes to use ‘ONF’ on Effective Date. This way only the 5% portion of HST will be charged on customer orders using that ship to address.
    However when filing your remittance the reporting requirements are different for these sales, please review requirement as you may need to manually calculate what the First Nations POS rebate amount would be and adjust your remittance as required.

    Option 2: This option can be used if you sell a mixture of items to your First Nations’ customers: some items could qualify for the First Nations POS Rebate; some could fall under the regular POS Rebate; and some may require the full HST rate as they do not qualify for either rebate.
    In this case you can use the attached enhancement available in version 715, with Business Rule SO 131, originally written to handle POS Rebates allowed for certain products. See instructions attached. Please note for items that fall under the First Nations POS Rebate only, you would need to manually change the tax flags in the Sales Order for the Rebate credit to be calculated and deducted from the taxes for the order.
    When filing your remittance you may still have to manually calculate what the First Nations POS rebate amount would be and adjust your remittance as required.
    Also remember that for either option as of September 1, 2010 you will have to change any open orders with qualifying sales to reflect the new taxes.



    Top

  85. How are Shipping Dates on Orders Calculated?
    Please see attachment.
    Document: How do Shipping Dates on Sales Orders get updated.pdf

    Top

  86. I have a customer that has moved to a US office. The bill to address is in the USA but will be in CDN dollars, and the ship to remains in Canada. How do I set this up to charge taxes?
    You need to create a US customer with a CDN currency code.
    You need to make sure that you flag the customer for Pays GST/HST = flag must be on
    The flag in the AR Master file is what determines is the flag at the end of each line item is ON.
    You then enter a CDN ship to, with Canadian address.
    System will pull the tax rate based on the ship to province.

    Top

  87. What is the purpose of the 'Item Reference' field located at the end of each line item in Quote Entry?
    This field is printed on quotes if optional BR CUS21 (Print item reference number on quotes) is ON.
    It's also printed on the closed quote report & quote follow-up report regardless of CUS21.

    Top

  88. What does this error mean...A cursor with the name 'readrawmat_cursor already exists?
    One of the raw materials is setup as B type item but it has no raw materials.

    Top

  89. How to enter a Deposit on an order?
    The system allows you to prepay a back order with a deposit when usinig cash sale processing. This will also allow you to print a deposit slip, but only works when the order is in a back order position. Click on the PAYMENT fold when you are in the Order, and enter the deposit method: Cash, visa etc. Note this needs to be predefined in your system. Choose deposit for backorder upon exiting the payment screen.. The system then keeps track of the deposit amt on the order, but this will not affect AR at all. It is still up to you to Cash Receipt the deposit to get it into the customer's acct and into the GL. Once the goods are shippable, then you can use the deposit on the order that was pre-applied by going back into the payment folder.

    Top

  90. What email address does system use for Order Acknowledgments?
    There is a business rule, FORM366 (O/P - Default fax number), and a flag, Acknowledge Customer, in the ship to screen that control which email address is used for Order Acknowledgments.
    If FORMS366 is set to Ship To, then order acknowledgments are sent to the Ship To email address, unless the shipto address' Acknowledge Customer flag is ON, which overrides the BR and the order acknowledgment is sent to the Customer email addres.
    If FORMS366 is set to Customer, then order acknowledgments are sent to the Customer emails address regardless of the shipto address' Acknowledge Customer flag setting.

    Top

  91. Why did PST not get charged on Freight, when I have the province code master file setup to do so?
    In the PST calculation for freight, the value of lines with the PST flag are prorated over the total pretax
    value of the order. If the value of the order is zero, in a situation where you want to ship samples at no charge but bill out the freight to your customer, this ratio becomes zero; since the pretax total is zero; therefore the system will not calculate the tax on the freight.
    On an order with lines with a price on them, the PST on freight is included.

    Top

  92. I have a very large future order that I do not want inventory committed for; is this possible?
    No - Inventory is committed as soon as an order is entered into the system, so there is currently no way to enter an order, and not have it commit the stock, other than through Drop Shipments. Some ideas you can consider as a procedural workaround are as follows:
    -create a separate warehouse called FUTURE - this will be used to keep track of all these future orders, and will therefore keep the committed qty's separate from your main warehouse. When you are ready to purchase for these, you could place the PO directly for the Future warehouse so that when the stock is received it gets received directly into that same warehouse.
    -you could enter the order, close it, and then just re-open it closer to the date
    -you could force it to back order, and then change the expected ship date on the order to a future date so that it does not get flushed. New orders will still have to be manually shipped as the stock will still be committed.
    -you can also put the order on a manual hold as well, but again stock is still committed.
    -you can enter it as a quote and leave it as a quote until closer to the date

    Top

  93. There is a deposit field on the Invoice, can I populate it somehow, to show when a customer has paid a deposit on an order.
    There is only one way to populate the deposit field you see in the Invoice and that is if you have a Cash Sale order with a backorder that the customer has paid you a deposit on.

    It is not intended to record a prepayment deposit for an order that is being paid on account and I think it would create some processing hoops to jump through if we tried.

    The simplest way to show on an invoice that the customer has paid a deposit is to add a comment

    Top

  94. When using the auto build feature to create the release schedule for Scheduled Orders, how does it work?
    It takes the first release date, and adds to it based on the frequency, either 7 days for a weekly
    or 1 month for monthly, 3 months for quarterly etc. If the resulting next release date falls on
    a weekend then it takes next Monday for the release day.

    Top

  95. What are the conditions for Credits to appear on the Order Status Report?
    Credits will be picked up for the following Report Options: "Open Orders, In Process, and All Orders" when the credit is still in an open (un-invoiced) stage.
    If the credit has been 'sent to invoice' it's considered in process, not open. If the credit has not been invoiced yet, then it makes sense that it's pulled in the open orders option.

    Top

  96. Why does the software allow ability to sell an item, if the status is anything but Active?
    The reasoning behind it is that an item might still have inventory on hand that you are trying to sell off. If you no longer have inventory on hand to sell, then the item should be flagged as 'To Be Deleted'. That status does not allow an item to be entered onto an order.

    Top

  97. What is the calculation for extended amount in the BOL and revision details?
    so_ordrev_details = srd_extord_amt
    so_bol_details=: (bold_actual_sell_amt - bold_discount1_amt) * bold_ship_qty / bold_priceuom_conv

    Top

  98. What is the right that controls printing an order acknowledgment for a Cash Sale?
    The user right is RTPRNCS. Without this right, a user will not be able to access the print order button for a cash sale, and therefore not be able to print a copy of the order acknowledgement for a cash sale order.

    Top

  99. Is there a way to tell who closed an order?
    For Closed orders, the system does write out a record to the Sales order audit file. It does not specifically indicate that the user closed the order, but it shows a record for the user that last modified the Header information (which includes closing it). You need to click on the Header field to see the header records. The Sales order audit is located in: Company Setup > System Auditing > Sales order changes.

    Top

  100. Why is the Standard List printing on orders, rather than the unit price?
    There is an optional Business Rule CUS3 (List price and discount (not sell price) display on forms), and if it is ON, then that displays the list price & discount on forms instead of the selling price.

    Top

  101. I created a sales order with only freight in the summary, why can't I process this order?
    The sales order processing system expects that there will be at least one line item on an order. It does not support invoicing with no line items. You have two options:
    1) create a misc item called Freight - Misc items do not affect inventory, and you will be asked to offset to a GL upon entering the misc item onto the order.
    2) create an AR invoice on acct, not going through the sales order processing system. AR invoices are done through: AR > AR Invoicing > Invoice Adjustment Entry.

    Top

  102. We are a CDN company with a satellite office in the US, how do we charge
    US sales tax on orders placed out of the US?

    When the company tax method is Canadian you can't use the US tax group in the Tax group master for US taxes. So the only way for you to charge sales tax is to setup a PST rate and GL account, in the province/state master for the state and make sure the customer master and ship to tax flag is on to charge that tax. This only allows for one rate and may not meet the taxing requirements of the state and the forms will say PST for the tax description but it will charge tax.

    Top

  103. How do I reset a sales order back to unprinted, it was printed in error to be shipped but is really no stock, so I want to edit the line to backorder it and set it back to unprinted? I do not want to cancel or delete the order.
    You can't set the print count back to 0, but you can reset the print flag to unprinted.
    Call up the order in Order Entry and click on the 'Print Order' button and it will come up with a screen with options, choose to' Reset Print Flag'.
    Then modify the line and change the Qty Ship to 0 so it will backorder it. When the order does ship in the future it will print again.

    Top

  104. How does the Cash Sales Summary program work?
    The Cash Sales Summary program will gather all Invoices processed as Cash Sales payment types, based on filters picked, that have not yet printed on a previous Cash Sales Summary report.
    You must leave the batch no as 0 to do this and it will assign a batch number when you print the report for the first time.
    You can also view previously printed batch no. by drilling on the batch no. field and choosing one to reprint.
    So if you are missing orders on the batch you printed it means one of two things:
    1) The missing orders have either been processed on a different batch so you need to park on the batch number, press F5 to find them. or
    2) The missing orders were not generated on a batch in which case you need to leave the batch no as 0 so that it will generate another batch with the missing invoices.

    Top

  105. Configured item's list price on the sales order matches the list price on the product master; however the raw material list price as shown on the BOM screen print is different why?
    Check the Details of the Configured item to see if there was an END QTY entered for a cut factor. If there was, that could be the difference.

    Top

  106. What Does the On Time Delivery Fill Rate Report Measure?
    See Attached Document
    Document: What Does the On Time Delivery Fill Rate Report Measure.pdf

    Top

  107. What does the report Options "in Process" represent on the Order Status Report?
    The in process flag includes stage 2, it also includes stage 0 - orders that are entered not confirmed. You can control what orders are picked up also by selecting Printed vs not printed.

    Top

  108. What controls the branch for credit memos?
    Business Rule SO 79 controls the branch that is used. When this Business Rule is ON, the system will use the users warehouse/branch as a default on Credits.
    With BR MB 20 set to 1 and SO 79 set to OFF, you are able to modify the branch code on a Credit however the system will change it to whatever the original was when you link it to the original invoice. This is pick up the original branch from the original order you are crediting.

    Top

  109. In version 10 the Customer Service Inquiry Screen is missing buttons, for Sales Volume, Statistics, etc.?
    The 4 buttons 'CRM, Orders, Sales & Stats' are now accessible in V10 in a drop-down menu by right clicking on the customer code.

    Top

  110. How does the optional Business Rule 'Quote/Order Product Tagging Lookup' work?
    Please see attached release document.
    Document: 24272 - Product Search Capabilities - Release.pdf

    Top

  111. Additional information on optional Business Rule 'Quote/Order Product Tagging Lookup'
    See attached release document.
    Document: 24266 - Alt product code browse - Release.pdf

    Top

  112. Why are standard comments entered on orders appearing on my po?
    Located in company setup > company info > comments flags is a field called 'transfer comment to purchase order' if this is ON, the standard comments will transfer to the PO.

    Top

  113. Why is the back order flag on the sales order > options button not checked?
    Possible reasons:
    1. The customer master does not have the 'accept back order' flag turned on.
    2. The order was converted from a quote, and the quote was entered prior to the customer being flagged for 'accept back order'

    Top

  114. Why is my End User contract not appearing in my list of selections when I enter an order?
    Even though you have a valid contract setup, the End User code must still be entered against the ship to record for it to be recognized and picked up in order entry.
    Per sid 26142 as a reference.
    Full documentation available in a separate FAQ.

    Top

  115. What GL acct do I use when entering a MISC item on a sales order?
    When a MISC item is used on a sales order, there is no cost associated with this and so no posting to inventory or COGS. You therefore enter the offset GL that you want to use to capture the revenue from the MISC sale. The posting will be a Credit to the offset GL for the amount of the misc line.

    Top

  116. What user right controls the ability to delete a Credit Memo?
    The user right is RTCSOI. This controls both credits and invoices.

    Top

  117. What are the Conditions for a Drop Ship order to appear in Invoice Preparation?
    The conditions for a Drop ship order to appear in invoice prep are as follows:
    Po must be created and linked.
    Business Rule SO # 1 needs to be enabled & BR OP96 should be 'None'
    Only then will Drop Ship orders be displayed in Invoice Prep Screen.
    Please check the above conditions. If for whatever reason you are still not seeing the Drop Ship order in the invoice preparation screen, you can still access it through the Shipment Confirmation Screen. That option takes you to the same screen that the invoice preparation takes you to.

    Avaialble in version 10.2.1.0000 and higher:

    Top

  118. What does it mean when you see Verify in the product code browse for quantity available?
    There is a flag you can set in the product master warehouse screen called Verify Quantity.
    When it is set, it shows verify here to let the user know they should check stock, as it is typically not accurate.

    Top

  119. How do I give a user access to create special order items in order entry?
    Documentation attached.
    Document: how to give a user access to create special order items in OE.pdf

    Top

  120. What controls the Suggested Qty pop up in order entry?
    See attached documentation
    Document: What controls the suggested qty pop up in order entry.pdf

    Top

  121. There is an item that has an asteriks printing as a prefix what triggers this?
    It is tied to a field in the order revision file: srd_substprod_id which would indicate that the product either is a substitute or has a substitute. If you check the setup for the part in question in the product master file, you will see the substitute.

    Top

  122. I am receiving a message on an order 'This customer is restricted from buying this product' where is this setup?
    AR > Master Files > Customers > Find the customer in question, and click on Modify. Click on Pricing Overrides. There is a flag on the screen by product.

    Top

  123. What are the conditions for a Drop Ship order to appear in the Invoice Preparation screen?
    The conditions are:

    BR SO #1 needs to be enabled & BR SO # 96 should be 'None',
    The po must also have been created and linked to the ds order.

    You can always call it up through shipment confirmation as well if needed.

    Top

  124. How can I restrict users from modifying inventory items but still allow them to setup special order items from Order Entry?
    Entry of Special Order Items direct through Order Entry or Quote Entry is not allowed if the user does not have the right to modify inventory items RTMII. If you wish to allow user to enter special order items this way, you can go to Company Setup > User Maintenance, Stock Types button, and set up restrictions for all types accept for special order items.

    Top

  125. What controls the ability to Add or Remove the Route code range in Batch printing of orders?
    It is controlled by Business Rule SO # 24.

    Top

  126. How does the Route processing in Batch Printing of Orders work?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: Route Codes in Batch Printing of Orders.pdf

    Top

  127. In order entry, line notes, what controls the pop up of the purchasing notes?
    Business Rule PO 26, when turned on, will automatically display a pop up of Purchasing Notes screen upon clicking exist on the line notes. If the rule is off, then the pop up is suppressed and user must press modify button to see the flags in the header.

    Top

  128. I have automatic freight coming into all my orders, where is this coming from?
    Go to Comany Setup > Company Info, and check to see if you have a freight charge rate entered.

    Top

  129. Sales Order > Reports and Inquiries > Margin Report, what cost does this report use?
    This report uses the Weighted Average cost.

    Top

  130. When I run the program to close completed scheduled orders, there is one scheduled order that never gets closed why?
    If you Cancel/Delete a release order, the system now automatically removes the release order link from the scheduled order. Therefore on a previous release that would have shown the Status as RELEASED with the release number, it will (after release is cancelled) revert back to showing Open and no release order number listed. See below example. So this makes sense as to why the Close Scheduled Orders program will not pick it up. What you would need to do in this case is delete the release from the scheduled order by using the F3 key. Only after the release is deleted from the scheduled order will the schedule order get picked up when you run the program to close completed scheduled orders.

    Top

  131. Why can I not modify the Product Line while creating a special order item?
    Changing the product line is restricted for users with sales rep flag on.

    Top

  132. Can I do a credit note for an invoice not yet posted?
    Yes you can but keep in mind you can also cancel the original invoice in the invoice prep screen and fix the order and reinvoice it needed. To allow users the ability to do credit note they will need the right If doing a credit note at the counter for an cash sales invoice they user will need - RTICM - Right To Invoice Credit Notes to have the Send To Invoice button. Once a credit note is done for an unposted invoice you will not be able to change or cancel the original invoice in invoice prep.

    Top

  133. When using customer history from order entry, why does the warehouse not automatically come from the warehouse creating the order?
    This is default behavior. We don't choose which warehouse to pull the stock from when using the cusotmer history button to add items to an order, it's first come first serve. You would need a system modification to change this behavior.

    Top

  134. When entering a credit card payment in cash receipt, what controls ability to not enter the credit card number?
    There is a flag located in: Sales order processing > OP Master Files Files > Credit Cards. There is a flag to 'force user to enter credit card information'.

    Top

  135. How can I lookup a price for a customer by UPC code (scanning) from the product?
    See attached.
    Document: FAQ - Price lookup using UPC code.pdf

    Top

  136. What rights are required for user to be able to access the confirm button in OE screen?
    RTSSHPCONF - Right To Shipping Shpt Conf

    Top

  137. How are the costs on the Order Status Report picked up?
    The order status report will pull the cost that was entered on the sales order, even if it changed. For example, average cost is 10.00, sales order entered into the system while average cost is 10, and then average cost updated to 12.00. if you look at the order through OE screen it shows the new updated cost but when you run the order status report I still pulls the old 10.00 cost, that is until the order is modified, and once you modify the order it goes back and re-grabs the new updated cost.

    Top

  138. There is Control Number missing. How can this happen?
    After investigation, a point has been found where the last number control value may 'skip' a number.
    This can happen when someone goes into the last number control program and the program executes a SQL script to sync the last control numbers.
    This SQL script was put in to resolve an issue whereby users were experiencing locking problems when two or more users were executing the same function simultaneously.
    While it does not happen every time the last number control program is accessed it can happen on occasion.
    The net result is that the 'last number used' value gets bumped by one, so there will be a gap in the order number assignment when the next order is entered.
    It is important to note that while a gap exists, there is no missing data or 'phantom' orders in the system and therefore data integrity is maintained.
    Site users typically do not access the program in question, but Tecsys support or PS staff may need to check the last number controls while investigating issues, which in turn could result in order number gaps.

    Top

  139. Why are there missing Order Numbers in the sequence that are not accounted for?
    When you encounter a gap or missing order numbers, there are no actually missing orders - the problem is that under specific circumstances the 'last order number' control value is getting bumped from outside order entry. So if you see a missing order number in the series this does not represent an order that has somehow been removed from the system.
    Basically, we have found that at times, the last used order number may be inadvertently incremented in a program found on the Company Setup Menu ' Last No. -Control File. We found that several years ago there was an infrequent problem whereby multiple users accessing the same function at the same time could get locked while the system tried to retrieve the next control number. To correct this, new logic was added to avoid a deadlock and to ensure that each user will get a unique control number. It seems that if the conditions are right, the system may increment a control number to avoid a perceived deadlock, thus creating a 'gap' in the numbering.

    Top

  140. Is there a way to have Bin Locations Prints on Orders?
    Yes - Business Rule FOR196 (O/P - Print all bin locations on Sales Order)
    This business rule enables the printing of all bin locations on sales orders.

    Top

  141. Is there a way to have BOM's print on Order Acknowledgments?
    Yes - Business Rules FOR194 (Print raw materials list on order acknowledgments) and FOR195 (Print raw materials list on C/M acknowledgments) were added.
    With these business rules enabled, raw materials lists for Assembled, Built to Order and Configured items will print on order acknowledgments and credit memo acknowledgments, respectively.
    Previously this printing was controlled by BR FOR153 (Print raw materials list on orders) and BR FOR155 (Print raw materials list on credit notes), respectively.

    Top

  142. Can I modify the quantity of a drop ship sales order after the purchase order has been created?
    In the base Drop Ship program, the sales order drop ship quantity cannot be modified after the purchase order has been created. However there is an optional Business Rule available for purchase that supports changes to the DS order qty, and writes the changes back to the purchase order. Please see attached for details, and contact your sales representative for pricing.
    Document: 26733 Release document.pdf

    Top

  143. Why am I not able to enter a misc stock type on an order?
    Misc Item GL Account field has been added to the Product Master File under the Additional Information Button.

    This is now used for the default GL account for misc items within order entry.

    If no default is setup then to modify the default GL account
    for misc items in order entry, you need to have user right RTCMPGL.

    If you do not have this user right, then you cannot modify the default GL on an order.

    Top

  144. How can I reprint a packing slip after an order has been invoiced?
    This is available in version 10.2.2.0000 and higher.

    An order’s Packing Slip can be printed/faxed/emailed from the Order Entry screen after it has been invoiced.

    This feature is controlled through a new user right: RTRPSAI.

    Without this user right, you are not able to reprint the packing slip.

    The reprinted copy of the packing slip is labelled as ‘REPRINT’.

    You are advised in Print Order dialog screen that the invoice has been printed already once.

    Top

  145. What sales rep prints on the Invoice and where?
    The rep that prints in the top section under the ship to will only print when All detail lines are for the same rep. When they are different, nothing prints. If the detail lines are all the same, then the rep that prints here is the rep from the OPTION BUTTON. The system assumes the options button is used to update all detail lines so that is why it uses this rep. When you make a change to the rep in the options it asks you to update the detail lines.

    Top

  146. How does the order/invoice analysis report display the foreign currency orders?
    Order/invoice analysis report shows the customer currency for the subtotal from the order when the order is stage 3 and 4 but then once posted shows the converted CDN sales.

    Top

  147. How are costs displayed on line items on orders?
    1) System will use the setting in business rule INV 4 ONLY up until the order is
    invoiced, at that time the cost on the line item flips to average cost as that is the cost in inventory #2. This is intentional and has always worked this way.

    2) Revisions ignore the setting in business rule Inv4 . Revisions will use the average cost. This has always worked this way and intentional

    3) Even on original orders (rev 000) if you invoice and back out the invoice, then it continues to show average cost for that one line item, and does not revert back to using the setting in INV 4.

    4) Revision 000 is billed and 1 of the 3 items are invoiced
    Revision 001 is created and the 2 items that weren’t shipped display average cost as well (Inv 2 setting)

    Top

  148. What can cause a cash sales invoiced to be missing for Cash Sales Summary?
    If after invoicing the cash sale you then cancel the invoice from invoice prep and the reinvoice it on a different date, the cash sales summary will still record it on the batch from the original invoice date.

    Top

  149. In the Province Table, there are a few Tax flags, how do they work?
    1. TAX on freight
    - When the flag is ON - and there is freight on an order, both GST and PST are charged on the freight. When the flag is OFF - the PST is not charged on the freight, but the gst still is. So, it seems that the flag when off, still calculates the freight on GST.

    2. TAX on GST
    - When the flag is ON, the system calculates PST on the GST amount of the order. Here is an example:
    with the FLAG OFF:
    subtotal is 100.00
    GST is 5.0
    PST is 7.00
    Order Total 112.00
    With the FLAG ON:
    subtotal is 100.00
    GST 5.0
    PST 7.35 (0.35 is calculated based on 5 *7% - assuming your pst is 7%)
    Order Total 112.35

    Top



Password Module

  1. I need the ability to look up previous customer pricing quickly and easily
    We have a history tab in customer service inquiry so you can view all items purchased by that customer, on which date and at what price. You can also call this information up while in order entry, tag the items they wish to buy and bring it into your order. This allows speed of order entry since they usually buy the same items over and over again

    Top



Pricing

  1. When setting the cost plus pricing base for Business Rule S/O # 2 - are the landing factors such as the user defined fields included if you set it to Vendor Cost or Last Cost?
    Yes - the Vendor Cost uses the Vendor Landed Cost and the Last Cost uses the Last Cost as it was 'Landed'.

    Top

  2. I have a new price code setup, but when I enter an item for that price code, the correct price does not come up?
    There could be several different reasons for this:
    - The most common reason is that the price code is not setup as the priority. Go to Pricing > Price Code > Price Rule, and check to make sure that the price is ACTIVE, and also the seq # to ensure that it is before any other price code that has the same product/parameter on it.

    Top

  3. What is the Pricing Hierarchy?
    Customer Contract Pricing
    Affiliate Contract Pricing
    Deal Pricing
    Quote Pricing
    Price Codes
    List/Last

    Top

  4. I need the ability to see different pricing/costing fields
    Please see attached for details.
    Document: Pricing and costing fields.pdf

    Top

  5. What user rights are required to allow a user to edit the details in the Pricing Codes.
    The following user rights are required to edit details in pricing codes:
    ROP - Right Of Pricing
    RTPS - Right To Pricing Setup

    Top

  6. We are building a query and would like to know what files and fields to use to obtain the information in the Inventory Product Code Browse -> Movement screen.
    The sales_history table should be used - sah_sort_id = 'Z1' sah_sortkey1, 2, 4 are warehouse, product and product line respectively. For raw materials bill_of_materials table is used to get raw materials and for each raw material, sales again is take from sales_history table. For historical gathering of data for raw materials so_hist_rawmat table is used.

    Top

  7. If I want to add an item to an existing Deal Code - how can I get to the end of the file without having to click on the 'Next' button to move through all the records?
    When you go into Pricing -> Deal Pricing, the screen presents the first item in the deal. Next moves you through each record. However, if you wish to go directly to the last record in the file - if you click on Modify and then use the tool bar at the top and click on the last icon (End Table) it will take you to the last record in file for that deal code. You can also click on Modify and then press CTRL and END on your keyboard. That will also take you to the last record.

    Top

  8. I have a contract for a US customer and enter price in US Dollares, but the price is being converted to Home Currency why?
    If you go into the product master file for each product code on the contract and go to the 'Details' screen. Click the 'Modify' button, then park on the Standard List Price field and hit F5, choose to zoom to "List Price by Currency" option and click ok. If you enter a US currency list price in here, then when entering a Sales Order for a US customer the system will pick it up as the US price rather then applying the US currency to the CDN value Standard List Price. It will also recognize any contracts for a US cusotmer as US$ price rather then applying the US currency to them.
    Please change one, and test the pricing results you get for the product for customers with different currencies (test CDN also) and different pricing setups to ensure all will work as you need it before doing it for all products. Also remember that the US Standard list will be used as the Standard list for that product for US sales and will not change when the exchange rate changes.

    Top

  9. If I have an Affiliate Contract and a Customer contract, and both are valid - which one wins?
    Currently the customer contract has a higher priority and system pulls that price.

    Top

  10. How do I create a new price code?
    To create a new price code follow these instructions:
    Go to Pricing > Price codes > click on New
    Enter the code you want to create
    Enter the description of the code
    Then select all the fields that you need to be included in the new price code
    Specify whether each field is optional or mandatory
    Click on save.
    This creates the New code that you can use.
    Once the code is created, you can create the pricing setup to do this go to:
    Pricing > Pricing Setup > click New
    Select the code that you created previously
    Click on Details to get to the pricing details where you can enter data.

    Top

  11. System is not picking up a Deal price why?
    Areas to check:
    -ensure that the start and end dates are valid
    -ensure that the selling UOM on the deal matches the UOM on the order
    -ensure the qty entered on the order qualifies based on deal qty break
    -ensure that the deal is linked to an ACTIVE price code.

    Top

  12. I have a Deal setup, however the system is not pulling Deal pricing?
    Consider the Pricing Hierarchy
    Check for valid dates
    Ensure that the UOM on the Deal matches the UOM on the order
    Ensure that Deal is linked to a valid / active price code
    Ensure that the Product Line entered on the Deal setup screen is a valid 6 character product line.

    Top

  13. Customer or ship to has more than one affiliate and the price it should pick up is under the 2nd affiliation code listed on the ship to, but it is not picking it up?
    Item pricing only finds and picks up 1st affiliation defined on the ship to. If you were to make the second affiliation the first affiliation, then item pricing would pick it up.

    Top

  14. I have a contract that is not coming up on the open contract report by product line why?
    The product codes need to be specified in the contract. If it's only entered by Product Line, then report will not print it if the contract product code is empty.

    Top

  15. Why is the Best Price flag in the AR Master File returning zero prices?
    In order to use BEST PRICE, you need to have a standard list entered. If you do not, then the system will pull zero prices from the Standard List, as zero is less than any other price point.

    Top

  16. The Pricing Setup Import now asks the user whether they want to clear existing records. Why?
    Please see attached documentation
    Document: Pricing Setup Import Prompt.pdf

    Top

  17. If you have Price Code set up with multiple records for different criteria, and there is overlap,
    Most specific record gets used first. For example it uses a record with both product code and product line instead of just product line and blank product code.

    Top

  18. In Customer Contracts, what is Contract List field used for?
    The Contract List field acts like an override when using Price Methods: Discount from Standard, Trade, Or Split lists.
    If you have a value entered into the Contract List, it will use it instead of the List from the Product Master File when applying the discount.

    Top

  19. What User Right is required to Modify Contracts for Users? I have one user that has no access to the modify function.
    The user rights required for full access to the contracts are: ROP (Right of Pricing), CC (Customer Contracts) , and RTCP (Right to Contract Pricing).

    Top

  20. For a vendor that has hundreds of items is there a way to mass change the price factor for list price using the program: Pricing > Standard List Price?
    The pricing factors are stored in 2 locations: product details; miscellaneous tab of Control File Maintenance.

    Here's a list of some of the things that Standard List Pricing does and does not do:
    - it does not update the pricing factors in either of these locations;
    - it allows the user to filter by supplier, so mass changes can be done to standard list for a particular vendor;
    - price factors from the product details will be used;
    - in the absence of price factors in the product details, price factors from the control file will be used;
    - any price factor can be manually changed before performing the update.

    If the customer's goal is to globally change the price factors in product details for a specific vendor, this cannot be done.
    If the goal is to globally change the standard list for a specific vendor, this can only be done if there are no price factors in the product details. They could set the price factors in the Control File to the desired values, then run Standard List Pricing for the specific vendor.

    Please see the White Paper attached for further details
    Document: Standard List Pricing Program.pdf

    Top

  21. How do I create a new contract using the NEW Customer Contract front end?
    There can not be any set filters to be able to create a contract. Therefore, you must click on 'Filters', then click on 'Clear' to clear all pre-set filters by the system or users. Once all filters have been cleared, then you can proceed to click on the 'New' button and create a new contact.

    Top

  22. Why is the system not pulling my customer's last price in order entry?
    Assuming you have Business Rule SO 22 turned on, and the price is not setup in any other area such as Deal, Contact, or price code that takes priority, and the customer is not flagged for best price, then it is likely due to the fact that the Invoice date of the last invoice must not be older than 365 days from current order date for the system to pick up the last price.

    Top

  23. Is there a document outlining the changes to the Contract Pricing front end?
    See attached Document.
    Document: 23784 - Contract Pricing Front End - Release.pdf

    Top

  24. How does the pricing promotions program work?
    See attached.
    Document: Pricing Promotions.pdf

    Top

  25. What is the recommended setup for level pricing with discount from list?
    Setup as be worst to best price. In example below leve 1 to would be used only. The customers that are suppose to get a 0% discount from list would need to be setup with level 1 or 2.

    Level % Price
    1 0% $100
    2 0 $100
    3 10 $ 90
    4 20 $ 80
    5 30 $ 70
    6 40 $ 60

    Top

  26. Is there any difference between the SQL pricing engine and the old magic pricing?
    The SQL pricing engine is an improvement over the previous price engine in terms of performance - much faster to pick up pricing, but it uses a slightly different logic to grab the primary price. Before changing from the old pricing engine to the SQL pricing engine you should check your pricing setup to determine if this change will affect pricing assigned and adjust your setup if necessary. The flag to turn on SQL pricing is in Company Setup > Control File Maint, under the MISC tab.

    Old magic pricing logic : In any price setup, right most columns populated with values have priority over left most columns. For example if you have a price code with 5 columns and you just fill in column 4 in one record and column 1, 2 and 3 in another record, it would pick up the pricing with column 4 record set as it's 4th column vs 1st, 2nd and 3rd columns used in the other record.

    Top

  27. Pricing > Contract Pricing > When linking customer contract to supplier contract, what does the message in RED at the bottom left of the customer contract mean?
    The message at the bottom left in RED is referring to the Margin and cost used on the order only. It is not referring to the system using the contract price to arrive at the sell price at all. The intention here is that the customer contract price will still drive the sell price, however the cost that is shown on the contract details, and also on the sales order will reflect the purchase price. This is what that message is intending to communicate.

    Top

  28. How does the program 'Standard List Pricing' work?
    Please see attached release document.
    Document: Calculate selling list price release doc.pdf

    Top

  29. Is there something that prevents affiliate pricinng to work, either through affiliate contracts or price codes setup by affiliation?
    Yes, if you have Business Rule AR #2 enabled, then no pricing by Affiliate will work. This includes price codes as well as affiliate contracts.

    Top

  30. Does Affiliate Contract Pricing support multiple affiliations attached to one customer?
    Yes you can have multiple affiliations attached to a customer, and each of those affiliations can have a contract, and provided that those contracts have completely EXCLUSIVE products (i.e.: the same product is not common between the contracts) then the pricing engine will properly pick up the contract price.

    On the order, each of these products picks up the affiliation contract price.
    Of course, if both contracts contained the same product we know that the price would be picked up from the first contract it finds, but in the above scenario everything will work properly.

    If best price is On in the customer master file, the best price is also picked up.

    Top

  31. How does the Hierarchy work within a price code if there is overlapping information setup in different records?
    The price codes were not intended to have overlapping records, and it can get messy when you setup a price code this way. Here is one example of how it works:
    Here are my specific testing results: Please note the results could change with other fields being used, It would take hours to test every possible combination of fields available.

    rec 1 = Prod line
    rec 2 = customer, product line
    rec 3 = customer
    rec 4 = product
    rec 5 = customer, product, product line

    With the setup above, record 5 pricing is selected. This is the record that contains the most amount of fields filled in.

    Eliminating record 5 from the setup, results in record 4 being selected.

    If you are going to use the one price code that will have duplicates/overlapping data, then I strongly suggest you setup the pricing the way you are expecting in your test company and test it there prior to going live.

    Top

  32. If I have a price file exported and I only make changes to some lines, do I need to delete the unchanged lines prior to importing back in?
    No, you do not need to remove the unchanged lines. Only the changes will be imported back in.

    Top



Purchase Order Processing

  1. How do I change the branch code on a P/O?
    This is controlled through Business Rule Multi # 8. It needs to be turned OFF to allow the Branch to be changed.

    Top

  2. Why can't I re-open this Purchase Order?
    Users can only re-open a purchase order that was manually closed via the PO Maintenance screen. PO's that have been closed via receiving / and or cancelling the outstanding back order with the 'Cancel' flag in the stock receipts screen can not be re-opened via PO Maintenance.

    Top

  3. Why can't I modify or delete a line on a PO?
    There are a few conditions that restrict a user from doing this, but two of the most common reasons are; that there are stock receipts against the purchase order, or the purchase order is selected for linking in Planned Purchase Processing (PPP).
    When a stock receipt is processed, the system keeps a history for all of the lines on the PO - not just the ones that are being received at that time. This is why a line can not be deleted on a PO that has any receipt references. The process for reducing the on order quantity on a PO with stock receipts is to enter a stock receipt for that item and enter the received quantity as zero. At the end of the line there is a check box to 'Cancel' the back order. Once you have processed this, the 'on order quantity' for that item will be adjusted accordingly.
    Processing Hint: When cancelling a line, some sites enter 'Cancel and the line number' in the 'Reference' field in the header of the stock receipt.
    Lines can not be modified or deleted from a PO if they are selected for linking in the planned purchasing program because the system locks these records while they are being used so that modifications to on order amounts can not be made until the PPP run is complete. This ensures the integrity of the data and that the purchaser is seeing accurate information in their edit list.

    Top

  4. Who changed this Purchase Order?
    The system records key information about changes made to quantities and pricing on P/O's. To access this information go to Company Setup -> System Auditing -> Purchase Order Changes.

    Top

  5. How can I set up special prices from a vendor for quantity buys?
    Often a vendor will offer a limited time special on items at a reduced cost if you purchase at specified quantity breaks. This is easily set up in Streamline so that these special offers will be picked up automatically in Planned Purchase Processing and PO Maintenance. Here's how: Located at the bottom of the Supplier Info screen of the Inventory Master File is a button called 'Qty Breaks'. Click on this button and the system pops up a window called Supplier Quantity Breaks. Here, users can specify a date range and set up quantity break pricing by item for a particular vendor. When the specified quantities are ordered either via PPP or entered in the PO Maintenance screen, the system will automatically grab the special pricing and apply it to the PO generated.

    Top

  6. Is there a way to set a PO message that only prints for a certain supplier?
    Yes! In the Supplier Master File -> P/O Information screen there is a button called 'Standard Comments', where users can define a message to print on the PO copy. This message will print only for the vendor specified. It prints on the PO copy directly after the line details and just before any standard messages that are setup in the Company Info screen.

    Top

  7. I have an item on back order that I expected to see in the Planned Purchasing List, but it hasn't come in-Why?
    Many times the cause is that the item has in fact come in to PPP but was deleted and purged in a previous run. This information is recorded in an audit file located in Company Setup -> System Auditing. The 'Plan PO Audit' displays the product, product line, order, line number, revision, user, date etc. for all records that have been purged from the Planned P/O edit list.

    Top

  8. I have an item with a red check box beside it in Planned PO Processing-What does this mean?
    When the check symbol appears beside an item in the Planned Purchase Order Screen, it indicates that the item is a 'Special Order Item.'

    Top

  9. Why is the cost missing on my supplier purchase order?
    Printing the cost on the supplier purchase orders is controlled by a flag in the Supplier Master Files -> P/O Info screen. The flag 'Show Cost on P/O' must be enabled for this information to print.

    Top

  10. Why aren't my supplier's part numbers printing on the Purchase Orders?
    There is a flag that controls the printing of these part numbers which must be enabled. This flag is located in the Supplier Master File in the P/O Info section. This flag must be checked and the part numbers must exist in the Supplier Info screen of the products to ensure printing on your P/O's.

    Top

  11. Why am I not able to cancel a stock receipt?
    If the following conditions are true, the system will not allow you to cancel the stock receipt:
    - The P/O is linked to a sales order that has already been invoiced.
    - The P/O is linked to a transfer that is received
    - There is insufficient inventory
    - The P/O is already matched to an AP invoice, (the select button will be greyed out in Cancel Stock Receipts)

    Top

  12. I am receiving a Purchase Order and the 'Cancel' flag is checked on the lines that are not being received. Why?
    The 'Accept B/O' flag is not enabled for the P/O This flag defaults from the Supplier Master File but can be changed on the header of the Purchase Order.

    Top

  13. I am receiving a Purchase Order and I am unable to check the 'Cancel' flag at the end of the line to cancel the remaining quantity - Why?
    The 'Cancel' flag in Purchase Order Receiving is controlled by a user right. RTCPOB - Right To Cancel P/O Back Order is required.

    Top

  14. I am unable to change the Branch in the Expediting Reports program - Why?
    The ability to change the branch code in the Expediting Reports program is controlled by a user right. Users require RTCBOEXP to do this.

    Top

  15. We have moved to a new warehouse location. How can I change the address, telephone and fax number showing on our Purchase Orders?
    To change the address and contact information on Purchase Orders, go to Inventory -> Inv Master Files -> Warehouse Master. Select Modify and edit the information for the warehouse in question

    Top

  16. Where do the Purchase Analysis numbers come from and how are these updated?
    Purchase Analysis numbers are calculated based on receipt records. These numbers are updated when stock is received through stock receipts program - and when cancel stock receipts are processed.
    The purchase analysis is also rebuilt when you run the purchase analysis rebuild program and also when the Inventory statistics program is run as well.

    Top

  17. Can I have freight added at receiving, but want system to still include it in the total landed cost of the item?
    If you want to enter the freight at receiving time, then business rule PO # 3 needs to remain as 'Dollar Value'. This will enable them to enter the freight amount at receiving for the entire shipment, and the system will pro-rate it back to the items and distribute the freight to each item accordingly and it will be part of the total landed cost, as long as the PO is set to 'landed'. As for how the posting will work there are 2 different methods that I will explain:
    Method A:
    Using this method, provided that business rule PO # 11 is turned OFF - when the po is received, the posting will be a Dr to the inventory account for the full amount (including the freight) and a credit to the AP clearing account. When the supplier invoice is entered into the system, then you will still match the freight amount to the receipt to Dr the AP clearing account back out. So once you have entered all your supplier invoices, the net result of your AP clearing will be zero. There is no posting to your freight account using this method.
    Method B:

    Top

  18. Can a Purchase Order for a MISC type item be cancelled via the Cancel Stock Receipts Program
    Yes - Stock receipts for MISC can be cancelled via the Cancel Stock Receipts Program provided that the meet the usual conditions for cancelling Purchase Orders. For more information on these conditions please refer to the FAQ called 'Why can't I cancel this stock receipt'.

    Top

  19. I ran Planned PO Preparation - PPP - There was a PO Requisition on file for vendor XXX but the system created a second requistion for this vendor rather than adding to the existing one - Why?
    If the user's default warehouse is different from the warehouse on the first located open requisition of the same vendor, the program creates a new requistion.

    Top

  20. The system allows you to attach a signature to a buyer code. Does this need to be a specific format or file type in order for this to work?
    The signature feature should work with most common image types, like jpeg, gif, etc ... We recommend jpg images. Jpeg(or jpg) images are the smallest in size so they don't take much space yet they still give good quality in appearance.

    Top

  21. Are Drop Ship Orders included in the Purchase Analysis Report?
    Business Rule P/O # 33 controls whether or not you include drop ship orders in the Purchase Analysis Report. When enabled values for drop ships will be included. Note, if this rule has not been enabled at your site and you choose to enable it - there is a rebuild program that must be run before past drop ship values will be included. Should you need to run this please contact Support for more information.

    Top

  22. Where does the 'Vendor Contact' and the 'Ship to Contact' information pull from that appears on our purchase orders?
    The 'Vendor Contact' pulls from the 'ATTN' line on the PO Maintenance screen when the PO is being created, if the 'Attn' line is left blank, then it pulls in the contact from the PO info located in the AP master file.

    Top

  23. I am trying to close a drop ship Purchase Order because we aren't going to be processing this order now but it won't allow me - why?
    In order to cancel a Drop Ship Purchase Order, you must cancel the Sales Order that it is derived from. Cancelling the sales order automatically closes the linked PO.

    Top

  24. I have a supplier that insists on us sending Purchase Orders as a text file, is it possible to export a po from streamline to text?
    Yes it's possible to export a purchse order to a text file.
    Here are your options for doing this:
    You can email the PO to the supplier - it creates a PDF doc, and when they open that PDF doc, they have the option to save the PDF doc as a text file themselves if they have adobe writer.
    Or you can save the supplier this step, and create a PDF doc yourself when you print the PO. To do this, simply select the option for 'printer' and then select Adobe PDF as the printer (you have to have adobe writer installed) the system will create a document as a PDF file, you can then open the file, and save as text, and email the text file as an attachment to the supplier.

    Top

  25. Is there a way to see how much we have spent with a specific supplier?
    Yes - the following report will provide this information:
    Purchase Order Processing -> Reports and Inquiries -> Purchase Analysis Report
    This report allows you to specify a range of suppliers and print for either units or dollars for the current year, last year or both.

    Top

  26. Is there a place I can enter a message for Request for Quotes?
    A standard message can be set up for Request for Quotes documents in Company Setup -> Company Info -> Std Messages -> # 4.

    Top

  27. When entering a purchase order, how do I see inventory information in the same screen or on a drill down. (qty on hand, qty already on po, qty on sales order/backorder)?
    Please see attached file for instructions.

    Top

  28. How do I change a purchase order requisition to a PO and then break apart this requisition to different vendors without having to re-enter all data for the various vendors?
    See attached file for instructions on how to do this.
    Document: How to convert po to requisitions.pdf

    Top

  29. After receiving a partial p/o, i need the ability to print the p/o in question but with only the items remaining to be received, not the whole p/o showing items already received.
    You can always view what is "left to come" on a purchase order. We have full expediting within our purchase order module. This allows you to fax to your vendor all expected items (only the quantity left to come) within a time period. If the vendor advises of a change in receipt date and you enter this new date against the particular item(s) we will tell you what sales orders will miss their delivery data due to this change. This allows you to be proactive on customer orders.

    Top

  30. I am entering a po for an item that my supplier has never purchased. The system prompts me to add the supplier field to the item, but i get an error 'initial task mode not allowed'
    This message indicates that user has insufficient user rights. User requires RMII - Right to modify inventory item.

    Top

  31. I want the system to print logos for PO's by branch, how do I Set this up?
    If you want the PO logo to be pulled by branch, you need to link the logo to the 'Optional Logo' in the Organization and Branches > Logos. This Optional Logo button is actually only used for Po's.

    Top

  32. We have a user that left some items in Planned PO Preparation and went on vacation.. How can our administrator clear these records?
    An administrator with access to the User Rights file can log in to the security file and change their password. Then log in as that user - allowing the opportunity to clear the file.

    Top

  33. What is the hierarchy to determine what lines get flushed through recieving when only part of items are recieved?.
    Back orders are filled first. However, if a customer has a fill priority flag (fill rate) this affects the hierarchy. The higher the fill rate the sooner the back order is filled. After back orders are filled then stock is received - the users warehouse is filled first followed by the rest of the stock orders.

    Top

  34. I am trying to change the Freight In Bill Method on my purchase order and I am not able to - Why?
    The conditions for being able to modify this field (other than user rights required) are:
    The revision level of the PO must not be 999.
    The receive qty must be 0.
    The PO can not be a drop ship.
    The PO can not be closed.
    And Business Rule PO 16 must not be enabled.

    Top

  35. How can I change the default contact for Purchase Order Ship to records?
    The ship to on regular purchase orders is populated from the Warehouse Master file. The 'Contact' is located in Inventory-> Master Files -> Warehouse Master.

    Top

  36. Which rights would a user require to uncheck the 'Print Required Date on P.O.' flag ?
    User rights required for this are:
    ROPO Right Of Purchase Orders + RTPOMF Right To PO Master Files
    or
    ROAP Right Of Accounts Payable + RTAPMF Right To AP Master Files
    In addition they would also need RVS - Right to View Suppliers and RTMSUP - Right To Modify Supplier


    Top

  37. I am unable to access the Contract Cost Field in a Customer Contract - why?
    User Right RTECC - RIght to Enter Contract Cost - is required to access the Contract Cost field in Customer Contracts. A Contract Cost should be used with caution as this cost is used to post to the GL instead of the average cost. This can result in inventory balaning discrepancies if the contract cost is not the same as the average cost and this is not accounted for.

    Top

  38. Is there a way to have the line numbers print on a Purchase Order?
    Enabling Business Rule Forms # 257 will add the line numbers to the Purchase Orders.

    Top

  39. Many of our Purchase Orders are several pages long. Is there a way to not print the header information on the purchase orders on pages printed after Page 1?
    Enabling Business Rule Forms # 256 will suppress the P/O Header on the second and subsequent pages of P/O printing.

    Top

  40. What do I need to do to be able to print receiving labels from the PO receiving screen?
    Business rule PO # 36 must be enabled
    Label Integration flag must be turned on in: Control File Maintenance > Misc tab

    Top

  41. I have a Supplier Part Description entered, and my supplier wants it to show up on their Purchase Orders. Is this possible?
    Yes - the supplier part description is controlled through the following:
    Accounts Payable > Master Files > Suppliers >
    Find the supplier, and then click on Modify
    Then click on PO Info
    Check the flag called 'Print Supplier Part Number'
    This flag controls both the printing of the supplier part number as well as the supplier description.

    Top

  42. I have a Purchase Order that is not showing up on my expediting reports, and it falls within the criteria, I am selecting.
    The criteria for the expediting reports is that the Purchase Order needs be be printed.

    Top

  43. What happens if I use both the Transfers and Auto Link button in PPP?
    The procedure is to process any Transfers first, and then auto link. The system will take into consideration sales orders that have had a transfer processed against them, and will not link them to open purchase orders.

    Top

  44. What is the difference between the Outstanding PO report, and the PO Back Order Report?
    The Outstanding Report will include ALL Open Purchase Orders regardless of whether or not there has been any receiving done against the purchase order. The PO Back Order Report will only pull in PO's that have been previously received, but still have a balance against them.

    Top

  45. I have a BLUE Product Code on a PO, what does this represent?
    A blue product code in PO maintenance indicates that there is a line comment entered.

    Top

  46. How can I tell if a 2-way match PO has been matched to an Invoice.
    You can determine if a 2-way match purchase order has been matched but calling the purchase order up in Purchase Order Processing -> Processing -> PO Maintenance. If the PO has been matched, the Invoice number will be displayed to the right of the purchase order number.

    Top

  47. I want to use the percentage rebate method and I do not get the expected results?
    Rebate % is not a % of FOB cost, rather it is a % of rebated cost (the inverse of a mark up). The screen is confusing as is the calculation. Meanwhile the calculation to convert the FOB % to the % you need to enter is, Rebate Fob%/(100-Rebate FOB%)*100. I’ve attached a little excel spreadsheet, with the formula in the second column, you can type the % you want in the first column and it will convert it for you.
    We plan to make a change in the future to make these screen easier to understand.
    Document: 17184 Rebate % of Net Cost Calculator.xls

    Top

  48. How does Business Rule Forms # 352 impact the Purchase Orders when we are printing both our product codes and the supplier part numbers?
    When both the supplier part number and you product code are selected to print, if Business Rule Forms # 352 is enabled it will print your product code and and description line 1 & 2 from the inventory master file details screen, followed by the Supplier part number and the description from the supplier info screen.
    If Business Rule Forms # 352 is not enabled it prints your product code and description line 1 followed by the Supplier part number and description.

    Top

  49. Is there a way to warn a user when they have entered a stock receipt quantity that is greater than what was ordered on the Purchase Order?
    In the Supplier Master File -> PO Info screen there is a flag for 'Accept Overshipment'. If this flag is not enabled for a particular vendor, and a user processes a stock receipt for a quantity greater than what was ordered on the purchase order they will receive a warning message. The following warning pops up automatically as soon as they enter the quantity:

    Top

  50. What are the user rights required to enter a Supplier Contract?
    To enter a Supplier Contract the user would need:
    ROPO - Right Of Purchase Orders

    Top

  51. What sort order does the following report print in?: P/O Processing -> Reports and Inquires --> P/O's Issued.
    This report prints based on the following sort order:
    Po closed flag - so open po's print first and closed po's print last
    then by buyer code
    then by supplier code
    This is according to details from a programmer on

    Top

  52. In Purchase Order Processing -> Processing -> PO Maintenance - in the Additional Information screen there is a field for 'Customer Owned #' . What does this field do.
    This field will allow the user to F5 and select a Customer Code from the Customer Master File. This field is not used anywhere in the system and is only for internal reference as defined by the user.

    Top

  53. I can set a PO Tolerance in the Control File Maintenance - AP Tab. What is the calculation the system uses to determine a below tolerance condition?
    PO Tolerance is applied with the following calculation:
    FOB Amount / Cost UOM Factor > Average Cost Amount + Average Cost Amount x PO Tolerance /100 OR FOB Amount / Cost UOM Factor < Average Cost Amount - Average Cost Amount x PO Tolerance /100

    Top

  54. Where is the Purchase Analysis rebuild located?
    The Purchase Analysis rebuild is located in the Insatllation > Utilities menu.

    Top

  55. When entering a Po, what are the conditions to have the GL number on the PO screen updated automatically by the system?
    The Branch and Org in the PO header must be the same as the Branch and Org in the items' product line setup for the Inventory GL. If the same, the sytem will automatically populate the GL field in the po detail with the Inventory GL, otherwise it leaves it blank. Also, if the item is a Misc item, then user is forced to enter an offsetting GL in the same field.

    Top

  56. On the Supplier Performance Report, how is the Fill % and On Time % calculated?
    Fill % Total = Total of "Qty Rcvd" / Total of Qty Ordered * 100
    On time % = Number of received lines in time / Total number of lines * 100
    Report is looking the Received Qty and Ordered Qty on Revision 1 of the given range. The Fill Rate% is calculated as follows :- Received Qty on Rev1 / Ordered Qty on Rev1 * 100
    For example if a PO has two revisions and on Rev 1 it receives 5 and ordered qty is 6
    the Fill Rate % is correctly showing on the report as 83% . However The report will print both

    Top

  57. I there a way to see what vendor invoice number is associated with our PO number?
    Yes – go to either place: Accounts payable > Master Files > Suppliers > Park on supplier and use button located at the bottom called Transaction Inquiry. Or you can go through Accounts Payable > Reports and Inquiries > AP Transaction Inquiry (both locations calls the same program)
    You can search by PO, or invoice and if there are matches made, then the system will display the info on the screen for you, and you are able to park on the field and hit F5 to further drill into the details. If there are no matches, it will say ‘there are no matched invoices found’


    Top

  58. What user right do I need to re-open closed Purchase Orders?
    You need to have all the same user rights required to be able to create a PO.
    ROPO, RTPOP, MPO, and RTMPO
    If you have access to create a po then you have access to close, and re-open purchase orders. Note – only purchase orders that have been closed manually can be re-opened. If a po was closed through a system process it can’t be re-opened unless you cancel the stock receipt.

    Top

  59. I am trying to receive a large Po and the 'Receive All' button is not enabled - why?
    The 'Receive All' button is only enabled if all items on the po are NOT lot or serial controlled. If there is even one item that is lot or serial controlled, then the 'Receive All' button will not be enabled.

    Top

  60. Why can't I receive a drop ship PO?
    The system will not allow you to receive a Drop Ship PO, they are automatically received when the drop ship sales order is invoiced. The idea is that whatever the supplier invoiced you for, is was what was shipped to the customer and you need to invoice the customer for same. The PO Receipt is done for the same qty's invoiced to he customer in the same step. The qty's do not affect your inventory as they never really entered your inventory. They will still credit AP Clearing to be matched with the suppliers invoice.

    The Sales Order should appear in the invoice prep screen, as soon as you have linked the PO to the drop ship order, you do not need to print a controlling doc to invoice drop ship sales orders..

    Top

  61. What does the Auto Link button in PPP do?
    Here is some info on how the Auto Link Button works, and things you can check when you feel it is not inking to open PO's:

    It is controlled through user right RTALOPO. - ensure users have this right.

    It will automatically link all open stock po's that are on order, to any back orders that have come into the PPP run for purchase. So if you have stock on order that will cover current backorders needed, then this will find them and link to them and hopefully prevent you from possibly over purchasing the item. The accumulated orders report will then show the linked items, as it does now, and if there are changes required by the user, the user can still go to source detail to unlink or change as necessary. This will only happen however if the open po is for the SAME wh as the back order line requirements that you are trying to link. It does not work when linking across different warehouses, and so it will also only link to stock purchase orders for the same warehouse that you are running Planned Po for.


    There is also a way to have an item excluded from Auto Linking. This is done through: Inventory > Master Files > Additional Info. There is a field called 'exclude from PPP Autolinking' check if this is turned on.

    There is also an option that allows you to maintain the SO to PO links created in your PPP run if you exit the run without generating PO's.
    Check to ensure the open PO is not already linked to another order.

    If you have checked all these areas and you cannot get it to link still, then support know and we will investigate. We will need to see the example, i.e. item and po and sales order you are trying to link.

    If the issue turns out to be procedural or a setup issue, then time spent investigating this would be billable.

    Top

  62. What is the right to allow us to modify or enter PO comments?
    The right is RTMCMNT

    Top

  63. What is the difference between Freight In (Bill Method and Cost Method) under Purchase Orders?
    Bill Method:
    Other - indicates that the Freight will be billed by another Vendor then the one on the PO.
    Vendor - indicates that the Freight will be billed by the Vendor on the PO.

    Costing Method:
    Expensed - The freight cost is not included in the landed cost of the product and will not be a part of the inventory cost of the product. It is not required to be matched when invoiced (is not included in AP Clearing) and will be expensed to the GL account for Freight Expense set in the currency master, at the time of invoicing.
    Landed - The Freight cost is included in the landed cost of the product and will be a part of the inventory cost of the product. Does need to matched at invoice time and will show in AP Clearing until it is matched.
    Also see Business rule PO#11 which allows a combination method, to expense freight in G/L but include in landed cost at receipt. This business rule will effectively pro-rate the freight expense portion to landed cost but post to
    the freight expense account in the G/L. No matching will be required. This will only work if the
    freight allocation method is not Actual.

    Top

  64. I'm having trouble deleting a line item from an open PO. F3 Delete key is not working?
    If there is an open Planned Po Session that has this item or PO locked in it, then you can’t delete the line. To confirm if this is the case, go to Planned Po preparation, if it comes up and tells you that users are locking PPP then ask those users to clear their sessions and try it again. The screen will list the users that are locking it.
    The other reason you might not be able to delete the line is if you have already received any lines on that po. If so, it’s assumed that the supplier has a copy of the po already, and system prevents you from deleting a line once the po has been received so there are no discrepancies between what you sent the supplier and the system. The way around this is to cancel the line through Po receiving. You don’t have to actually receive anything, just go to: PO Receiving, and click on the Cancel box at the end of the line and click on update. This will mark the line as completed.

    Top

  65. I have Po's linked to sales order, but when the PO is recieved, the system is not flushing the shipped qty on the sales order - why?
    You need to review your back order flush reports; this is the report that prints with the stock receipts program. It will generally tell you why the orders were not flushed. Some of the most common reasons are:
    -revision has a printed Pick slip that is not yet confirmed. System can’t flush if controlling document has printed, but not confirmed yet as next revision has not yet been created.
    -order is not flagged to accept back orders, and the receipt will only cover a part of the requirement
    -order is on hold and you do not allow held orders to be flushed
    -requirements are for a kit
    -order was already flushed by another means

    Top

  66. How does PO Requisitions work?
    PO Requisitions, below is a brief overview:.
    To use PO Requisitions rather then PO's your users that normally create PO's will have to choose to create Requisitions in PPP, after generating it will asks you. When manually creating a PO they would need to choose menu option, Purchase Order Processing > Processing > PO Requisitions > Requisition Maint. rather then PO Maint. Entry, it works the same as PO Maint. There are no rights or business rules to control access or prevent users from still creating PO's, the only related Business rules is PO 42.
    So users will have to be trained to do this, and then you would need to setup a process where staff check for open PO Requisitions to review, correct and then Create PO's for them.

    Top

  67. Is there a way to enter the po confirmation number and date for Drop Ship Po's?
    You cant modify it from the PO maintenance screen; because it’s a drop ship po and most of the fields on this screen are not modifiable for drop shipments. However you can do it from the following: Purchase Order Processing > Po Confirmation > Confirm Purchase Order. Enter the Po number, then the confirmation number, and date, and click exit, and the information entered should then write back to the screen below. If you need to make a change to the confirmation number or date, you need to go through the same process as above.

    Top

  68. Can you enter Lot/Serial transfer in PPP when you have business rule PO 45 on?
    Yes, you can but you have to enter the lot/serial numbers by modifying the committed transfer after. See attached.
    Document: PPP Transfers for Lot items with PO 45 on.pdf

    Top

  69. I need to make an amendment to the Alternate system Ship To Address but cannot remember where this master file is located.
    the Alternate Address Information from the PO is located in the warehouse master file, go to: Inventory > Master Files > warehouse master > find warehouse code, click modify, then click on button called Alt PO Address.

    Top

  70. How does the flag to transfer SO Comments to PO work if you run PPP and have have multiple SO's that would make up the PO QTY to be ordered.
    The transfer comments to PO options was written to only work on a one on one basis, therefore the possibility of PPP bringing in multiple sales orders with same products and multiple comments to one line on a PO will not happen. SO comments will only transfer if there is a one on one link to SO.
    If the same product is used on multiple lines on the Sales order it will only transfer the last lines comments to the PO. In this case you should enter all prod comments on the last line of the Sales Order to have them transfer to the P.O. comments, since all the lines will consolidate to the P.O. as one line, you need to adjust
    the comments entered accordingly.
    If it’s the only item on the PO or Requisition, the comment gets transferred. (Even when the Requisition is made to a PO).
    If there are multiple S/O’s for the same product code on the PPP run, and both sales orders have Transfer comment to PO flagged), neither comment will transfer to the PO.
    If there are other items on the PPP run (for the same vendor code) and one of the sales order does NOT have the Transfer comment to PO, but the other Sales Order does have it checked off, the comment will NOT transfer.
    If a PO Requisition has already been started, and you add to it thru PPP and the product code is flagged to Transfer comment to PO, it does get transferred.
    If a PO Requisition has already been started, and you add to it thru PPP and the product code is flagged to Transfer comment to PO, it does NOT get transferred, if there is another item with the same vendor code on that PPP run.

    Top

  71. I am trying to re-open a closed po but the button is ghosted?
    Po’s can only be re-opened manually through PO maintenance if they were closed manually. PO’s closed automatically through the system can’t be re-opened, unless you cancel the last stock receipt.

    Top

  72. IDI Connect: If a PO has been submitted through IDI connect, what happens if it's previewed or printed again? Does it get re-sent?
    IDIConnect Export P/O module now has the option to export/send puchase orders to IDI on-demand. This will also allow purchase orders to be printed without sending to IDI.

    Top

  73. IDI Connect: To cancel a PO or a line on the PO that was mistakenly sent when previewed, I assume I will have to contact IDI vendors to fix it?
    Yes, that is correct, you need to contact IDI to get this corrected on their end.

    Top

  74. IDI Connect: How does IDI handle duplicate POs that have been sent?
    There was a modification done on sid 22078.
    IDIConnect Export P/O module now has the option to export/send puchase orders to IDI on-demand. This will also allow purchase orders to be printed without sending to IDI.
    Available for purchase with IDI module only.

    Top

  75. IDI Connect: What kind of confirmation exists apart from the PO summary screen that says 'Member PO sent on xxx date'? Is there an email sent for errors ie non matching supplier part numbers, setup errors?
    We have no control over vendor data that are not using the Streamline system, but for any vendor on Streamline who have purchased the IDIConnect module, each element of the data is validated before the order is created; any failed validations are emailed to the respective CSR reps to follow up with the members and work to minimize future data errors in transmission. Unfortunately, we can’t validate data when we send the P/O out to IDI from the member side, so there is nothing on your end that we could provide indicating that the order did not go through. Toreion might have a web portal that you can access and possibly IDI is configured to receive any failed transmissions. You will have to contact IDI/Toreion on this for further info.

    Top

  76. IDI Connect: Is there a way to preview the po before it gets sent to IDI? Purchasers/buyers would like to review their PO’s before submitting (apart from looking at the details on screen).
    As the next development initiative, within the “Print” window (both batch and online), you will have an additional option to “Export IDI P/O” if the vendor is set as an IDI vendor. You can check/uncheck this option depending on whether you wish to send the p/o or just print/preview it locally. This option will allow you to resubmit a p/o as well. This has not been developed, but is on the devleopment list for future modifications.

    Top

  77. IDI Connect: What are the mapped file specifications
    Please see attached document for information.

    Note: The 5 header comments are from PO header, Additional Info button, which is one field parsed into 5 but all info entered is sent. The 5 detail comments can be seen in the PO Details file folder at that end of each PO line, there are actually 6 line available but only the first 5 will be sent.
    Document: IDI Connects - Mapping for PO export.pdf

    Top

  78. IDI Connect: What is the setup required for IDI Connect?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: IDI Connect Export PO.pdf

    Top

  79. How does the Distribution Center Module work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: 16014-Distribution Centre Processing User Doc 1.03.pdf

    Top

  80. How does the program 'Request for Quote' work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Purchase Order RQF Specifications.pdf

    Top

  81. How do I use the Transfer button in Planned P/O Preparation?
    Please see attached document for information
    Document: How to do Warehouse Transfers IN PPP.pdf

    Top

  82. I am getting unexpected results in my Planned Purchase Order Processing run. Why?
    Please see attached document for troubleshooting tips for Planned P/O Processing.
    Document: Planned Purchase Order Processing- A Guide To Understanding the Results.pdf

    Top

  83. What is the buy-up factor for in PPP?
    The idea with the buy-up factor in PPP is to find extra items to order when you are trying to meet supplier minimums (if an item has a ROP of 20 and the available is 21, it would not be brought into purchasing, but it is close. A buyup of 1.1 would convert the ROP to 22 and the item WOULD be brought in. It also increases the amount you buy by the same factor.

    Top

  84. I have received a P/O that should have generated a transfer for the detail lines, but no transfer was generated. Why?
    If the customer for the order that the PO is linked to has the flag "Direct Ship from Main Whse" turned on, then no transfer is generated.

    Top

  85. I’m trying to change our US ship to address for PO’s. Can you tell where I can change them?
    The system pulls the address for the Ship to section on PO’s from the warehouse file. Go to: Inventory > Master Files > Warehouse Master > Find the warehouse, click on Modify. If you have an address entered in the ALT PO ADD button, it uses that, otherwise will use the address on the main warehouse screen.


    Top

  86. How do I modify the Carrier field for a Drop Ship P/O?
    You can modify the field in PO Maintenance. Although it does not appear as a modifiable field, since its grayed out, the system does still allow you to overwrite the info and modify it.

    Top

  87. What user right is required to be able to enter P/O Notes?
    MPO and RTMPO

    Top

  88. When creating a PO from Requisitions, how does it calculate the Date Wanted? Does it carry forward the date from the Requisitions? How does it calculate lead times if an item was on a PO requisition first?
    When entering a Requisition, the system takes into consideration the lead time, and will update the date wanted based on it, just like it does if a Purchase Order is entered.
    When the Requisition is turned into a Purchase Order, the system will carry forward the date wanted from the Requisition, so the Purchase Order Date wanted will be the Requisitions' date wanted.
    If the requisition is not turned into a PO until AFTER the date wanted has already passed, it's not adjusted, the system just carries over the date even if its past that date.
    The Date Wanted field is pulled from the Lead Time (Days) located in the Product Master, Supplier Info file. It uses the Lead Times (Days) regardless of the Manual, or Automatic Flag. If no Lead Time (Days) is set, it takes the lead time from the Supplier Master File, located in the PO Info Field. If no lead time is set in the supplier master file, it defaults to the current date. It does not seem to consider the average lead time. This testing was done through PO maintenance.
    There is a Business Rule INV #32 but that is specifically for EOQ/ROP calculations only.

    Top

  89. I have a Special FOB cost entered at the end of the line item in Order Entry, but it is not being picked up in Planned PO?
    If you have an order that contains a Special FOB cost entered at the end of the line item, and you run PPP for just that one order alone, system picks up the Special FOB cost and automatically uses it rather than the supplier's FOB. However this only works when running PPP for just the one item. If you run PPP for all backorders for the item/supplier, its only bringing in one line for the source details, and therefore the special FOB cost is not being picked up in this case. The difficulty with this is when Stock order is included in the Planned PO Run. The backorder linked lines in source details reduce the Stock qty order line and would have to check for other lines in the PPP run to determine an accurate stock qty to be ordered. Auto linking for lines with a Special FOB would not work either.

    Top

  90. AP > Master File > Supplier > PO info > Days Before Available for Transfer in PPP
    It is enabled if Business Rule PO39_Transfer Eval During PPP Valid <> '0'. Pls refer to the BR details for it's logic

    Top

  91. I'm getting a message Cost UOM or Conversion factor missing, how do I fix this?
    Try calling up the PO in PO Maint and click modify in the header. Then park on the line with the problem, tab to the price field, and make sure that you press F5 on the price and ACCEPT it using the accept button on that screen. If you need to change the price, do so, and then once finished, tab to the end of the line and arrow off to another line. Then try to receive it again.

    Let us know if this does not correct it and we will have to have a programmer fix the data for you.

    Top

  92. How does 2-way matching work?
    In the AP Supplier file there is the ability to set the match method to, 2-Way, the system will match a purchase order to an A/P Invoice. Inventory levels will not be affected. This is useful for office supply purchases, where you want to send a P.O. to the vendor, etc.

    You enter a P.O. for the 2 way vendor, you will only be allowed to choose items that are a misc stock type. You do not receive these, but when you enter the AP Invoice you click on the match button and the P.O. will be there to match to. The invoice posting should debit the account used when entering the Misc item on the P.0. or allow you to enter GL accounts to expense it to.

    Top

  93. How does the Alternate Supplier Field in Planned Po Preparation work?
    When an alternate supplier is entered into the field in the Planned Po Screen, it works the same way as it would without an alternate supplier, however it replaces all supplier codes with the alternate supplier code without checking if the item is setup for that supplier or not. The program assumes that if you are running Planned Po with an alternate supplier, that all the items will have that alternate supplier setup as a secondary supplier in the Supplier Info Screen. The program even creates a list of items that don't have the alternate supplier setup for them. With this list, you can use the F3 key to delete the item that is missing the alternate supplier setup, in order to eliminate it from the current Planned Po run.

    Top

  94. When I cancelled a Stock Receipt why did it post to inventory with a different cost and post an inventory adjustment?
    If there are transactions other than SR,CSR(with landed cost only),TRN or CTR, then
    current average cost will be used in cancellation and difference will be posted to adjustment gl.

    If there are no transactions or the above mentioned transactions only, then landed cost
    will be used in cancellation and warehouse average cost will be adjusted and a average cost history
    record for the cancellation will be created.

    See attached for further info.
    Document: Cancel Stock Receipts cost adjustment.pdf

    Top

  95. Is there a way to link stock Purchase Orders for raw materials to production tickets?
    No, there is not currently a process for this, but the work around or compromise on this one, is that the PO Receiving flush report tells you the production tickets in need for the products you just received. So you can call up each Production Ticket in Po Maint and reserve the stock to them before others steal it.

    Top

  96. Why do Sales Orders that contains Build to Order Kits not flush automatically when a linked PO is received?
    The link is established, and when the purchase order is received, it does indicate on the receiving reports that the inventory is intended for the order it is linked to. However it will not automatically flush the inventory to the linked Sales Order; because we do not track the finished goods inventory on Build to Order products. The flush reports will indicate that the reason for not flushing is due to the fact that it's a raw material. Upon receiving the PO, and reviewing the flush reports, you would have to manually call up the order in order entry, and update the shipped qty on the order to reflect the inventory that was received for it.

    Top

  97. On Printed Po's where does the information from the Supplier contact field come from?
    The Supplier contact is pulled from the PO header ATTENTION line, and this is picked up from the Supplier Address table. When you are entering in a po, if you park on the envelope beside the Supplier field, it will show you the Supplier Address file used. This is where this is picked up from and it can be modified from either the supplier Address table or on the PO directly.

    Top

  98. On Printed Po's where does the information from the Ship to contact field come from?
    The Ship to contact is pulled from the ALTER ship to button located on the right hand side of the PO maint screen, and it is picked up from the WAREHOUSE master file for the warehouse that is linked to the header of the PO. In the warehouse file is a field for contact. However, if in the warehouse file, you have a contact entered into the ALT PO ADDRESS field then that is what it will use instead. The Ship to contact can also be modified on the po directly.
    Document: Warehouse Alt PO Address.pdf

    Top

  99. On Printed Po's where does the information from the Entered By field come from?
    The Entered by field comes from the NAME linked to the user ID that entered the po. The name for the user is picked up from Company Setup > User Maintenance.

    Top

  100. What is BR PO50 (P/O Receiving Transfers - Save transfers without processing) and how does it work?
    See attached document.
    Document: 22310-Auto-commit transfers created via PO Receipt.pdf

    Top

  101. How do I get freight to print on the PO?
    It's based on the BILL METHOD in the PO header: VENDOR = print freight. OTHER = do not print freight.

    Top

  102. When using thre transfers button in PPP how does it decide what warehouse to transfer from?
    First it tries to find a whs to cover all purchase qty in PPP. It also checks for the
    age of the inventory(in days) based on last receipt date and tries to transfer from whs with stock
    older than setup with "stock transfer allow days" on whs master screen.
    If it can't fill from a single whs, then it tries to transfer from multiple whs until all
    required is transferred or there is no available left.
    Age is not looked at if "stock transfer allow days" is not set.

    Top

  103. Why is the 'Receive All' button located in the PO Stock Receipts screen not enabled?
    'Receive All' button is only enabled if there are no Lot/Serial items to be received. If there is even one Lot or Serial item, then the 'Receive All' button is disabled.

    Top

  104. Can I back date a PO Receipt?
    Yes you can change the date in the Stock Receipts screen to back date it, but would caution you to only use when needed as can cause some confusion when transaction appear out of order for average cost calculation.
    If you want to post the Stock Receipt to the month you back dated it to, you will also have to back date the register when you run the update. Follow these step in order to do this for just the one receipt:
    - before you do the stock receipt entry you should update the current stock receipt register so there is nothing left to post in register
    - then do the Stock Receipt and back date it
    - then update the register and back date it before anyone enters any other stock receipts

    Top

  105. Is there an overview document for the Enhanced Replenishment Module ( ERM )?
    Please see attached document.
    Document: White Paper for Enhanced Replenishment Module.pdf

    Top

  106. to be re-used

    Top

  107. Can I change the cost on a PO line and not have to chagne the supplier landed cost table?
    Yes you can override the cost on the PO line. See attached.
    Document: Cost override in PO.pdf

    Top

  108. I am trying to receive a zero cost po, but I am receiving an error that tells me missing uom or conversion factor missing. How do I fix this?
    When this error is received on a zero cost line on a po, it means that the user did not press the ACCEPT button when in the pricing details in the PO maint screen. Here is the workaround to fix this:
    Call up the po in PO maintenance, and modify it. Park on the line with the problem, and then enter 0.00 into the price field and immediately, press F5. Then press the ACCEPT button to set the zero cost. Arrow down to the next line, and retry the receiving again.

    Top

  109. Why can I not park and modify the branch code on po?
    Conditions to park in the branch field on po and modify it are as follows:
    Multi Branch should be flagged & MBP8 should not be flagged, p/o should not be closed, not be a drop-ship p/o, received=0 & p/o should not be received in full.

    Top

  110. PO requisitions that are linked to sales orders show up as RED records, but in one of my companies they are not red, why?
    This is controlled by BR PO42, it needs to be turned ON at each sites company for them to see p/o req. in red.

    Top

  111. What right do I need to be able to see costs in PO Maint?
    DACIIL

    Top

  112. Is there a way to reprint the stock receiving reports?
    Purchase Order Processing > Receiving > Stock Receipts Report, will allow you to reprint the backorder flush report and stocking report. However these reports do not show amounts, you can see these either in PO Maint, or by reprinting the Stock Receipts Register.

    Top

  113. Why can I not link a sales order to a PO for a raw material on a kit?
    The link can be established through PO maintenance, but you must specify the sales order line number in the detail screen, as well as the sales order number. Otherwise, you will receive a message indicating that the sales order line is not found if you just enter the order number and not the line number.

    Top

  114. How do Purchase Contracts work?
    See attached.
    Document: Purchase Contracts.pdf

    Top

  115. Can you explain what the difference is between the reorder multiple and minimum order qty in the supplier info screen?
    The minimum order quantity is a warning only and in PPP and PO Maint.
    The Reorder Multiple is a number that forces the user to order quantities that are evenly divisible by that number. When required, the system will add an adjustment to bring the ordered quantity up to the next reorder multiple.
    Document: Reorder Multiple and Min Order Qty.pdf

    Top

  116. How does Freight processing work for PO and AP Invoices?
    See attached documentation on options available.
    Document: Freight Processing for PO's and AP.pdf

    Top

  117. Is there a way to issue a PO for internal purchases that will not affect inventory?
    You can set up a 2 way match supplier and create a PO for that supplier using MISC stock type items only. These PO's are not received, but you do match them to the AP Invoices when they come in. The 2 way PO remains open until it is matched to the invoice.

    Top

  118. How does the Rejected field work in PO receiving?
    The rejected field allows you to enter the qty of inventory that was received to you from the supplier that you are not accepting for whatever reason. For example the goods might be damaged.
    Here is an example of how it works: PO has 10 on order, supplier ships you 5. In the PO receiving screen, you enter Qty Received = 5 (this includes the full amt of the inventory that arrived at your door stop). You then find that 2 of the items were damaged and so you enter Rejected Qty = 2. The balance on the po wil be 7. On order - received - rejected = qty actually received. The posting will be for a qty of 3 not a qty of 5.

    Top

  119. Why am I not able to modify create a PO?
    Assuming you have the user rights already, then you likely do not have a buyer code entered into the user maintenance screen and as such if the buyer restriction flag is also OFF, then you can't create or modify a po.

    So in summary you need to go to:

    Company Setup > User Maintenance > Find the user who cannot modify or create a po.
    Click on Modify button.
    Located in that screen is a field called 'Buyer Override' you need to make sure that there is a check mark entered here. Otherwise unless there is a buyer code entered into the 'Buyer Code' field on this same screen, the user cannot create or modify purchase orders.

    Top

  120. When I back date the Clear Unmatched Stock Receipts program, I see records where the FOB amounts are greyed out, why?
    When the records are greyed out this means that the PO was received AFTER the matched date on the invoice this can happen when you back date AP invoices. These records do not show when you leave the TO date blank, only when you back date do they appear as grey.

    Top

  121. When entering PO I receive a warning: 'Your cost is outside the tolerance %' What does this mean and how do I fix this?
    Located under: Company Setup > Control File Maintenance, under PO tab is a field that you set and control. In this field you enter the % amt of your tolerance variance for the cost.
    The calculation used is as follows:
    FOB amount /Cost uom factor > Average Cost Amount + Average Cost Amount X Po tolerance / 100 OR
    FOB amount /Cost uom factor < Average Cost Amount - Average Cost Amount X Po tolerance /100

    So in other words it looks at the supplier FOB divides it by the cost uom factor and checks if it is great than the average cost and if it is then it adds the average cost multiplies it by the po tolerance % and divides by 100.
    If the average cost is less, then it subtracts it rather than adds it.
    If you do not want to use this, you need to make the field zero.

    Top



Query Questions

  1. Where is the way bill information stored? I would like to use this in a query.
    The waybill no. is stored in the so_bol_headers file. The field is bolh_waybill_num.

    Top

  2. I would like to write a query for the information contained in the Customer Master File -> Pricing Overrides
    To get the information located in the Customer Master File - Pricing Overrides:
    table name: prodlines_by_customer this table stores pricing overrides by product lines and by products.. to check for product line pricing use column "plc_recordtype_flg" = 'L' and for products user plc_recordtype_flg = 'I'
    link with other customer id, product line, product id columns respectively.

    Top

  3. I would like to write a query to print a report of the customer part numbers set up for a particular customer - what do I need to pull in to the query?
    Query to get report for Customer Part Numbers
    Required:
    cu_cust_id
    prcu_cust_id
    prcu_prod_id
    prcu_prodline_id
    prcu_cust_part_num
    pr_prod_id
    pr_1_desc
    Link cu_cust_id and pr_cu_cust_id
    Link prcu_cust_part_num and pr_prod_id
    Add Critertia to cu_cust_id to equal the value of the customer code you want.

    Top

  4. I want to create a report that will show me the orders that used quote pricing, and/or that were created from a quote - what information do I need to pull in for this?
    To write a report to pull in Orders that Used Quote Pricing
    If the order was created directly from a quote - look at so_order_headers and field is soh_quote_num.
    If the order was not created directly from a quote but did use quote pricing - look in so_orderrev_details and field is srd_pricetype_flg. Look for price type Q.

    Top

  5. We are building a report and would like to see orders where a Special FOB cost was used. What file / field do we use for this?
    The file is so_ordrev_details and field is srd_special_fob_amt.

    Top

  6. How can I easily get a list of all my suppliers for a particular currency?
    The easiest way to get this data is to query the data.

    Top

  7. I would like to create a GP report and need to know what field contains the cost of a line item from a sales order.
    Query the file So_Bol_Details

    Top

  8. What are the files and fields required to create a query involving the type of credit memo that was created - either Return to Stock or Price Adjustment?
    The Table is so_order_headers
    The Field is soh_cm_backtoinv_log - If the value for this field is TRUE then the credit is a ‘Return to Stock’ type credit. If the value of the field is FALSE then the credit is a ‘Price Adjustment type.

    Top

  9. I would like to do a query that involves the Inventory Transaction History screen files - what should I use?
    in_trans_headers and in_trans_details store the transaction history. inv_trans_code may be necessary to determine what a particular transaction code stands for and whether it should be added or subtracted from the running total.

    Top

  10. I would like to build a query that will look at the Company Setup -> System Auditing -> Audit Report for Code Changes data. What file would we use for that query?
    The data for the Audit Report for Code Changes is held in file change_code_audit.

    Top

  11. We are writing a Query and want to know what the so_bol_headers. bol_shp_or_prt_date records?
    This field / field is updated when the p/s is printed and again when the order is confirmed.

    Top

  12. we are writing a query and want to use the field for 'Ship Complete' in the options screen of Sales Order Entry. What is the file and field we need to look at for our query?
    The Ship Complete Flag is located in File: so_ordrev_headers & Field: srh_shpmnt_compl_log

    Top

  13. Where can I query the information as to whether or not a Purchase Order has been printed?
    You can locate this information in:
    File po_headers
    Field poh_printed_log

    Top

  14. I am trying to create a query that will show me the primary vendor landed cost for items. How can I do this?
    In addition to any fields you want to include in your query, including the following information will make it possible to pull the primary vendor and their landed cost:
    From file ‘products’ include pr_prim_supplier_id (this gives you the primary supplier for the item)
    From the file ‘prod_supplier’ include ps_supplier_id and ps_landed_cost_amt. This will give you all the suppliers and their respective landed costs for each item.
    If you then link the ps_supplier_id to the pr_prim_supplier_id it should eliminate all records but the primary with it’s respective landed cost.

    Top

  15. I need to write a query to check the flags that are set in the Inventory Master File for the Extended Descriptions. I want to check what is set for the Forms Control flags. What file is the Forms Control information held in?
    To access the Forms Controls flags you would need to look in the products file. The fields you would need are as follows:
    pr_qte_prtexdesc_log
    pr_ord_prtexdesc_log
    pr_ps_prtexdesc_log
    pr_inv_prtexdesc_log
    pr_po_prtexdesc_log

    Top

  16. How can I tell if a quote has been printed?
    Query File Quote_header
    Field qh_print_log will be set to 0 if unprinted and 1 if printed

    Top

  17. How can I create a query to give me the average payment days for a customer?
    In addition to the basic information you require in your query - such as customer code, name, etc. - the following outlines how to obtain the average payment dayThe average payment days are calculated on the fly for the Customer Statistics screen based on the following formula:
    Total of (Invoice full paid date - Invoice Date) / Number of invoices
    All of this information is pulled from file ar_invoices. The field for fully paid date is arih_fullypaid_date and the field for the Invoice date is arih_invoice_date.
    In the statistics screen you also have the option as to whether you want to include manual invoices as well - some sites don’t want the AR debits / credits they create included because these generally get ‘paid’ right away because they are for internal adjustments and thus skewing the true picture.
    Depending on if you want to include those, you would also look at field arih_enteredby_flg and add criteria for the ones with a value of ‘M’ as these are the ‘Manual’ type credit / debit entries done directly through AR Invoice / Adjustment Entry.

    Top

  18. Sales Order Processing > processing > order entry > line comments > At the end of the line you can have line comments - where are these stored for reporting purposes?
    Line comments are stored in file 'general_memos' with the following criteria:
    gmem_system_flg shoudl be 'L' for sales order line details
    gmem_key1 consists of order no (hyphen) rev no (hyphen) line no

    Top

  19. I want to write a report that pulls my quotes and the status that they are in?
    File is Quote_headers
    Field is qh_stage_flag
    Quote Stage:

    0 = open
    1 = closed and then re-opened again
    8 = closed (this includes forcing expired when BR so 92 is set)
    9 = cancelled

    Top

  20. I am working on customized reports using Sales Analysis Reporting. What tables do I use?
    The sales analysis tables are stored in a different database, so you need to establish an ODBC connection to database: sisl_app The names of the tables are: sasort_appl_codes - this is the internal codes, and these are the codes that you need to match the data to. This table has the code and the description. For example Z2 is sales analysis by customer code. When creating reports from sales table sales _history you need to filter data in the field sah_sort_id based on the code you want to use.
    The other part of this is the numerical code, each one of those relates to each segment, for examples 2 = customer, 6 =customer type 9 = Product code, 10 is product line. This list can be found in the same database sisl_app in table sasort_keys.
    You need to recognize which report you are running and find the best code to use.

    Top

  21. How do I query a list of all the Transaction types including the system defined ones?
    This data resides in file In_trans_controls and this table resides in a different data source, you need to connec to sisl_app to get the list, and this is not something that the users will have access to, therefore support needs to query it for user. See below for list as of June 12th/09
    BAI Build Assembled Item
    C/A Cost Adjustments
    C/R Customer Returns
    CAI Cancel Assem Item Bld
    CCM Cancel Credit Memo
    CCO Cancel Shipment
    CM Credit Memo
    CO Confirmed Shipment
    CSR Cancel Stock Receipt
    CTR Cancel Transfer
    CWF Cancel W/O - Finished
    CWR Cancel W/O - Raw Mat.
    DS Drop Ship Confirmed
    DSC Drop Ship Cancelled
    I/R Inventory Receipts
    INV Invoicing
    MAN Manual Entry
    MAP Match 2-Way A/P Inv
    PHY Physical Inventory
    Q/A Quantity Adjustment
    QM Quantity Minus
    R/S Return to Supplier
    RAR RA Supplier Receipt
    RMI Raw Material In
    RMO Raw Material Out
    S/R Stock Receipts
    TRN Transfers
    TRV Transfer Received
    UMA Unmatch 2-Way A/P Inv
    WF W/O - Finished Good
    WR W/O - Raw Material

    Top

  22. What is the file that contains the data for the ON HOLD flag in order entry?
    This flag is stored as SRH_HOLD_LOG field in file SO_ORDREV_HEADERS.

    Top

  23. I am writing a query and need to know where the data that is entered in the Memo in the AP supplier master file is located?
    The memos are stored in a table called 'general_memos'. The field 'gmem_system_flg' will have the
    value 'V' for the supplier (vendor) memos and the field 'gmem_key1' will be the supplier code.
    The memo will be stored in the field 'gmem_memo2' which is up to 796 characters. The field holds all
    the memo lines with embedded carriage returns so you may need to play with the amount of space

    Top

  24. I am trying to run a query and receiving the following error: Microsoft ODBC - SQL SERVER DRIVER 'user public' does not have permission to run DBCC - TRACEON.
    This has to do with a conflict between Microsoft Excel and SQL Server 2005, when trying to access data for excel. Although it is believed that Microsoft has resolved this issue in the newer version of the application, there is a work around that our clients will need to implement if they are running on SQL server 2005 and are unable to access data through Excel or Ms-Query. Solutions are as follows:
    - Change "Live Company" DSN setup from the "System DSN" tab to the "File DSN" as a physical file.
    Another solution would be to change each excel sheet as follows:
    - for each of the affected queries, right click and select "Refresh Query"
    - this will cause a series of error messages ('public', 'us_english', 'db_name', etc)
    - next, it will bring up the ODBC selection pop-up
    - on the ODBC selection pop-up, pick the correct connection and click OK
    - ** IMPORTANT ** on the next screen, expand the "Advanced Options >>" (or just "Options >>") and remove "Microsoft @Query" from the Application Name.
    - hit okay and then "Refresh" the query again.

    Top

  25. How do I create a new Data Source to be able to access Streamline Data from external sources such as Microsoft Excel Query?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Creating New Data Sources to access Streamline data in Excel Query.pdf

    Top

  26. What is the hotkey I need to press in order to identify a query string variable in Streamline?
    CTL + F1

    Top

  27. How do I create a query based on Historical Inventory Valuations?
    The historical average cost is stored in 'average_cost_history' but this file does not store dates. You need to link it to 'inv_trans_details' file. There are batch number and internal sequence numbers that need to be linked on each file as well to get accurate results.

    Top

  28. How do I avoid duplicate lines when querying descriptions?
    When Querying Product Descriptions using file 'prod_adddesc' The column entitled "prad_desc_line" has to be added with the number 1 to the report, so that the report did not try to run both description lines and therefore duplicate each part quantity on the report.

    Top

  29. What table can I find Fill Rate information to query?
    The fill rate is not a stored table, it is a formula:
    Pwstat_hits / (pwstat_hits + pwstat_misses) * 100
    These fields are found in the table: prod_whs_statistics

    Top

  30. I am trying to create Sales Margin Report in OBDC. What data tables should I use?
    Use the table ‘sales_history’ and you will need to calculate your own margins as the difference between the sales & costs figures.

    Top

  31. I need to create a Sales Report by Affiliation, is this possible?
    There are no reports by affiliation, partially because the customer-affiliation and customer-shipto-affiliation relationships are not necessarily one-to-one. A customer can belong to many (or no) affiliations and the same is true at the ship-to level. Since the sales documents do not retain nor ask for an affiliation code there is no way to track these figures.
    If you assume that you only have 1 affiliation code assigned per customer then you could query the sales analysis table (sales_history) using the sah_sort_id of Z2. These records are by fiscal year, by customer. (Records with a code of Z17 are by customer and ship-to, if needed)
    You would then need to link to table cust_affiliation to pick up the proper affiliation (or the table cust_shipto_aff if by customer and shipto).
    All this assumes of course that you have working knowledge of MS Query, SQL Query or a 3rd party reporting product such as Crystal Reports.

    Top

  32. When I query the Customer File, it shows some customers linked to Affiliation codes but when I view the customer in AR there is no affiliation code linked?
    The issue is the 'caff_temporary_id' field. It appears that it is a terminal ID, and any records in the table with a value other than ZERO in that column are tied to a specific terminal process and are temporary. So when you do this query, you should only be looking at records where 'caff_temporary_id=0'

    Top

  33. What tables will provide booking/open order information to query?
    so_ordrev_details: contains info by product, product line, qty's etc...
    so_ordrev_headers: contains information about the order stage, 0=Open
    so_order_headers: contains information such as Rep, po number, terms etc...

    Top

  34. I am using table cust_summary_info to create a report but it does not seem to be giving me results?
    The table cust_summary_info holds information that is only updated in specific routines in the system and is not maintained completely 'live'. It was developed specifically with 'Goldmine' integration. If you use Goldmine Integration and if you are going to query this table, you would need to make sure it is up-to-date before executing your Query. There is an option: Sales Analysis ' Integrate Contact Mgmt ' Goldmine Integration ' Update Customer Summary that should perform a complete update of this table. Again, you would need to do this before executing your query.

    Top

  35. What are the values of srca_type_flg in sales_rep_change_aud and their meaning? I see values of C, R, S and P?
    This table gets written whenever the sales rep code is changed for a customer or ship-to. The flag is set based on where you made the change.
    If the flag is 'C', that means you changed the code from within the main customer screen.
    If the flag is 'S', the rep was changed on an individual ship-to code, from within the ship-to maintenance screen.
    If the flag is 'R', the rep was changed using the Change Sales Rep program found on the menu: Accounts Receivable ' Change Master File Codes ' Sales Rep Code Change.
    If the flag is 'P', rep by product line, that is written when you use the screen 'Rep by Product Line' from within the ship-to maintenance.

    Top

  36. Is it possible to find out who closed a PO?
    It does not show it on the Audit inquiry, but the system does track it.
    You need to query file PO_headers, and the field is called Poh_lastchange_user
    It shows you the last user that modified the po, and that includes closing it.

    Top

  37. Inventory > Master Files > Notes > Where are the Product Notes stored?
    Notes are stored in table 324 general memos where flg='P', key1=product code, key2=prodline & memo2 are the notes.

    Top

  38. File 'gmem_memo2' in the general_memos folder contains the Memo's that are entered against customers. How do I determine the Customer the memos belong to?
    If you set the system _flag field to "C" the gmem_key1 field should be the customer code.

    Top

  39. How to generate a crystal report showing all orders not linked to transfers or Po's?
    You would have to link po_whs_details to so_ordrev_details. These links are doable, although can be tricky. You would have to do a search to see if the records exists in the po__whs_details, if a match is found, then its linked so the record would be omitted.

    Top

  40. Does the system track where the pricing used came from? Example if it came from a Quote, Deal, Price Matrix, manual manipulation, etc?
    There is a field called srd_pricetype_flg on the so_ordrev_details file
    This field will track where the price was originally picked up from, but if it is overwritten by the user, that is not tracked.
    The values represent the following information:
    C = contracts
    D = deal
    I = item pricing
    Q = quote
    L = last
    S = standard
    A = not used

    Top

  41. Table 'Customers' contains a field 'cu_last_orderdate' Is this field maintained?
    cu_last_orderdate is maintained if Business Rules O/P 38 & O/P 40 are set to work properly.

    Top

  42. How can I find out if an item was on a sales order and deleted off?
    so_hist_details. It contains the order, line, USER, date, time and a field called sohd_flag_flg that will contain 'D' if the line of the sales order was deleted.

    Top

  43. If I needed to query the product database, how would I pull in the file names for images and spec docs?
    There is a table 'prod_images' that holds these values. You can link to it from the product table via the product code & product line.

    Top

  44. How do I query a table to obtain a list of records that do not contain a value?
    An Example of this type of query would be a listing of items that do not have a bin location. Trying to filter the query so show only records with no values can sometimes be tricky. Most users will want to use the value NULL but that isn't correct as we typically don't store NULL values in our tables. The short answer using the example above regarding the items with no bin locations is that we set the criteria to say [pw_bin_location1 EQUALS ''] … where the '' are 2 single quotes. That filters out all the products with bin locations. As a general rule, for the most part you will use '' to filter out blank values. This will apply to most text fields.

    Top

  45. The general_memos table has a "gmem_system_flg" What flag corresponds to what memo field in the system. Is a list available defining all the types?
    According to the file definition, here is the list:
    A=A/P Invoice
    C=Customers
    D=Debit Memo
    I=Invoices (A/R)
    P=Products,
    Q=Quotes
    V=Vendors
    Y=Payment
    Z=Credit Memo
    L=Sales Orders Line Details
    The sales order lines are not easy to link because the order, rev & line are all combined with 15 characters for the order, a hyphen, 5 characters for the rev, another hyphen and 5 characters for the line. The numbers are all padded with spaces. So if you had order 98765, rev 0, line 1 (and I'll use an 'x' for the space) you'd see:
    'xxxxxxxxxx98765-xxxx0-xxxx1'

    Top

  46. What file name and field controls the Return to Stock or Price Adjustment field in the Credit Memo?
    In the table so_order_headers, there is a field called soh_doctype_flg. When the document is a credit memo, this field will be 'CM'. Right after it there is a field 'soh_cm_backtoinv_log' that indicates if the products are going back to inventory or not. This would be TRUE when it is a Return to Stock, and FALSE when it is a Price Adjustment.

    Top

  47. What file can I query to see Sales Order Changes Audit?
    There are two files: so_hist_details and so_hist_headers. You need to use the FLG field to track the different status (ie- D = line deleted)

    Top

  48. Is there a quote report that shows only active quotes that haven't been changed into an order yet?
    Since a quote can be converted to an order and left open, there is really no easy way to see open un-converted quotes. At least there is no system generated report that will capture this. You could probably query this information but it would be tricky.
    You would need to link the quote table to the order header, which contains a field for quote number. You'd be looking for records that DIDN'T exist, rather than those that DO exist. MS Query would have difficulty with this logic, but it could be done as long as the query is kept very simple.
    Using Crystal Reports would be easier.

    Top

  49. How to query data to find blank values:
    This applies to Microsoft Query.
    Numeric fields ending in AMT or QTY = 0
    Logical fields (true/false) = 1 for true, 0 for false
    String fields = "" - double quotes.

    Top

  50. Is there a field I can query that maintains inventory movement (which would include sales and kit building) instead of just the sales field?
    There is a file: rawmat_movement. The table does show the raw materials that have been used for kits but doesn't show the sales, so you're still left with needing to get data from multiple sources. A crystal report would be needed that would look at the in_trans_details table and pick up all the transactions for the raw material and then summarize the data into a grid. It is not an easy task, but it is doable. Since it is somewhat complicated a standard query won't cut it you'd need Crystal or something similar.

    Top

  51. Is there any way I can export out all the product notes which have the "Popup Comments in Quote/Order Entry" flag turned on?
    The 'pop up' flags are stored in the 'products' table. There are 4 of them, called 'pr_comments_in_ppp_maint_log', 'pr_comments_in_ppp_valid_log', 'pr_comments_in_po_maint_log' and 'pr_comments_in_oe_log'.
    The comments themselves are held in the 'general_memos' table.
    The system flag is 'P', key1 is the product, key2 is the product line and the memo itself is in the field memo2.

    Top

  52. I want to write a Crystal Report or Query that prints out customer notes entered. What tables do I use?
    The table is 'standard_notes':
    Stn_module will be 'A/R'
    Stn_recordtype will either be 'CC' for credit comment or 'NT' for note
    Stn_primary_ref will be the customer code.
    But here's the trick, …the credit comments and notes are entered by date, time and user. So each line has that info as well. And instead of holding the entire note as a single field, each line of up to 100 characters is stored.
    Line '1' of each note contains summary info of date, time & user. It's a very creative way of doing it. And sometimes all that's there is a header line with no actual note lines.

    Top

  53. How can I write a query showing the Last Payment Date for Customer Invoices?
    You can use table ar_invoices. There is a field fully paid flag and fully paid date. When the record says 2099-12-31 it means that the invoice is NOT fully paid so you should only be checking records that are not 2099-11-31.
    Alternatively you could scan ar_invoices_details, linking to ar_invoices via the internal sequence and look at the records type 'P' = payment. For each change of internal sequence (i.e.: each invoice) and you could take the MAX of the date from the details records.

    Top

  54. How do I create a query by inventory transactions by date by inventory transaction types? For example, I want to see all Confirmed shipments or all cancelled stock receipts etc…
    The tables will be in_trans_details and in_trans_headers (the trans_ tables only hold manual entries, the in_trans_ tables hold everything including the system generated ones so that is why you need to use the in_trans tables)
    You will link via batch_intseq and pick up inh_transtype_id to get the type.
    The only other thing to know is thatyou should then link to inv_trans_codes via the inh_transtype_id to get the description, and also for an important field called invt_plus_minus.
    This field tells you how the transaction type affects inventory. For example, CO (Confirmed Shipment) is a minus (-) because it relieves from inventory. Conversely, C/R (Customer Return) is a plus (+).

    Top

  55. How does external reporting affect locking in Streamline?
    Document attached.
    Document: _FAQ - How does external reporting affect locking in Streamline.pdf

    Top



Release Notes

  1. Release notes for version 1000-0020 released Nov 22, 2012.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0020.pdf

    Top

  2. Release notes for version 1000-0021 released Nov 29, 2012.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Relesae Notes - 1000-0021.pdf

    Top

  3. Release notes for version 1000-0022 released Dec 20, 2012.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0022.pdf

    Top

  4. Release notes for version 1000-0023 released Jan 10, 2013.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: release Notes - 1000-0024.pdf

    Top

  5. Release notes for version 1000-0025 released Mar 22, 2013.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0025.pdf

    Top

  6. How do I see what release version I am running?
    The release version you have is shown at the bottom of the Streamline main menu left of centre. See attached.
    Document: Release Version.pdf

    Top

  7. Release notes for version 1000-0026 released April 18, 2013.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0026.pdf

    Top

  8. Release notes for version 1000-0027 released May 23, 2013.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0027.pdf

    Top

  9. Release notes for version 1000-0028 released June 10, 2013..
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0028.pdf

    Top

  10. Release notes for version 1000-0029 released July 19, 2013.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0029.pdf

    Top

  11. Release notes for version 1000-0030 released August 22, 2013.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0030.pdf

    Top

  12. Release notes for version 1000-0031 released Sept. 12, 2013.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0031.pdf

    Top

  13. Release notes for version 1000-0032 released Oct. 24, 2013.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0032.pdf

    Top

  14. Release notes for version 1000-0033 released Dec. 5, 2013.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0033.pdf

    Top

  15. Release notes for version 1000-0034 released Jan. 22, 2014.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0034.pdf

    Top

  16. Release notes for version 1000-0035 released Feb 20, 2014.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0035.pdf

    Top

  17. Release notes for version 1000-0036 released Mar 20, 2014
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0036.pdf

    Top

  18. Release notes for version 1000-0037 released Apr 24, 2014.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0037.pdf

    Top

  19. Release notes for version 1000-0038 released June 6, 2014.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0038.pdf

    Top

  20. Release notes for version 1000-0039 released July 11, 2014.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 1000-0039.pdf

    Top

  21. Release notes for version 10.0.1.0000 to 10.0.1.0003 released August 31,, 2014 to Oct 2, 2014.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 10.0.1.0000 to 10.0.1.0004.pdf

    Top

  22. Release notes for version 10.0.3.0000 to 10.0.3.0006 released Sept 30, 2014 to Jan 6, 2015.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 10.0.3.0000 to 10.0.3.0006.pdf

    Top

  23. Release notes for version 10.0.4.0000 to 10.0.4.0004 released Dec 31, 2014 to Mar 30, 2015.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 10.0.4.0000 to 10.0.4.0004.pdf

    Top

  24. Release notes for version 10.1.1.0000 to 10.1.1.0005 released March 31, 2015 to June 30, 2015.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 10.1.1.0000 to 10.1.1.0005.pdf

    Top

  25. Release notes for version 10.1.2.0000 to 10.1.2.0004 released July 1, 2015 to Sept 30, 2015, 2015.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 10.1.2.0000 to 10.1.2.0004.pdf

    Top

  26. Release Notes for version 10.1.3.0000 to 10.1.3.0004 released Oct 1, 2015 to Jan 7, 2016.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 10.1.3.0000 to 10.1.3.0004.pdf

    Top

  27. Release Notes for version 10.1.4.0000 to 10.1.4.0005 released Jan 7, 2016 to April 7, 2016.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 10.1.4.0000 to 10.1.4.0005.pdf

    Top

  28. Release Notes for version 10.2.1.0000 released April 7, 2016.
    See attached.
    If you are on an earlier version you will need an update to receive changes shown in these release notes.
    Document: Release Notes - 10.2.1.0000 to 10.2.1.0000.pdf

    Top

  29. Release Notes for version 10.2.2.0000 released June 7, 2016.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes v10 2 2.pdf

    Top

  30. Release Notes for version 10.2.3.0000 released Sept 7, 2016.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes v10 2 3.pdf

    Top

  31. Release Notes for version 10.2.4.0000 released Jan 7, 2017.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes v10 2 4.pdf

    Top

  32. Release Notes for version 10.3.1.0000 released April 7, 2017.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes v10 3 1.pdf

    Top

  33. Release notes for version 10.3.2.0000 released July 7, 1017.
    See attached.

    Top

  34. Release notes for version 10.3.3.0000 released Oct 7, 2017
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes v10.3.3.pdf

    Top

  35. Release notes for version 10.3.4.0000 released Dec 7, 2017
    See attached
    Document: Release Notes_V10.3.4.1000.pdf

    Top

  36. Release notes for version 2018.1 released March 19, 2018.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes v2018.1.0.pdf

    Top

  37. Release notes for version 2018.3 released July 25, 2018.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes v2018.3.0.pdf

    Top

  38. Release notes for version 2018.4 released October 26, 2018.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes_v2018.4.pdf

    Top

  39. Release notes for version 2019.1 released January 28, 2019.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes v2019.1.pdf

    Top

  40. Release notes for version 2019.2 released May 22, 2019.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes_v2019.2.pdf

    Top

  41. Release notes for version 2019.3 released July 24, 2019.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes_v2019.3.pdf

    Top

  42. Release notes for version 2019.4 released October 25, 2019.
    See attached.
    Document: Release Notes_v2019.4.pdf

    Top



Returns Authorization

  1. How do I charge a customer a restocking fee through the RA?
    You create a misc product code in the system called 'restocking'. When you create the credit memo from the RA screen, the system will pop up a screen allowing you to select your 'restocking code', you have the ability to enter an amount, and then click ok. The system will then display the GL distribution screen automatically where you can enter the offset GL account.
    A default MISC item can be set in Control File Maintenance - in the A/R Tab.

    Top

  2. We need to return product from one of our Suppliers. Where would I be able to do this?
    You can record the return through, Inventory > Processing > Transaction Entry, choose the 'Transaction Type' of 'Return to Supplier' and make sure the 'Affect Inventory' flag is on so it will remove the goods from your inventory. You can also process this through, Returns Authorization > Processing > Supplier RA Entry. This will print a 'Supplier Return Authorization Form', when you 'Process' the transaction, the quantity will also be removed from inventory when you 'Process'. The posting will credit the inventory and debit the RA Clearing account setup in the, Returns Authorizations > Master Files > RA GL Integration Maint. It will update the posting when you run the next Inventory Register and Update.
    You will not be able to enter a cost on these transactions, the system must use the products current average cost to remove inventory from stock in order to keep the inventory sub ledger balance to the GL control account for inventory.
    When you enter the credit from your supplier as an AP Invoice, there is a field for RA#, you must drill on this field and pick the Supplier RA that matches to the credit for the goods returned. The amount of the credit will probably not match the amount the return posted to the RA Clearing account and it is up to you to make a correction in the GL distribution for this. The system does not have a Sub Ledger report to balance to the RA Clearing account, this is something you would need to track and balance manually.
    The above is a brief explanation of a Supplier Return assuming the item being returned is sitting in your inventory and that your Supplier will be sending you a credit for it. The help on RA's explains some of the other possible scenarios.

    Top

  3. Why do some records appear in red in the Supplier RA Inquiry screen?
    I a Supplier RA is displayed in red in the Supplier RA Inquiry Screen, it indicates that the RA has been matched to an Accounts Payable transaction.

    Top

  4. What is the difference between the Flag and Status button in: Return Authorization > Reports and Inquiries > Supplier Ra Inquiry?
    The Flag button is associated with the Ra's that have been completed automatically by the system. Currently Credit Notes, and Replacements are completed automatically through by the system.

    Top

  5. How can I prevent users from changing the cost on the Supplier RA entry screen?
    This is prevented through: Inventory > Master Files > Transaction Types. And setting the field 'allow cost chage' to value 3 = disallow.

    Top

  6. How does the Supplier Reference field work in RA processing?
    Please see document attached for information.
    Document: Supplier RA - reference number.pdf

    Top

  7. What are the conditions and user rights to be able to modify the RA status codes?
    Rights needed: Rights To Modify Tables. Conditions req.: Any status code is modifiable that does not have 'ZZ' as the first 2 characters or is not 'N/A'.

    Top

  8. There is a button to Delete/Complete Customer RA, but when I click on it, it only gives me the option to delete - there is no complete option?
    If you use that button to Delete/Complete an RA that is currently uncompleted, it shows up in the completed filters afterwards. The system is actually completing it, as there is no way to delete the RA once it's been processed.

    Top

  9. What is the standard process for doing Supplier RA's.
    See attached.
    Document: AP RA - Standard Process.pdf

    Top

  10. How do I call up an existing Customer RA and delete a line from it?
    If there is no Credit Note linked then you can call it up again in the entry program, if you hit the F7 key, it should let you enter the RA number and then hit return and it will bring it up again. You should then be able to park on the line you want to modify (make sure you are in modify mode) then hit the F3 key to delete. You can delete the entire RA if you are parked in the header section and hit F3 to delete also.

    Top

  11. How do I cancel a Supplier RA that has been processed?
    There is no way to cancel a processed supplier RA. What you can do however is use the Inventory Transaction Type called Supplier Receipt to process the return of inventory. You can enter REJECTED into the internal reference field.
    This will update the Flag of the RA to completed, but will also update the Status to 'received' You can then go back into the RA through: Return authorization > Reports and Inquiries > Supplier RA Inquiry > Call up the RA and change the status to 'rejected'
    Another option is to just process an Inventory Receipt to offset to the same RA clearing GL account.

    Top



Sales Analysis

  1. Are Inter-company orders included in Sales Analysis?
    Only the units portion of inter-company sales goes to sales analysis. (For movement purposes). Sales and Cost are not posted. Any report based on sales analysis, such as the Sales Margin report, will not include inter-company sales. There is a separate sales report for inter-company sales.

    Top

  2. When we sell a kit, either 'Built to Order' or 'Assembled', where does the sale reside? Is it against the kit, or the raw material?
    The sale will reside against the kit.
    Although we do track the usage separately for the raw materials, and that can be seen from the Product Code Lookup > Movement. The raw materials movement for type A items is recorded when the transaction assembling the type A item is posted. The raw materials movement for type B items is recorded when the invoice for the type B item is posted.

    Top

  3. We would like to restrict our users to seeing only a very few sales reports - what is the best way to do that?
    The most limiting combination of rights for sales analysis was to give access to only ROSA (Right Of Sales Analysis) and RTSASRR (Right To Sales Analysis Sales Rep Reports).
    This limits their options to the following:
    Sales Analysis -> Sales Rep Reports -> Sales Reports
    Sales Analysis -> Sales Rep Reports -> Customer Sales Report.
    You can further restrict this by if you are using the ‘Sales Rep’ flag in the User Maintenance screen. If you have this flag set for sales reps you can also enter their rep code in the field for ‘Reporting Filter Options’ in the User Maintenance screen. This limits the sales the reports that can be printed to only those sorted by sales rep and it defaults in the rep code you have specified so that they can only see the sales for that rep code.
    If you are not currently using the ‘sales rep flag’ in user maintenance – you probably don’t want to just turn it on without some careful consideration as it does affect other areas of the software.
    Flagging a user as a ‘Sales Rep’ in the User Maintenance Screen has the following implications:
    The user CANNOT:
    Delete a Quote
    Close a Quote
    Create an Order from a Quote
    Create a Contract
    Change the Ship to on a quote.
    In Sales Analysis -> Sales Analysis Reports -> Sales Reports - only reports where a sort method is sales rep will be displayed.


    Top

  4. How do I balance Commission Report Sales to EM Company Overview Sales?
    Balance both reports back to the Invoice Status Report for posted invoice only. Find and remove any invoices done as AR Invoice Adjustments as these will not be included on the Commission report or SA Reports. A/R invoices do not impact sales analysis or commission reports and invoice history reports as they drive from the BOL tables and A/R invoices only affect A/R accounts and the G/L and not the BOL tables. (IE there is nothing being shipped on an A/R invoice so there is no Bill of lading record) .
    An example if attached.



    Document: Commission Report Balancing to EM OV.pdf

    Top

  5. Why don't my Sales Analysis reports balance to the GL for a given period?
    There are a few places where the sales analysis GL can go out to the reports. For example, if someone posts something directly to the GL account - there would not be an offsetting transaction in the Sales Analysis report.
    Check for any journal entries or postings from other modules that may have been done to the GL that did not affect Sales Analysis.
    Sometimes the Sales Analysis file does not get updated correctly with the information from the Sales Order Invoice Register update. The update to the Sales Analysis file is the last component of updating this register - and if there is an interruption to the server as the result of a technical or other issue it may not finish posting all the data. To check if this is the case go to Company Setup -> Rebuild Sales Analysis and run the rebuild utility for the period in question.
    If after running the rebuild you are still out of balance - please have a look at Sales Order Processing -> Reports and Inquiries -> Invoices Status Report. Basically the Invoice Status Report includes sales from all areas and is the report to use to balance back to the GL revenue accounts used. Sales can come from Sales Order Invoices, Accounts Receivable Adjustment Invoices, SWO Invoices, Commission Order Invoices. The only ones the Sales Analysis Reports show are the Sales Order Invoices.
    First, make sure you can balance the GL to the Invoice Status report, when printed for posted invoices only and including all types of invoices. If that balances, you can then balance the GL back to the sales on the Sales Analysis reports, by totaling sales posted to the GL for Sales Order Invoices registers only.
    Support can investigate balancing issues for you - however, if we find that the out of balance was caused by a procedural error / reconciling issue, our time is billable.


    Document: What can cause differences between the Invoice status report and the sales GL account.pdf

    Top

  6. When do invoices write to the commicsson files.
    When the Invoice Register is posted.

    Top

  7. How do the Commission Reports work?
    When you run the Commission Payable Preparation, a table called ‘commission_pay_work’ is built based on the ranges selected. The preparation then launches the Commission Payable Maintenance program and shows every invoice where commission is due, even if the amount is zero. The key element is a flag in the bol_headers table called bolh_comm_paid_log. This field indicates if the commission has been paid. If it is FALSE, then the invoice will appear in the maintenance screen, again, even if the amount is zero. When you click UPDATE on that screen, the bolh_comm_paid_log is set to TRUE if the box ‘Final Payment’ has been checked beside the invoice.
    Also on the maintenance screen there is a PRINT button. This will print a report of the invoices that are shown on the maintenance screen. The next time you generate the commission_pay_work file with a new set of ranges the screen will show the new invoices and so will that report. In addition, if you re-run the preparation for a date range where you have ALREADY updated the bolh_comm_paid_log field, those invoices will NOT show up because they are tagged as having been fully paid.
    Now, on the commission menu there is the option ‘Commission Report’. This is different. This report does not look at the commission_pay_work file – it goes back to the bol_header table to gather the information. This report does not care about whether the ‘paid’ flag has been set because this report has its own set of range criteria. Further, it does not care if the commission amount is zero – every applicable invoice will be printed. You can look at this report as more of a ‘historical’ report because you can run it for this period, last week, last year or whenever and see what the commission figures were for those invoices.


    Top

  8. If I sell to a US customer, will the sale be recorded in US or home currency?
    All sales are posted to the GL in home currency and the Sales analysis reports are based on home currency as well.

    Top

  9. What does the flag 'Based on accumulated sales' do in the Sales Rep Commission Setup Table?
    The flag works as follows:
    The Break level amounts in the definition is the starting level. Invoice amount in excess of the break level qualifies for the comm rate for the break level. Invoice amount portion below the break level qualifies for the comm rate from the previous break level. The only exception is this logic is the first level, because invoice amt below this level still gets the comm rate of this level.
    Example:
    1st inv of $1000 gets comm = $10 (above $1000 qualifies for 1.5%)
    2nd inv of $ 1010 (accumulates to $ 2010) : $10 portion of it gets 2% = 0.02 commission, remaining $1000 of its gets 1.5% = $15 commission.

    Top

  10. There is a statement 'Last Year (this total differs from the sum of the details, as it includes last year sales for records with no sales in the specified fiscal year)' that shows on Sales Analysis Summary Reports. What does it mean?
    When you use the "Print Last Years Totals" flag and the "With Details" flag the details will only show for lines that have values in the current year and therefore may not total to the Last Years Total value.
    For example if I print a report by Sales Rep it will only show Reps on the report that have values to show for the current year. So if Rep A had sales in the current year, they would show, and if they had sales for last year they would also show. However if Rep B did not have sales for the current year, they would not show on the report and therefore there sales for last year would not show either.
    However the Total Sales for Last Year would include last years sales for both Rep A and Rep B.
    Put another way, the condition to determine if a item should print on the report is based on the current year not being zero, last year is not considered. The addition of the "With Details" option being added was limited due to the existing login of the report. To change it would require a rewrite of the report which was not feasable. We decided to leave the option available with a message to explain it, as some may still find it useful.

    Top

  11. I am looking for a profit margin report by, Sales Group, Customer or Customer Type?
    Here are 3 areas you can find reporting of margins based on sorts listed.
    Sales Analysis > Sales Analysis Reports > Summary Reports, can be printed by Customer and by Customer Type.
    Sales Order Processing > Reports and Inquiries > Order/Invoice Analysis, this report comes up to the screen first and you can then drill on a customer count field to see a further breakdown by Customer, etc. See an example attached.
    Executive Management > Company Overview, this can be filtered by any of the 3 shown below also.
    Document: Order Invoice Report to see Margins.pdf

    Top

  12. How does Business rule SO 51 - Commissions based on line items vs invoice work?
    When the BR is set to INVOICE - you can set commissions table based on variations of sales rep, customer ID, customer type, and order type. The Product and Product line settings need to be blank, as they do not work when BR so 51 is set to INVOICE. Also when the BR is set to invoice, you can't use qty breaks either, as the calculation on it is done on the total invoice amount and cost.

    Top

  13. User-Defined Budgets overview
    Please see attached documentation.
    Document: White Paper for User-Defined Budgets.pdf

    Top

  14. Sales Analysis > Sales Analysis Reports > Matrix Reports, how do these work with commission orders?
    When printing the report for commission orders, the Matrix reports program builds the
    data based on the commission customer, not the actual customer on the order. For example, orders
    111, 222, 333 and 444 are all for customer A, sales rep 01, but the commission customer
    is B - there is a 2nd folder check box on the order entry screen in the customer info section
    that shows the commission customer.

    Top

  15. On the Summary Sales Analysis Reports, there is a field "TRAD.ACC" What is this field representing?
    These are identified as 'Trading Accounts' in the program logic. When printing by customer, this is a COUNTER of the number of customer
    'hits' per period, this year & last year. So basically it tells you how many customers had a sale (or credit) for each period of the report. There doesn't seem to be any condition for printing the figures except for the report type (by customer).

    Top

  16. In Sales Analysis Reports, when running a report by Warehouse, which warehouse is used, the line details or the header branch?
    Sales Analysis reports are based on the Detail Line of the order.

    Top

  17. The rebuild sales analysis is not working, it keeps crashing?
    The sales analysis file should be rebuilt when there is nobody on the system to avoid locking. Doing a complete rebuild of all periods take a very long time to run through, and so we usually recommend that you attempt to run a few periods at a time. We have found this method to be much more successful than attempting a complete rebuild. When performing a complete rebuild, it will sometimes appear that it is hung, or not responding, when in reality it is still processing in the back ground. Another common problem is running this remotely and having your session time out, or an internet interruption will cause it to crash. In the most recent versions we have now added a message to notify you when the rebuild did not complete successfully, however this only work if the session has not crashed. When you see this message you need to rebuild it again as it was interrupted somehow, likely caused by a loss in connection.

    Try it again tonight, and start with one or two periods only, and then work your way back until you have gone through all periods. If you find that running one or two periods is rather quick, try increasing the range by a few more periods.

    Top

  18. Do Price Adjustment credit memos flow through to sales analysis?
    Yes, both Price Adjustments and Return to Stock credit memo types flow through to sales analysis.

    Top

  19. Why are there total sales missing from my sales analysis reports?
    If you find that your sales figures have dropped since you last ran a rebuild, then it is more than likely due to the fact that a customer has been flagged as intercompany sales. This is a flag in the AR master file. Intercompany customer sales are excluded from sales analysis. When the sales is rebuild it rechecks this flag, and exclude any sales for intercompany, even if they were included in a prior sales rebuild. To reverse this, you need to uncheck the flag, rebuild sales and the invoices will get picked up again. The Intercompany sales are included in the Customer Sales Report, but not in the Invoice Status Report. So you can use the customer sales report to compare to the Invoice Status Report to find what customers are different on each report.
    Another possible reason is that Business Rule SO 42 was changed prior to the last rebuild. This business rule will control weather or not Misc. sales are included in the Sales Analysis.

    Top

  20. What does the program: Installation > Reset Programs > Recalculate Commission Amounts do?
    When you use the program under Installation > Reset programs > Recalculate Commission Amounts, this only works for records that have NOT yet been marked as final payment in the Commission Payable Preparation screen. If the record has already been marked as final payment, then recalculating commissions does nothing, and does not bring the item back into the payable screen. The same information continues to print on Commission Report also.

    The only time the recalculate commission amounts program works is when you have a record that has not been flagged/marked as final payment.

    Top



Service Inquiry

  1. Our users are supposed to enter an order type for every order - most of the time it is the same order type - is there a way to have this come in automatically?
    Yes - You can define a default Order Type that will get picked up automatically. Go to - Sales Order Processing -> Master Files -> Order Types Maintenance. Select the Order Type that you want to set as the default, select Modify and then check the flag for Default. This type will automatically populate to the order type field but users will be able to change it for exceptions.

    Top



Service Work Order

  1. Are the Service Work Orders - Parts orders included in the 'On time Delivery Fill Report' located under: Sales Order Processing > Customer Performance?
    Yes - the the system does in fact include the PARTS orders from a service work order into the Fill Rate Report.

    Top

  2. How does the branch posting for such things as Labour Revenue work?
    In Service Work Order > Master Files > Work Order GL Integration you can specify a branch code or you can leave it blank.
    If left blank, the system will post the labour revenue to the user’s branch. If there is no user warehouse specified, it posts to the main branch.
    If there is a branch code specified in the Work Order GL Integration, it posts to the specific branch code from the GL integration screen.

    Top

  3. How do I issue credit for Service Work Orders?
    If you are crediting for goods then you have to do a regular credit memo for the parts (you have to enter them as you can't link to a swo invoice) and if it's for labour etc you have to do an AR invoice and then do journal entries to reverse anything the GL accts that were originally affected. When you do a manual journal entry, you can change the 'Type' field to 'service work order' to link it back to the original transaction.

    Top

  4. Where do I see a list of transactions and invoices for a Service Work Order?
    Go to: Service work Order > Processing > Service Work Orders > Ensure your status is set properly (closed SWO) then click on the 'Transaction' button located on the left hand side of the screen. This will show you all the transactions as well as the invoice #'s for the service work order you are parked on.

    Top

  5. What is the hierarchy used to determine the Service Work Order billing rate?
    - If there is a service type linked to a customer entered - the rate from the customer service type is used.
    - If there is a service type entered - the rate from the service type is used.
    - If there is an equipmment type entered - the rate from the equipment type is used.
    - If there is a service rep entered - the rate from the service rep is used.

    Top

  6. In Service Inquiry screen under Equip Tab, how do I invoice items to show up with the serial # and to populate the Orig Invoice info button screen?
    Equipment Processing Notes:
    Setup:
    Inventory > Master File > Product Code Master, to setup an equipment item, make sure you fill in the Equipment Type field in the details master. Make sure you tick the serialized item flag for product to be tracked by serial numbers.
    Service Work Order > Master Files > Equipment Maint, items setup in inventory with an Equipment Type will now show up here. However items directly setup in the Equipment Maint screen do not show up as Inventory Items, but can be added later.
    Processing:
    Once a Sales Order is invoiced for an Inventory Item/Equipment Code it will show in the Service Inquiry screen for the customer with the Serial number, if was a serialized item. It must be a serialized product for it to show here. The Invoice and Purchase order information will also show up under the Orig/P Info button in the same screen.
    The invoice must be updated on a register before it will show up.
    It will only appear when processed and invoiced on a regular sales order invoice, not if done on a SWO invoice.

    Top

  7. I am trying to re-opened a closed task to invoice it, but I am not able to change the status. Why?
    This is s system restriction. Once a task on a SWO has been closed it can't be re-opened again. As per reference sid 21753.

    Top

  8. How do we enter an AP invoice against a Service Work Order?
    In the AP GL distribution, you change the TYPE column to Work Order – then select the work order, the task, and the cost category.

    Top

  9. How does the Preventative Maintenance program in Service Work Order work?
    Please see attached document for information.
    Document: Preventative Maintenance Schedule.pdf

    Top

  10. What is the intention of the button "Print Packing Slip" in the SWO screen?
    Print Packing Slip button would be enabled if w/o is linked to an RA & is either Approved or Approved Quote status. Otherwise the button is not enabled.

    Top

  11. SWO > Processing > ServiceWork Order, What is the difference between these two buttons:
    Both buttons go to the SWO Maintenance, so only difference is that the 'Modify' button parks on the SWO header & would allow a use to modify if they have 'Right To Create/Modify WO' otherwise it would show as 'View' button. The 'Task' button parks on the Task details only in query mode regardless of
    the right.

    Top

  12. When I have an unconfirmed parts order on a SWO, how do I process this?
    The fixed work order generates a posting for the inventory and material expense only for the parts order. You don't even need to reopen the task, and you can still confirm the order, and it will show up in the billing screen as a zero dollar invoice. Then when you invoice it, it generates an internal invoice for a credit to relieve the inventory and a debit to the mater expense.

    Otherwise, if this is not done, then you cannot record the inventory reduction and material expense.

    Top



Warehouse Management System

  1. Why when I create an item in a WMS warehouse does it not appear in WMS?
    See attached document.
    Document: Why when I create an item in a WMS warehouse does it not appear in WMS.pdf

    Top



©2019 Tecsys Inc.